Блог

aṁgāraḥ –ram [aṁg-āran Uṇ. 3. 134]

(1) Charcoal (whether heated or not); ghṛtakuṁbhasamā nārī

taptāṁgārasamaḥ pumān; uṣṇo dahati cāṁgāraḥ śītaḥ kṛṣṇāyate karaṁ

H. 1. 80; tvayā svahastenāṁgārāḥ karṣitāḥ Pt. 1 you have ruined yourself

with your own hands; cf. “to diga mine under one’s feet”; kurukulāṁgāra

Ve. 6 destroyer or pest of the Kuru family.

(2) The planet Mars.

(3) A plant hitāvalī, -kuṣṭakaḥ –hitāvalī.

(4) N. of a prince who fought with king Māndhatri. –ra a. Red, of a red

colour. –raṁ Red colour.

— Comp.

–avakṣepaṇaṁ [aṁgārā avakṣipyaṁte anena karaṇe lyuṭ] a vessel

to throw or extinguish coals.

–kārin a. [aṁgāraṁ karoti kṛ-ṇini] one who prepares coal for sale.

–kuṣṭhakaḥ [aṁgāravarṇaṁ kuṣṭhamiva-kan] N. of a plant hitāvalī.

–dhānī [aṁgārā dhīyaṁte asyāṁ; dhā-ādhāre lyuṭ ṅīp], –dhānikā

[svārthe kan] a portable fire-pan, brazier.

–paripācitaṁ [tṛ. ta.] roasted food or meat.

–parṇaṁ [aṁgāramiva parṇaṁ yasya] N. of a grove or forest. (–

rṇaḥ) [astyarthe ac] N. of Chitraratha, king of the Gandharvas. [On one

occasion, while he was sporting with his wife, he saw Kuntī with her five

sons proceeding to the capital of Pānchāla in disguise. He accosted them

and asked them to tell him where they were going, or to fight. Arjuna

accepted the challenge; but Aṅgāraparṇa finding Arjuna to be a very

skilful warrior gave him a secret lore called chākṣuṣī (endding one to see

the smallest things) and took from him in return a lore called Agniśirāstra

and became a friend of the Pāṇḍavas.]

–pātrī –śakaṭī a portable fire-pan.

–puṣpaḥ [aṁgāramiva lohitavarṇaṁ puṣpaṁ yasya saḥ] the plant

iṁgudī. –maṁjarī, –maṁjī [aṁgārā raktavarṇā maṁjarī yasyāḥ] a shrub

Cesalpinia Banducella (raktakaraṁjavṛkṣa). –vallarī, –vallī [aṁgārā iva

raktaphalatvāt raktā] N. of various plants, karaṁja, bhārgī, guṁjā. —

veṇuḥ [karma,] a sort of bamboo.

deity, a Brāhmaṇa, a tonic medicine ; Semicarpus Anacardium; Plumbago

Zeylanica ; N. of a bug ; (“ī”) f. Semicarpus Anacardium; Gloriosa (or

Methonica) Superba.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

agnimukha (agni + mukha) 1) adj. Agni “zum Munde habend.” — 2) m. a)

“Gottheit” H. an. 4, 42. MED. kh. 13. — b) “ein Brahman” ebend. — c) N.

zweier Pflanzen: a) “Plumbago zeylanica” H. an. 4, 42. VIŚVA im ŚKDR. —

b) “Semecarpus Anacardium” ebend. — 3) f. -mukhī a) “Semecarpus

Anacardium” AK. 2, 4, 2, 23. MED. kh. 13. — b) N. einer anderen Pflanze

= lāṅgalikī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

agnimukha 2) d) N. pr. einer Wanze PAÑCAT. 61, 1. — 3) b) d. i.

“Methonica superba” RATNAM. 38.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

agnimukha An Asura.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

agnimukha agni-mukha, m. Fire-mouth, N. of a bug;

-varṇa, n. of the colour of fire; red-hot;

-velā, f. time of kindling the sacred fire; afternoon;

-saraṇa, n. sacred fireplace.

anuraṁj 4 U.

(1) To be red; bhṛśamanvarajyadatuṣārakaraḥ Śi. 9. 7 (became red or

attached).

(2) To be delighted, find pleasure; tava prakīrtyā

jagatprahṛṣyatyanurajyate ca Bg. 11. 36.

(3) To be attached or devoted to, be fond of, love, like (with acc. or

loc.); samasthamanurajyaṁti viṣamasthaṁ tyajaṁti ca Ram.;

aśuddhaprakṛtau rājñi janatā nānurajyate Pt. 1. 301; bhrāturmṛtasya

bhāryāyāṁ yo’nurajyeta kāmataḥ Ms. 3. 173. –Caus.

(1) To make red, redden, dye, colour; sarasakisalayānuraṁjitairvā Śi.

7. 64, 8. 17, 12. 68; Dk. 168; Ki. 12. 23, 4. 27.

(2) To attach oneself to, please, gratify, conciliate, keep contented or

satisfied; anuraktaḥ prajābhiśca prajāścāpyanvaraṁjayat Ram.; kaṁṣṭaṁ

janaḥ kuladhanairanuraṁjanīyaḥ U. 1. 14; śiṣyaguṇānurāṁjitamanasaṁ

Pt. 1 pleased, gratified.

m. red colour

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

anurāga a. Become red, reddened. –gaḥ

(1) Redness.

(2) Devotion, attachment, contentment, loyalty (opp. aparāgaḥ); love,

affection, passion (with loc. or in comp.); āvirbhūtānurāgāḥ Mu. 4. 21;

kaṁṭakitena prathayati mayyanurāgaṁ kapolena S. 3. 15; R. 3. 10; –

iṁgitaṁ a gesture or external sign expressive of love; prasādastu śabdaḥ

syādanurāgajaḥ Ak.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

anurāga (von rañj mit anu) m. “Zuneigung” (Gegens. aparāga) H. 296.

praṇādastu śabdaḥ syādanurāgajaḥ AK. 1, 1, 5, 11. sthirānurāga R. 3, 3,

4. Das subj. im gen. M. 7, 154. R. 5, 19, 26. 66, 3. 6, 97, 3. das obj. im

loc.: kaṇṭakitena prathayati mayyanurāgaṁ kapolena ŚĀK. 63. na khalu

satyameva tāpasakanyakāyāmanurāgo me ŚĀK. ŚH. 41, 13. geht im

comp. voran: priyānurāgasya RAGH. 3, 10. kathānurāgaḥ “das

Wohlgefallen an Erzählungen” HIT. 27, 16, v. l. Am Ende eines comp. f. ā

R. 2, 12, 98 (bhāryāḥ kṛtānurāgāḥ). AK. 3, 4, 76 (atyarthānurāgāyāṁ ca

yoṣiti).

anurāga “Färbung”: tattadvarṇasvarūpānurāga Ind. St. 5, 31. “Röthe” ŚIŚ.

9, 8.

anurāga , anurāgo vṛthā strīṇām “Zuneigung” Spr. (II) 323. tadanurāgeṇa

“zu dessen Zufriedenheit” 5665.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

anurāga anurāga, i. e. anu-rañj + a m.

1. Redness, Śiś. 9, 1.

2. Love, Daśak. in Chr. 183, 18.

3. Good will, Man. 7, 154.

— Comp. kṛta-, adj. f. gā, loving, Rām. 2, 12, 98. sa-, adj. impassioned.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

anurāga m. colouring, redness, affection (poss. -vant); red, affectionate,

enamoured (saha or loc.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

anurāga pu° anu + ranja + ghañ . atyantaprītau, snehe ca . anurūpo

rāgaḥ prā° sa° . anurūparāge . anurāgavantamapi locanayoriti māghaḥ

praṇādastu śabdaḥ syādanurāgaja ityamaraḥ . priyānurāgasya

manaḥsamunnateriti raghuḥ . anugato raḥgaṁ gatisa° .

prāptalauhityavarṇe tri° .

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aruṇatā (von aruṇa) f. “röthliche Färbung” SUŚR. 1, 36, 3.

aruṇatā , kusumbhakusumāruṇatā ŚIŚ. 9, 14.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aruṇatā aruṇa + tā, f. Tawny (the colour), Śiś. 9, 14.

horses, of cows, of the team of Ushas, the Aśvins, &c.)

aruṣa mf (“aruṣi” ; x 5, 5) n. (“as”) m. the sun, the, day (cf. “arūṣa”)

aruṣa mf (“aruṣi” ; x 5, 5) n. (“ās, āsas”) m. pl. the red horses of Agni ,

(“aruṣī”) f. the dawn

mf (“aruṣi” ; x 5, 5) n. a red mare (a N. applied to the team of Agni

and Ushas, and to Agni’s flames)

aruṣa mf (“aruṣi” ; x 5, 5) n. (“am”) n. shape

aruṣa Nom. P. “aruṣati”, to go

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aruṣa a.

(1) Not angry.

(2) Shining, bright; reddish.

(3) Unhurt.

(4) Moving, going about (as a horse). –ṣaḥ

(1) The red horse of Agni; a flame.

(2) The sun; the day as presided over by the sun.

(3) The red storm-cloud. –ṣī

(1) The dawn.

(2) A flame.

(3) N. of the wife of Bhṛgu and mother of Aurva.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aruṣa 1) adj. f. aruṣī “röthlich”, die Farbe Agni’s und seiner Rosse; er

selbst erscheint als “rothes” Ross ṚV. 3, 1, 4. 7, 5. 31, 3. 4, 6, 9. 5, 1, 5.

12, 2. 6. 6, 48, 6. 49, 2. von Pferden, Kühen, Gespannen der Götter,

besonders der Morgenröthe, der Aśvin, des Bṛhaspati 1, 118, 5. 92, 1. 20.

4, 15, 6. 43, 6. 7, 75, 6. 97, 6. Soma 9, 8, 6. 25, 4. 61, 21. 82, 1. 111, 1.

VS. 13, 43. Blitzflammen: antaḥ kṛṣṇāṁ aruṣairdhāmabhirgāt ṚV. 3, 31,

21. die Sonne als “röthlicher” Vogel 5, 47, 3. — 2) m. a) “die rothen

Hengste” Agni’s, “die Flammen” NAIGH. 1, 14. rihantyūdho aruṣāso asya

ṚV. 1, 146, 2. 94, 10. 2, 10, 2. 7, 16, 2. Indra’s Pferde AV. 3, 3, 2. — b)

“die Sonne, der Tag”: riṇakti kṛṣṇīraruṣāya panthām ṚV. 7, 71, 1.

aruṣasya duhitarā virūpe stṛbhiranyā pipiśe sūro anyā 6, 49, 3. Vgl. arūṣa.

— c) “die röthliche Sturmwolke”: utāruṣasya vi ṣyanti dhārāḥ ṚV. 1, 85, 5.

vi rocatāmaruṣo bhānunā śuciḥ 10, 43, 9 (vgl. 1, 114, 5: divo

varāhamaruṣaṁ kapardinam). — 3) f. -ṣī. a) “die Morgenröthe” NAIGH. 1,

8. ṚV. 1, 30, 21. 71, 1. 3, 55, 11. 10, 8, 3. — b) “eine rothe Stute” (auch

vom “Gespann des” Agni, “der” Ushas) ṚV. 8, 57, 18. 1, 14, 12. VĀLAKH.

6, 3. Daher “die Flammen” ṚV. 1, 72, 10. 9, 111, 2. — c) N. pr. Gattin

Bhṛgu’s und Mutter Aurva’s LIA. I, 714, N. 4. — Nach NAIGH. 3, 7 das n.

ein rūpanāman. — Vgl. aruṇa.

aruṣa 3) c) zu streichen, da āruṣī die richtige Form ist.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aruṣa aruṣa, i. e. arus + a.

I. adj., f. ṣī, Tawny, Chr. 294, 1 = Rigv. i. 92, 1.

II. m. A dark red cloud, Chr. 291, 5 = Rigv. i. 85, 5.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aruṣa ar-uṣa, a. (f. aruṣī) red, ruddy; m. sun, day: pl. m. f. flames (Agni’s

red horses); f. auṣī, down.

alaktaḥ –ktakaḥ [na rakto’smāt, rasya latvaṁ, svārthe kan Tv.] The red

resin of certain trees, red lac or sap (formerly used by women to dye

certain parts of their body, particularly the soles of the feet and lip);

(daṁtavāsasā) cirojjhitālaktakapāṭalena Ku. 5. 34, 68; 7. 58;

biṁbādharālaktakaḥ M. 3. 5; alaktakāṁkāṁ padavīṁ tatāna R. 7. 7;

striyo hṛtārthāḥ puruṣaṁ nirarthaṁ niṣpīḍitālaktakavattyajaṁti Mk. 4. 15.

— Comp.

–rasaḥ red lac, juice; alaktarasaraktābhāvalaktarasavarjitau .

adyāpi caraṇau tasyāḥ padmakośasamaprabhau Ram.

–rāgaḥ the red colour of alakta.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

alaktaḥ puṁ, (na rakto’smāt, rasya latvaṁ .) vṛkṣaniryāsaviśeṣaḥ . lāhā .

jau iti ca bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . rākṣā 2 lākṣā 3 jatu 4 yāvaḥ 5

drumāmayaḥ 6 . ityamaraḥ .. rakṣā 7 . iti bharataḥ . araktaḥ 8 .

ityamaraṭīkāyāṁ bharataḥ .. jatukaṁ 9 yāvakaḥ 10 alaktakaḥ 11 raktaḥ

12 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. palaṅkaṣā 13 kṛmiḥ 14 varavarṇinī 15 . iti

jaṭādharaḥ .. tasya guṇādiḥ .

lākṣā palaṅkaṣālaktī yāvo vṛkṣāmayo jatu .

lākṣā varṇyā himā balyā snigdhā ca tuvarālaghuḥ ..

anuṣṇā kaphapittāsrahikkākāsajvarapraṇut .

vraṇorakṣatavīsarpakṛmikuṣṭhagadāpahā ..

alaktako guṇaistadvadviśeṣādvyaṅganāśanaḥ . iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. * ..

lākṣārasaḥ . āltā iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . alaktakaḥ 2 jaturasaḥ 3 rāgaḥ 4

nirbhartsanaḥ 5 jananī 6 janakarī 7 sampadyā 8 cakravartinī 9 . asya

guṇāḥ . tiktatvaṁ . uṣṇatvaṁ . kaphavātarogabraṇadoṣanāśitvaṁ .

kaṇṭharogaśamanatvaṁ . rucikāritvañca . iti rājanirgaṇṭaḥ ..

alaktakāṅka a. marked by a red colour (lit. lac).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

alaktakāṅka alaktaka+aṅka, a. red-coloured.

iṁdraḥ [iṁd-ran; iṁdatīti iṁdraḥ; idi aiśvarye Malli.]

(1) The lord of gods.

(2) The god of rain, rain; cloud.

(3) A lord or ruler (as of men &c.); first or best (of any class of

objects), always as the last member of comp.; nareṁdraḥ a lord of men i.

e. a king; so mṛgeṁdraḥ a lion; gajeṁdraḥ the lord or chief of elephants;

so yogīṁdraḥ, kapīṁdraḥ.

(4) A prince, king.

(5) The pupil of the right eye.

(6) N. of the plant kuṭaja.

(7) Night.

(8) One of the divisions of bhāratavarṣa.

(9) N. of the 26th Yoga. (10) The human or animal soul.

(11) A vegetable poison.

(12) The Yoga star in the 26th Nakshatra.

(13) Greatness. –drā The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī. [Indra, the god of the

firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is

placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an

uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the

Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is

sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a

destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭaka, and in Rv. 10. 90. 13 he is

said to have sprung from the mouth of Purusha. He is of a ruddy or golden

colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden

chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the

thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the

demous of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi,

Vṛtra, Śambara, Namuchi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles,

and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his

worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain,

and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the

Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses

arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite

food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achievements

(cf. Rv. 10. 119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to

invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother;

a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the

deliverer and comforter of his servants. He is a wall of defence; his friend

is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly

those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts

of temporal blessings, as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence,

prosperous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra’s wife is

Indrani, who is invoked among the goddesses.

Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in

the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and

Dākṣāyaṇi or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahma, Viṣṇu and Maheśa

(though in some places Viṣṇu is regarded as his younger brother, cf. R.

14. 59, 15. 40), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is commonly

styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is

the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is

called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends

down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly

dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology

is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of

which is his seduction of Ahalya, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and

for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage

impressed upon him a 1000 marks resembling the female organ, and he

was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed

into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the

Rāmāyaṇa Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off

to Laṅkā by Rāvaṇa’s son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received

the title of ‘Indrajit.’ It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the

gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a

punishment for his seduction of Ahalya. He is also represented as being in

constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending

down nymphs to beguile their minds (see. Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is

said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut

off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories

are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, grandson of

Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that

he and Kṛṣṇa were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the

latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in

spite of Indra’s resistance. His wife is Indrani, the daughter of the demon

Puloman, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of

Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his

achievements, e. g. vṛtrahan, balabhid, pākaśāsana, gotrabhid,

puraṁdara, śatakratu, jiṣṇu, namucisūdana &c. (see Ak. I. 1. 44-47). The

Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvati; his garden, Nandana;

his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow,

and his sword, Paranja].

— Comp.

–agniḥ the fire produced from the contact of clouds; -dhūmaḥ

frost, snow; -devatā the 16th lunarmansion.

–anujaḥ, –avarajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Narayaṇa.

–ariḥ an Asura or demon.

–avasānaḥ a desert.

–aśanaḥ 1. hemp (dried and chewed). –2. the shrub which bears

the seed used in jeweller’s weight, (guṁjāvṛkṣa) –āyudhaṁ Indra’s

weapon, the rainbow; iṁdrāyudhadyotitatoraṇāṁkaṁ R. 7. 4, 12. 79; K.

127. (

–dhaḥ) 1. N. of horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapinjala changed into a

horse). –2. a horse marked with black about the eyes. (

–dhā) a kind of leech.

–āsanaṁ 1. the throne of Indra. –2. a throne in general. –3. a

foot of five short syllables.

–ijyaḥ N. of bṛhaspati the preceptor of gods.

–īśvaraḥ one of the forms of Śiva-linga.

–utsavaḥ a festival honouring Indra.

–ṛṣabha a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an

epithet of the earth.

–karman m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra’s deeds).

–kīlaḥ 1. N. of the mountain maṁdara. –2. a rock. (

–laṁ) the banner of Indra.

–kuṁjaraḥ Indra’s elephant, Airāvata.

–kūṭaḥ N. of a mountain.

–kṛṣṭa a. ‘ploughed by Indra,’ growing exuberantly or in a wild

state. (

–ṣṭaḥ) a kind of corn produced by rain-water.

–ketuḥ Indra’s banner.

–kośaḥ –ṣaḥ, –ṣakaḥ 1. a couch, sofa. –2. a plat-form. –3. a

projection of the roof of a house. –4. a pin or bracket projecting from the

wall (nāgadaṁta). –giriḥ the maheṁdra mountain.

–guruḥ, ācāryaḥ the teacher of Indra; i. e. bṛhaspati. –gopaḥ, —

gopakaḥ [iṁdro gopo rakṣako’sya, varṣābhavatvāttasya] a kind of insect

of red or white colour; K. 100.

–caṁdanaṁ the white sandal wood.

–cāpaṁ, –dhanus n. 1. a rainbow; vidyutvaṁtaṁlalitavanitāḥ

seṁdracāpaṁ sacitrāḥ Me. 64; Śi. 7. 4. –2. the bow of Indra.

–chaṁdas n. [iṁdra iva sahasranetreṇa sahasragucchena

chādyate] a necklace consisting of 1000 strings.

–jananaṁ Indra’s birth.

–jananīya a. treating of Indra’s birth (as a work).

–jā a. Ved. born or arising from Indra.

–jālaṁ [iṁdrasya parameśvarasya jālaṁ māyeva] 1. the net of

Indra. –2. a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war. –3.

deception, cheating. –4. conjur ing, jugglery, magical tricks;

svapneṁdrajālasadṛśaḥ khalu jīvalokaḥ Śānti. 2. 2; K. 105.

–jālika a. [iṁdrajāla-ṭhan] deceptive, unreal, delusive. (

–kaḥ) a juggler, conjurer.

–jit m. ‘conqueror of Indra’, N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed

by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda, a son Rāvaṇa.

When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son

Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat,

Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which

he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to

Lanka. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release,

and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, ‘conqueror of Indra’; but the

victor refused to release his prisoner unless he were promised

immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he

strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is

represented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was

engaged in a sacrifice]. -haṁtṛ or vijayin m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa.

–jyeṣṭha a. Ved. led by Indra.

–tāpanaḥ the thundering of clouds.

–tūlaṁ, tūlakaṁ a flock of cotton.

–damanaḥ the son of Bāṇāsura.

–dāruḥ the tree Pinus Devadāru.

–druḥ, drumaḥ 1 the plant Terminalia Arjuna (arjuna). –2. the

plant kuṭaja. –dvīpaḥ –paṁ one of the 9 Dvīpas or divisions of the

continent (of India).

–dhvajaḥ a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra.

–nakṣatraṁ Indra’s lunar mansion phalgunī. –netraṁ 1. the eye of

Indra. –2. the number one thousand.

–nīlaḥ [iṁdra iva nīlaḥ śyāmaḥ] a sapphire; R. 13. 54; 16. 69; Me.

46, 77.

–nīlakaḥ an emerald.

–patnī Indra’s wife, śacī. –parṇī, –puṣpā N. of a medicinal plant.

–parvataḥ 1. the maheṁdra mountain. –2. a blue mountain.

–putrā N. of aditi. –purogama, –puraḥsara, –śreṣṭa a. led or

preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head.

–purohitaḥ N. of bṛhaspati. (–tā) the asterism Pushya.

–prasthaṁ N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the

Pāṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi);

iṁdraprasthagamastāvatkāri mā saṁtu cedayaḥ Śi. 2. 63.

–praharaṇaṁ Indra’s weapon, the thunderbolt.

–bheṣajaṁ dried ginger.

–makhaḥ a sacrifice in honour of Indra.

–mahaḥ 1. a festival in honour of Indra. –2. the rainy season; –

kāmukaḥ a dog.

–mādana a. animating or delighting Indra.

–medin a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra.

–yavaḥ, –vaṁ seed of the Kutaja tree.

–luptaḥ, –ptaṁ, –luptakaṁ 1. excessive baldness of the head. –2.

loss of beard.

–lokaḥ Indra’s world, Svarga or Paradise.

–lokeśaḥ 1. lord of the Indra’s world, i. e. Indra. –2. a guest (who,

if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host).

–vaṁśā, –vajrā N. of two metres, see Appendix.

–vallarī, –vallī N. of a plant (pārijāta) or of iṁdravāruṇī. –vastiḥ

[iṁdrasya ātmanaḥ vastiriva] the calf (of the leg).

–vātatama a. Ved. desired by Indra.

–vāyū (du) Indra and Vayu.

–vāruṇī, –vāruṇikā Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd (Mar. moṭhī

kaṁvaḍaLa). –vāh a. carrying Indra.

–vṛkṣaḥ the Devadaru tree.

–vṛddhā a kind of abscess.

–vaiḍūryaṁ a kind of precious stone.

–vrataṁ Indra’s rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who

is said to follow iṁdravrata when he distributes benefits as Indra pours

down rain); vārṣikāṁścaturo māsān yarthedropyabhivarṣati .

tathābhivarṣetsvaṁ rāṣṭraṁ kāmairiṁdravrataṁ caran … –śaktiḥ f.

Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified.

–śatruḥ 1. an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on

the last syllable), an epithet of prahlāda; R. 7. 35. –2. [iṁdraḥ śatruḥ

yasya] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of vṛtra (when the accent is

on the first syllable). (This refers to a. legend in the Śat. Br., where it is

said that Vṛtra’s father intended his son to become the destroyer of

Indra, and asked him to say iṁdraśatrurvadhasva &c., but who, through

mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra;

cf. Śik. 52:

–maṁtro hīnaḥ svarato varṇato vā mithyāprayukto na

tamarthamāha . sa vāgvajro yajamānaṁ hināsti yatheṁdraśatruḥ

svaratoparādhāt … –śalabhaḥ a kind of insect.

–saṁdhā connection or alliance with Indra.

–sārathiḥ. 1. N of Mātalī. –2. an epithet of Vāyu, driving in the

same carriage with Indra.

–sutaḥ, –sūnuḥ 1. N. of

(a) Jayanta;

(b) Arjuna;

(c) Vāli, the king of monkeys. –2. N. of the arjuna tree. –surasaḥ,

–surā a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications

(nirguṁḍī). –senā Indra’s missile or host. –senānīḥ the leader of Indra’s

armies, epithet of Kārtikeya. –stut m., –stomaḥ 1. praise of Indra, N. of a

particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies. –2. a sacrifice

in honour of Indra. –havaḥ invocation of Indra. –hastaḥ a kind of

medicament.

iddha mfn. kindled, lighted, alight

mfn. shining, glowing, blazing &c.

mfn. clean, clear, bright

mfn. wonderful

iddha n. sunshine, light, heat

iddha n. a wonder

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

iddha p. p. [iṁdh-kta]

(1) Kindled, lighted; Mv. 1. 53; krodha- Ratn. 1. 4; Mu. 1. 2; -rāga S.

7. 16 whose glow or red colour has just broken out.

(2) Shining, glowing, blazing, bright; Ki. 2. 59; Śi. 1. 63; -bodhaiḥ Bk.

1. 5 (paṭubuddhibhiḥ) sharp.

(3) Clean, clear.

(4) Wonderful.

(5) Obeyed, unresisted (as order); -śāsanaḥ Ki. 1. 22 –ddhaṁ

(1) Sunshine, heat.

(2) Refulgence, splendour.

(3) Wonder.

— Comp.

–dīdhitiḥ fire; Śi. 16. 35.

–manyu a. having the anger excited.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

iddha (partic. von idh) 1) adj. a) “entzündet”, s. u. idh. — b) “rein, lauter”

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 2) n. a) “Sonnenschein” MED. dh. 4. — b) “Wunder”

JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

iddha na° indha–bhāve kta . 1 ātape, 2 dīptau, 3 āścarye . ca . kartari–

kta . 4 dīpte 5 dagdhe ca tri° . samiddhaśaraṇādīptā bhaṭṭiḥ .

tamiddhamārādhayituṁ sakarṇakaiḥ māghaḥ . iddhābodhairiti bhaṭṭau

bodhe iddhatvaṁ sarvaśāstrasūkṣmārthagrāhitvam śāsane

iddhatvamapratihatatvam .

īṣat ind. (gana “svar-ādi” ; for the use of “īṣat” see little, a little, slightly

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

īṣat ind. [īs-ati] Slightly, to some extent, a little; īṣat cuṁbitāni S. 1. 3;

īṣacca kurute sevāṁ Pt. 1. 141.

— Comp.

–uṣṇa a. tepid, slightly warm.

–ūna a. not quite complete, a little less than; īṣadūnārthe kalyab.

–kara a. 1. doing little. –2. easy to be accomplished; Mv. 4. (

–raṁ) very little.

–guṇa a. of little merit.

–jalaṁ shallow water, a little water.

–darśanaṁ a glance, sight, view, glimpse.

–nāda a. slightly sounding (a term applied to unaspirated soft

consonants).

–nimaya a. exchanged for a little.

–pāṁḍu a. a little white or pale, whitish. (

–ḍuḥ) a pale or light-brown colour.

–pāna a. that of which a little is drunk. (

–naṁ) a small draught.

–paruṣaḥ a mean or contemptible person.

–rakta a. pale red. (

–ktaḥ) 1. pale-red colour. –2. undistinguishable colour.

–labha, –pralaṁbha a. to be got for little.

–vivṛta a. slightly open.

–śvāsa a. slightly resounding).

–spṛṣṭa a. slightly touched (applied to the semi-vowels).

–hāsaḥ slight laughter, a smile.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

īṣat gaṇa svarādi zu P. 1, 1, 37. adv. “wenig, leicht, etwas” AK. 3, 5, 8. H.

1536. tānīṣadivopatapya ŚAT. BR. 2, 5, 2, 14. (yaḥ) īṣacca kurute sevām

PAÑCAT. I, 157. Meist am Anfange von compp. P. 2, 2, 7. NIR. 3, 18. –

stabdha SUŚR. 1, 20, 15. īṣadamlairanamlairvā 47, 4. 129, 6. 151, 6. 165,

19. 179, 19. īṣanmīlitalocana VET. 13, 7. īṣatsahāsa DEV. 4, 11.

īṣaddhāsā 7, 2. īṣatspṛṣṭa AV. PRĀT. 1, 30. P. 1, 1, 9, Sch.

sapuṣpamīṣatparṇāḍhyam R. 4, 7, 12. 15. -piṅgala Ind. St. 2, 287, 4. –

pāṇḍu AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1393. īṣaduṣṇa 1386. īṣatpakva 399. īṣatkārya

“mit geringer Arbeit verbunden”: eṣā (guhā) lakṣmaṇavāṇānāmīṣatkāryā

vidāraṇe “diese kann durch” L. “Pfeile leicht gesprengt werden” R. 4, 54,

12. īṣatkara “leicht zu vollbringen”: tvayā saha dharmacāriṇyā

mātṛpitṛvadho mameṣatkara eva PRAB. 36, 6. 8, 15. īṣatkaraḥ kaṭo

bhavatā Sch. zu P. 3, 3, 126. 2, 3, 69. 6, 2, 139. īṣatkara “klein wenig”

TRIK. 3, 2, 8. īṣatpānaḥ somo bhavatā P. 3, 3, 128, Sch. īṣannimaya,

īṣatpramaya, īṣadvilaya P. 6, 1, 50, Vārtt., Sch. īṣallabha, īṣatpralambha

P. 7, 1, 67, Sch. īṣanmarṣa, īṣanmarṣaṇa VOP. 26, 199.

īṣadāḍhyaṁbhavaṁ bhavatā “du kannst leicht reich werden”,

īṣadāḍhyaṁkaro devadatto bhavatā D. “kann leicht durch dich reich

gemacht werden” P. 3, 3, 127, Sch. Ueber diese Art compp., wo īṣat ganz

wie su gebraucht wird, s. P. 3, 3, 126. VOP. 26, 197. fgg.

īṣat , nicht im comp.: unnatamīṣat VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 8. 32, 5. 81, 19.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

īṣat īṣat (probably ntr. of the ptcple. of the present of īkṣ, with ṣ for kṣ),

adv.

1. A little, Daśak. in Chr. 198, 18.

2. When the former part of a comp., especially when followed by a

word denoting the partic. of the fut. pass.: Easily, e. g. īṣat-kārya (vb.

kṛ), Easy to be made, Rām. 4, 54, 12 (vidāraṇe, easy to be cleft). īṣat-

kara (vb. kṛ), Easy to be performed, Prab. 36, 6.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

īṣat adv. nearly, slightly, easily, a little.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

īṣat īṣ-at, [n. pr. pt.] ad. slightly, a little, somewhat; easily (often °-);

-kara, a. easily performed;

-kārya, fp. easy to (lc.);

-pāna, a. easy to drink.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

īṣat vya (īṣaṇamiti . īṣ + at .) alpam . kiñcit . manāk . ityamaraḥ ..

(taṁ dṛṣṭvā kupitaṁ putramīṣatprasphuritādharaṁ . iti viṣṇupurāṇe ..

1 . 11 . 12 .

īṣat sahāsamamalaṁ paripūrṇacandravimbānukāri

kanakottamakāntikāntaṁ . iti mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe, śakrādimāhātmyam ..

hṛdi tiṣṭhati yacchuddhaṁ raktamīṣat sapītakam . iti carake

sūtrasthāne saptadaśādhyāyaḥ ..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

īṣat avya° īṣa–ati . 1 alpe, 2 kiñcidarthe ca . īṣatsahāsamamalaṁ

paripūrṇacandravimbānukāri devīmā° īṣadīṣadanavotavidya yā

tātamātṛmudamāvivardhayan kusumā° . īṣadakṛtā prā° samā° .

īṣaduṣṇaḥ īṣatpāṇḍu . 3 sūkṣmārthe ca īṣaddhautaṁ navaṁ śuklaṁ

sadaśaṁ yanna dhāritam vaśiṣṭhaḥ . īṣat sūkṣmatantukamiti

raghunandanaḥ etadupapade dhātoḥ khal īṣatkaraḥ īṣaddamaḥ .

dṛśādestu yuc vā . īṣaddarśaḥ īṣaddarśanaḥ . etatpūrbe āḍhye upapade

khal īṣadāḍhyaṅkaraḥ īṣadāḍhyaṅkaro’pyeṣaḥ bhaṭṭiḥ īṣadāḍhyambhavam

.

chestnut horse

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ukanāha m. “ein hell”- oder “dunkelbraunes Pferd” H. 1241. — Wohl ein

Fremdwort.

ukānahaḥ A horse of a red and yellow (or red and black) colour, a bay or

chesnut horse.

uparaṁj 4 U. or in pass. To be red; to be eclipsed; uparajyate bhagavān

caṁdraḥ Mu. 1. –Caus.

(1) To colour, tint, dye.

(2) To affect, grieve, distress.

uṣṭraḥ [uṣ-ṭran-kicca Uṇ. 4. 161]

(1) A camel; athoṣṭravāmīśatavāhitārthaṁ R. 5. 32; Ms. 3. 162, 4.

120, 11. 202.

(2) A buffalo.

(3) A bull with a hump.

(4) A cart or carriage. –ṣṭrī

(1) A she-camel.

(2) An earthen vessel in the shape of a camel. [cf. Pers. ushtar; Zend

ustra.]

— Comp.

–karṇikā (pl.) N. of a country or its inhabitants, in the south.

–kāṁḍī a flower of a red colour.

–krośin a. making a noise like a camel.

–goyugaṁ a couple of camels

–grīvaḥ, –śirodharaḥ piles.

–yānaṁ camel-litter.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

uṣṭraḥ puṁ, (uṣa + uṣikhanibhyāṁ kit . 4 . 161 . ityuṇādisūtreṇa ṣṭran

kicca .) vāhyarathaḥ . iti dharaṇī .. paśuviśeṣaḥ . uṭ iti bhāṣā .

tatparyāyaḥ . kramelakaḥ 2 mayaḥ 3 mahāṅgaḥ 4 . ityamaraḥ ..

dīrghagatiḥ 5 balī 6 karabhaḥ 7 dāserakaḥ 8 dhūsaraḥ 9 lamboṣṭhaḥ 10

ravaṇaḥ 11 mahājaṅghaḥ 12 javī 13 jāṅghikaḥ 14 dīrghaḥ 15 śṛṅkhalakaḥ

16 mahān 17 mahāgrīvaḥ 18 mahānādaḥ 19 mahādhvagaḥ 20

mahāpṛṣṭhaḥ 21 baliṣṭhaḥ 22 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. dīrghajaṅghaḥ 23 grīvī

24 dhūmrakaḥ 25 śarabhaḥ 26 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. kramelaḥ 27

kaṇṭakāśanaḥ 28 bholiḥ 29 bahukaraḥ 30 adhvagaḥ 31 marudvipaḥ 32

vakragrīvaḥ 33 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. vāsantaḥ 34 kulanāśaḥ 35 . iti

trikāṇḍaśeṣaḥ .. kuśanāmā 36 marupriyaḥ 37 dvikakut 38 durgalaṅghanaḥ

39 bhūtaghnaḥ 40 dāseraḥ 41 dīrghagrīvaḥ 42 kelikīrṇaḥ 43 . iti

hemacandraḥ .. (yathā manuḥ 4 . 120 .

nādhīyitāśvamārūḍho na rathaṁ na ca hastinam .

na nāvaṁ na kharaṁ noṣṭraṁ neriṇastho na yānagaḥ ..

uṣṭrayānaṁ samāruhya kharayānaṁ tu kāmataḥ . iti ca manuḥ . 11 .

29 ..)

to his horse with white and red colour.

qualities, limited by particular conditions, valid only under particular

suppositions on &

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aupādhika a. (kī f.) [upādhiṭhañ]

(1) Conditional.

(2) Pertaining to attributes or properties; an effect produced.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aupādhika (von upādhi) adj. “bedingt, conditionalis” Sch. zu ŚAT. BR. 14,

7, 2, 6. 3, 24. 8, 8, 1.

aupādhika “von einer bestimmten Bedingung abhängig, nur unter

gewissen Bedingungen wahr und giltig; nicht zum Wesen einer Sache

gehörig.” Gegens. vāstava SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 164, 20. Schol. zu KAP. 1, 18.

5, 116. Davon nom. abstr. -tva n. ders. zu 1, 19. SARVADARŚANAS. 131,

11. anaupādhika so v. a. “uneigennützig” MALLIN. zu ŚIŚ. 10, 37.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aupādhika aupādhika, i. e. upādhi + ika, adj. Reflectional, conditional (as

the crystal’s red colour from a china rose near it).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aupādhika tri° tena nirvṛttaḥ bā° ṭhañ . upādhikṛte striyāṁ ṅīp rūḍhaṁ

saṅketavannāma saiva saṁjñeti kīrtyate . naimittikī

pāribhāṣikyaupādhikyapi tadbhidā śabdaśa0

puruṣasya bandhastu aupādhika eva na naimittikaḥ nāpi tāttvikaḥ

ityetat sāṁ° sū° māṣyayormirṇītaṁ yathā na svabhāvato vaddhasya

mokṣasādhanopadeśavidhiḥ sū0

duḥkhātyantanivṛttermokṣatvasyoktatayā bandho’tra duḥkhayogaeva

tasya bandhasya puruṣe na svāṁbhāvikatvaṁ vakṣyamāṇalakṣaṇa

ṇamasti yato na svabhāvato baddhasya mokṣāya sādhanopadeśasya

vidhiranuṣṭhānaṁ niyojyānāṁ ghaṭate . na hyagneḥ svā

bhāvikādauṣṇyānmokṣaḥ sambhavati . svābhāvikastha

yāvaddravyabhāvitvādityarthaḥ . taduktamīśvaragītāyām .

yadyātmā malino’svaccho vikārī syāt svabhāvataḥ . na hi tasya

bhavenmuktirjanmāntaraśatairapi .

yasmin sati kāraṇavilambādvilambo yasyotpattau na bhavati tasya tat

svābhāvikamiti svābhāvikatva lakṣaṇam . nanu

sarvadopalambhāpatterduḥkhasya svābhāvikatvaśaṅkaiva nāstīti cenna

triguṇātmakatvena cittasya duḥkhasvabhāvatve’pi

satvādhikyenābhibhavāt sadā duḥkhānupalabdhivadātmano’pi

tadanupalabdhisambhavāt .

duḥkhasvābhāvikatvavādibhirbaurdhaścittasyaivātmatābhyupagamācca .

athaivamātmanāśādeva mokṣo’stviti cenna . ahaṁ baddho vimuktaḥ

syāmiti bandhasāmānādhikaraṇyenaiva mokṣasya puruṣārthatvāditi .

mavatvananuṣṭhānaṁ tena kimityata āha bhā° .

svabhāvasyānapāyitvādananuṣṭhānalakṣaṇamaprāmāṇyam sū° .

svabhāvasya yāvaddravyabhāvitvānmokṣāsambhavena

tatsādhanopadeśaśruterananuṣṭhānalakṣaṇamaprāmāṇyaṁ syādityarthaḥ

bhā° . nanu śrutibalādevānuṣṭhānaṁ syāt tatrāha .

nāśakyopadeśavidhirupadiṣṭe’pyanupadeśaḥ sū° .

nāśakyāya phalāyopadeśasyānuṣṭhānaṁ sambhavati . yata upadiṣṭe’pi

vihite’pyaśakyaopāye sa upadeśo na bhavati . kintūpadeśābhāsa eva

bādhitamarthaṁ vedo’pi na bodhayatīti nyāyādityarthaḥ bhā° . atra

śaṅkate . śuklapaṭavadvījavaccet sū° .

nanu svābhāvikasyāpyapāyo dṛśyate . yathā śuklapaṭasya

svābhāvikaṁ śauklyaṁ rāgeṇāpanīyate . yathā ca vojasya

svābhāvikyapyaṅkuraśaktiragnināpanīyate . ataḥ śuklapaṭa vadbījavacca

svābhāvikasya bandhasyāpyapāyaḥ puruṣe sambhavatīti tadvadeva

tatsādhanopadeśaḥ syāditi cedityarthaḥ bhā° samādhatte .

śaktyudbhavānudbhavābhyāṁ nāśakyopadeśaḥ sū° .

uktadṛṣṭāntayorapi nāśakyāya svābhāvikāyopa deśo lokānāṁ mavati .

kutaḥ śaktyadbhavānudbhavābhyām dṛṣṭāntadvaye hi

śauklyāderāvirbhāvatirobhāvāveva bhavataḥ na tu

śauklyāṅkuraśaktyorabhāvo bhavati .

rajakādivyāpārairyogisaṅkalpādibhiśca raktapaṭabhṛṣṭavījayoḥ punaḥ

śauklyāṅkuraśaktyāvirbhāvādityarthaḥ . nanvevaṁ puruṣe’pi

duḥkhaśaktitirobhāva eva mokṣo’stviti cenna duḥkhātyantanivṛttereva

loke puruṣarthatvānumānāt śrutismṛtyoḥ puruṣārthatvasiddheśca na tu

dṛṣṭāntayoriva tirobhāvamātrasyeti . kiñca duḥkhaśaktitirībhāvamātrasya

mokṣatve kadācidyīgīśvarasaṅkalpādinā śaktyudbhavasya bhṛṣṭavījeṣviva

mukteṣvapi sambhavenānirmokṣāpattiriti mā° . svabhāvato bandhaṁ

nirākṛtya nimittebhyo’pi bandhamapākaroti sūtrajātena . puruṣe

duḥkhasya naimittikatve jñānādyupāyocchedyatvaṁ na ghaṭeta .

anāgatāvasthasūkṣmaduḥkhasya yāvaddravyabhāvitvādityāśayena

naimittikatvaṁ nirākriyate . na kālayogato vyāpino nityasya

sarvasambandhāt sū° .

nāpi kālasambandhanimittakaḥ puruṣasya bandhaḥ kutaḥ? vyāpino

nityasya kālasya sarvāvacchedena sarvadā

muktāmuktasakalapuruṣasambandhāt sarvāvacchedena sadā

sakalapuruṣāṇāṁ bandhāṣatterityarthaḥ . atra ca prakaraṇe

kāladeśakarmādīnāṁ nimittatvasāmānyaṁ nāpalapyate

śrutismṛtiyuktimiḥ siddhatvāt . kintu yannaimittikatvaṁ

pākajarūpādivannimittajanyatvaṁ tadeba bandhe pratiṣidhyate puruṣe

bandhasyaupādhikatvābhyupagamāt . nanu kālādinimittakatve’pi

sahakāryantarasambhavāsambhavābhyāṁ vyavasthā syāditi cet evaṁ

sati yatsaṁyoge satyavaśyaṁ bandhastatraiva sahakaḥriṇi

lāghavādbandho yuktaḥ puruṣe

bandhavyavahārasyaupādhikatvenāpyupapatteriti kṛtaṁ naimittikatveneti

bhā° na deśayogato’pyasmāt sū° . deśayogato’pi na bandhaḥ kutaḥ?

asmāt pūrvasūtroktānmuktāmuktasarvapuruṣasambandhāt muktasyāpi

bandhāpatterityarthaḥ bhā° . nāvasthāto dehagharmatvāt tasyāḥ sū° .

saṅghātaviśeṣarūpatākhyā deharūpā yāvasthā na tannimicato’pi

puruṣasya bandhaḥ . kutaḥ? tasyā avasthāyā dehadharmatvāt

acetanadharmatvādityarthaḥ . anyadharmasya

sākṣādanyabandhakatve’tiprasaṅgāt . muktasyāpi bandhāpatterityarthaḥ

bhā° . nanu puruṣasyāpyavasthāyāṁ kiṁ bādhakaṁ tatrāha . asaṅgo’yaṁ

puruṣa iti sū° . iti śabdo hetvarthe . puruṣasyāsaṅgatvādavasthāyā

dehamātradharmatvamiti pūrvasūtreṇānvayaḥ .

puruṣasyāvasthārūpavikārasvīkāre vikārahetusaṁyogākhyaḥ saṅgaḥ

prasajyeteti bhāvaḥ . asaṅgatve ca śrutiḥ . sa yadatra kiñcit

paśyatyananvāgatastena bhavati asaṅgo hyayaṁ puruṣa iti . saṅgaśca

saṁyogamātraṁ na bhavati . kāladeśasambandhasya pūrvamuktatvāt .

śratismṛtiṣu padmapatrasthajaleneva padmapatrasyāsaṅgatāyāḥ puru

ṣāsaṅgatāyāṁ dṛṣṭāntatāśravaṇācca bhā° . na

karmaṇānyadharmatvādatiprasakteśca sū° . na hi

bihitaniṣiddhakarmaṇāpi puruṣasya bandhaḥ karma

ṇāmanātmadharmatvāt . anyadharmeṇa sākṣādanyasya bandhe ca

muktasyāpi bandhāpatteḥ . nanu svasvopādhikarmaṇā bandhāṅgīkāre

nāyaṁ doṣa ityāśayena hetvantaramāha . atiprasakteśceti .

pralayādāvapi duḥkhayogarūpabandhāpatteścetyarthaḥ . saha

kāryantaravilambato vilambakalpanaṁ ca prāgeva nirākṛtaṁ na

kālayogata ityādisūtra iti bhā° .

nanvevaṁ duḥkhayegarūpo’pi bandhaḥ

karmasāmānādhikaraṇyānurodhena cittasyaivāstu duḥkhasya

cittadharmatāyāḥ siddhatvāt . kimarthaṁ puruṣasyāpi kalpyate bandha

ityāśaṅkāyāmāha vicitrabhogānupapattiranyadharmatve sū° .

duḥkhayogarūpabandhasya cittamātradharmatve vicitrabhogānupapattiḥ .

puruṣasya hi duḥkhayogaṁ vināpi duḥkhasākṣātkārākhyabhogasvīkāre

sarvapuruṣaduḥkhādīnāṁ sarvapuruṣabhogyatā syānniyāmakābhāvāt .

tataścāyaṁ duḥkhabhoktāyaṁ ca sukhabhoktetyādirūpabhīgavaicitryaṁ

nopapadyetetyarthaḥ . ato bhogavaicitryopapattaye bhoganiyāmakatayā

duḥkhādiyogarūpo bandhaḥ puruṣe’pi svīkāryaḥ . sa ca puruṣe

duḥkhayogaḥ prativimbarūpa eveti prāgevoktam . prativimbaśca

svopādhivṛttereva bhavatīti na sarvapuṁsāṁ sarvaduḥkhabhogaḥ iti

bhāvaḥ . cittavṛttibhoge ca puruṣasyānādiḥ svasvāmibhāvaḥ sambandho

heturiti yogabhāṣyādayaṁ siddhāntaḥ siddhaḥ . citte ca puruṣasya

svatvaṁ svabhuktavṛttivāsanāvattvamiti . yata ta cittasyaiva

bandhamokṣau na puruṣasyeti śrutismṛtiṣu gīyate

tadvimbarūpaduḥkhayogarūpaṁ pāramārthikaṁ bandhamādāya bodhyam

bhā° . sākṣāt prakṛtinimittakatvamapi bandhasyāpākaroti .

prakṛtinibandhanāccenna tasyā api pāratantryam sū° . nanu

prakṛtinimittādbandho bhavatviti cenna yatastasyā api banthakatve

saṁyogapāratantryamuttaratra vakṣyamāṇamasti . saṁyogaviśeṣaṁ

vināpi bandhakatve pralayādāvapi duḥkhasambandhaprasaṅgādityarthaḥ .

prakṛtinibandhanā cediti pāṭhe tu prakṛtinibandhanā cedbaddhatetyarthaḥ

bhā° . ato yatparatantrā prakṛtirbandhakāraṇaṁ sambhavet tasmādeva

saṁyogaviśeṣādaupādhiko bandho’gnisaṁyogājjalauṣṇyavaditi

svasiddhāntamanenaiva prasaṅgenāntarāla evāvadhārayati . na

nityaśuddhabuddhamuktasvabhāvasya tadyogastadyogādṛte sū° . tasmāt

tadyogādṛte prakṛtisaṁyogaṁ vinā na puruṣasya tadyogo

bandhasamparko’sti . api tu sa eva bandhahetuḥ .

bandhasyaupādhikatvalābhāya nañdvayena vakrokti . yadi hi bandhaḥ

prakṛtisaṁyogajanyaḥ syāt pākajarūpavat tadā tadbadeba

tadviyoge’pyanuvarteta . na ca dvitīyakṣaṇāderduḥkhanāśakatvaṁ

kalpyaṁ kāraṇanāśasya kāryanāśakatāyāḥ kḷptatvena

tenaivopapattāvadhikā’kalpanāt . vṛttirhi duḥkhāderupādānam . ato

dīpaśikhāvat kṣaṇabhadbhurāyā vṛtterāśuvināśitvenaiva taddharmāṇāṁ

duḥkhecchādīnāṁ vināśaḥ sambhavatīti . ataḥ prakṛtiviyoge

bandhābhāvādaupādhika eva bandho na tu svābhāviko naimittiko veti .

tathā tatsaṁyoganivṛttireva sākṣāddhānopāya ityapi vakroktiphalam .

tathā ca smṛtiḥ yathā jvaladgṛhāśliṣṭaṁ gṛhaṁ vicchidya rakṣyate . tathā

sadoṣaprakṛtivicchinno’yaṁ na śocati . vaiśepikāṇāmiva pāramārthiko

duḥkhayoga iti bhramo mā bhūdityetadarthaṁ nityetyādi . yathā

svabhāvaśuddhasya sphaṭikasya rāgayogo na japāyogaṁ vinā ghaṭate

tathaiva nityaśuddhādisvabhāvasya puruṣasyopādhisaṁyogaṁ vinā

duḥkhasaṁyogo na ghaṭate svato duḥkhādyasambhavādityarthaḥ tathāha

saure yathā hi kevalo raktaḥ sphaṭiko lakṣyate janaiḥ .

rañjakādyupadhānena tadvat paramapūruṣaḥ . nityatvaṁ

kālānavacchinnatvam . śuddhādisvabhāvatvaṁ ca nityaśuddhatvādikam .

tatra nityaśuddhatvaṁ sadā pāpapuṇyaśūnyatvam .

nityabuddhatvamaluptacidrūpatvam . nityamuktatvaṁ sadā

pāramārthikaduḥkhāyuktatvam .

prativimbarūpaduḥkhayogastvapāragārthiko bandhaḥ iti bhāvaḥ . ātmano

nityaśuddhatvādau ca śrutiḥ . ayamātmā sanmātro nitya śuddhaḥ

buddhaḥ satyo mukto nirañjano vibhurityādiḥ bhā° .

ayameva pakṣo vedāntibhirapyaṅgīkṛtaḥ tadguṇasāratvādityādi śā°

sūtrabhāṣye na hi buddherguṇairvinā kevalasyātmanaḥ saṁsāritvamasti

buddhyupādhidharmādhyāsanimittaṁ hi kartṛtvabhoktṛtvalakṣaṇaṁ

saṁsāritvamakarturabhoktuścāsaṁsāriṇonityamuktasya sata ātmanaḥ iti

yāvadātmabhāvitvādityādi śā° sūtrabhāṣye ca yāvadeva cāyaṁ

buddhyupādhisambandhastāvadeva cāsya jīvatvaṁ saṁsāritvañca .

paramārthatastu na jīvonāma buddhyupādhiparikalpitasvarūpavyatirekeṇa

iti ca saṁsāritvasya

buddhyupādhisaṁbandhādhīnatayaupādhikatvasyokteḥ . ivāṁstu viśeṣaḥ

etanmate bandhasyeva jīvabhedasyāpi aupādhikatvaṁ tadapi śāṁ° sū°

bhāṣyayornirṇītaṁ yathā ataeva copamā(jala)suryakādivat sū° ataeva

cāyamātmā caitanyasvarūponirviśeṣo vāṅmanasātītaḥ

parapratiṣedhenopadiśyate ataeva cāsyopādhinimittāmapāramārthikīṁ

viśeṣavattāmabhipretya jalasūryakādivadityupamopā dīyate

mokṣaśāstreṣu yathāhyayaṁ jyotirātmā vivasvānapobhinnā

bahudhaiko’nugacchan . upādhinā kriyate bhedarūpodevaḥ

kṣetreṣvevamajo’yamātmeti . ekaeva tu bhūtātmā bhūte bhūte

vyavasthitaḥ . ekadhā bahudhā caiva dṛśyate jalacandravaditi

caivamādiṣu . atra patyavasthīyate bhā° . ambuvadagrahaṇāttu na

tathātvam sū° . na jalasūryāditulyatvamihopapadyate tadvadagrahaṇāt .

sūryādibhyohi mūrtebhyaḥ pṛthagabhūtaṁ viprakṛṣṭadeśaṁ mūrtañca

jalaṁ gṛhyate tatra yuktaḥ sūryādiprativimbodayonatvātmā mūrtaḥ

nacāsmāt pṛthagbhūtā viprakṛṣṭadeśāścopādhayaḥ, sarvagatatvāt

sarvānanyatvācca tasmādayukto’yaṁ dṛṣṭānta iti . atra pratividhīyate .

bhā° vṛddhvihrāsamātra mantarbhāvādubhayasāmañjasyādevam sū° .

yukta eva tvayaṁ dṛṣṭāntaḥ vivakṣitāṁśasambhavāt na hi

dṛṣṭāntadārṣṭāntikayoḥ kvacitkañcidvivakṣitamamaṁśaṁ muktvā

sarvasārūpyaṁ kenaciddarśayituṁ śakyate sarvasārūpye hṛi

dṛṣṭāntadārṣṭāntikabhāvoccheda eva syāt . na cedaṁ svamanīṣayā

jalasūryakādidṛṣṭāntapraṇaya nam . śāstrapraṇītasya tvasya

prayojanamātramupanyasyate . kiṁpunaratra vivakṣitaṁ sārūpyamiti?

taducyate vṛddhihrāsamātrami ti . jalagataṁ hi sūryaprativimbaṁ

jalavṛddhau vardhate jalahrāse hrasate jalacalane calati jalabhede

bhidyate ityevaṁ jaladharmānuvidhāyi bhavati na tu paramārthataḥ

sūryasya tathātvamasti evaṁ paramārthato’vikṛtamekarūpamapi

sadbyahma dehādyupādhyantarbhāvādbhajataevopādhidharmān

vṛddhihnāsādīn evamubhayordṛṣṭāntadārṣṭāntikayoḥ

sāmañjasyādavirodhaḥ bhā° . darśanācca sū° . darśayati ca śrutiḥ

parasyaiva brahmaṇodehādiṣu pādhiṣvanupraveśam puraḥ sa cakre

dvipadaḥ puraścakre catuṣpadaḥ . puraḥ sa pakṣī bhūtvā puraḥ puruṣa

aviśaditi anena jīvenātmanānupraviśyeti ca tadyuktametat .

upādhireva vinayā° svārthe ṭhañ . sādhyasamavyāpakatve sati

sādhanāvyāpakatvarūpe prāgukte upādhau anaupādhikovyāptiḥ, anumā°

ci° .

mfn. fragrant 31

mfn. red, dull red, yellowish red (as the garment of a Buddhist

Bhikshu)

kaṣāya mn. (g. “ardharcādi”) an astringent flavour or taste

kaṣāya mn. a yellowish red colour on

kaṣāya mn. an astringent juice, extract of juice

kaṣāya mn. a decoction or infusion (the result of boiling down a mixture

consisting of one part of a drug and four or, according to some, eight or

sixteen parts of water until only one quarter is left

kaṣāya mn. any healing or medicinal potion

kaṣāya mn. exudation from a tree, juice, gum, resin

kaṣāya mn. ointment, smearing, anointing

kaṣāya mn. colouring or perfuming or anointing the person with

cosmetics

kaṣāya mn. dirt, filth

kaṣāya mn. stain or impurity or sin cleaving to the soul

kaṣāya mn. dulness, stupidity

kaṣāya mn. defect, decay, degeneracy (of which, according to Buddhists,

there are five marks, viz. “āyus-k-, dṛṣṭi-k-, kleśa-k-, sattva-k-, kalpa-k-“)

kaṣāya mn. attachment to worldly objects

kaṣāya m. red, redness

kaṣāya m. a kind of snake

kaṣāya m. emotion, passion (“rāga”, of which the Jainas reckon four

kinds

kaṣāya m. the Kali-yuga

kaṣāya m. the tree Bignonia Indica

kaṣāya m. N. of a teacher (v.l. “kaśāya”) g. “śaunakādi”

kaṣāya m. (“as, ā, am”) mf. n. the tree Grislea tomentosa

kaṣāya n. a dull or yellowish red garment or robe (cf. “kāṣāya, paṇca-

kaṣāya; a-niṣkaṣāya”, full of impure passions

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kaṣāya a.

(1) Astringent; S. 2.

(2) Fragrant; sphuṭitakamalāmodamaitrīkaṣāyaḥ Me. 31; U. 2. 21; Mv.

5. 41.

(3) Red, dark-red; cūtāṁkurāsvādakaṣāyakaṁṭhaḥ Ku. 3. 32.

(4) (Hence) Sweet-sounding; Māl. 7.

(5) Brown.

(6) Improper, dirty. –yaḥ, –yaṁ

(1) Astringent flavour or taste (one of the six rasas): see kaṭu; yo

vaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ staṁbhayati kaṁṭhaṁ badhnāti hṛdayaṁ

kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ Suśr.

(2) The red colour.

(3) A decoction with one part of a drug mixed with four, eight, or

sixteen parts of water (the whole being boiled down until one quarter is

left); Ms. 11. 154.

(4) Plastering, smearing; Ku. 7. 17; anointing.

(5) Perfuming the body with unguents; Rs. 1. 4.

(6) Gum, resin, extract or exudation from a tree.

(7) Dirt, uncleanness.

(8) Dulness, stupidity.

(9) Attachment to worldly objects. (10) Decay, ruin. –yaḥ

(1) Passion, emotion.

(2) Kali yuga.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kaṣāya m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 249,a, ult. 1) adj. a)

“zusammenziehend”, subst. “der zusammenziehende Geschmack” AK. 1,

1, 4, 18. TRIK. 3, 3, 307. H. 1389. HĀR. 206. MBH. 14, 1280. 1411. SUŚR.

1,19, 15. yo vaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ stambhayati kaṇṭhaṁ badhnāti

hṛdayaṁ kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ (rasaḥ) 155, 7. 156, 15. PAÑCAT.

61, 11. 254, 11. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 42. kaṣāyāṇi tiktāni kaṭukāni ca.

bhakṣayan R. 2, 12, 93. — b) “wohlriechend” TRIK. 3, 1, 19. 3, 107. H. an.

MED. sphuṭitakamalāmodamaitrīkaṣāyaḥ (vātaḥ) MEGH. 32. — c) “roth,

dunkelroth”; subst. “die rothe Farbe” H. an. MED. “gelbroth” SVĀMIN zu

AK. ŚKDR. kaṣāyavāsas YĀJÑ. 1, 272. SUŚR. 1, 7, 7. von der Farbe einer

Schlange 2, 265, 14. -daśana und -danta von einer Maus 278, 2. 279, 8.

kaśāyakaṇṭha (sic) DHŪRTAS. 67, 8. kaṣāyeṇa raktaṁ vastram P. 4, 2, 1,

Sch. kaṣāyarakta MBH. 14, 1263. teṣāṁ (tāpasānāṁ) mauṇḍyaṁ

kaṣāyaśca vāse rātriśca kāraṇam 13, 6527 (vgl. śukladantāñjitākṣāśca

muṇḍāḥ kāṣāyavāsasaḥ. śūdrā dharmaṁ cariṣyanti

śākyabuddhopajīvinaḥ.. HARIV. 11142. MBH. 12, 566).

kaṣāyavastraracanā MṚCCH. 114, 5. “ein gelbrothes Kleid”:

nirvedadhṛtakaṣāyaṁ bhikṣum 113, 3. BURN. Intr. 180, N. 1. Hierher

gehört wohlauch: kaṣāyaṁ sulabhaṁ paścānmunīnāṁ śamamicchatām

MBH. 2, 675. — 2) subst. m. n. a) “ausgekochter Saft”: parṇakaṣāya ŚAT.

BR. 6, 5, 1, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 3, 16. śuktāni ca kaṣāyāṁśca pītvā

medhyānyapi dvijaḥ. tāvadbhavatyaprayato yāvattanna vrajatyadhaḥ.. M.

11, 153. aṅgakaṣāya vom “menschlichen Samen” ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 8. In

der Med. “Decoct; diejenige Form der Medicin, bei deren Bereitung ein

Theil des Arzeneistoffes mit vier, nach Andern mit acht oder sechzehn

Theilen Wasser gemischt und die Mischung bis auf ein Viertel eingekocht

wird”: tatra kecidāhustvakpatramūlādīnāṁ

bhāgastaccaturguṇajalamāvāpya caturbhāgāvaśeṣaṁ

niḥkvāthyāpaharedityeṣa kaṣāyapākakalpaḥ SUŚR. 2, 175, 9. 21. 1, 15, 3.

16, 6. 18, 5. 38, 5. 159, 8. 14. 15. 17. 160, 11. 2, 48. 16. fgg. 116, 5.

kalkāṁścūrṇakaṣāyāṁśca R. 2, 91, 67. Accent eines auf kaṣāya ausgehn.

comp. P. 6, 2, 10. umāpuṣpakaṣāyam Sch. kaṣāya = niryāsa “Decoct”,

aber auch “jede vegetabilische Ausschwitzung wie Harz u.s.w.” AK. 3, 4,

24, 155. H. an. MED. — b) “Salbe, Schminke”, = samālambhana TRIK. 2,

6, 40. = vilepana und rāgavastu H. an. = vilepana und aṅgarāga MED.

ghṛṣṭo vaṭakaṣāyena (sic) anuliptaḥ priyaṅgunā. kṣīreṇa ṣaṣṭikānbhuktvā

sarvapāpaiḥ pramucyate.. MBH. 13, 5970. śiroruhaiḥ snānakaṣāyavāsitaiḥ

ṚT. 1, 1. — c) (“Bodensatz) Schmutz”; übertragen “Unreinigkeit,

Verdummung, Versumpfung, Verfall” (vgl. kalka): karṇakaṣāya BHĀG. P.

2, 6, 45. tasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya (ŚAṁK.: kaṣāyo rāgadveṣādidoṣaḥ)

CHĀND. UP. 7, 26, 2. avipakvakaṣāyāṇāṁ durdarśo ‘haṁ kuyoginām

BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 22. nirmathitāśeṣakaṣāyadhiṣaṇo ‘rjunaḥ 15, 29. vidhunoti

kāmaṁ kaṣāyaṁ malamantarātmanaḥ 4, 22, 20. kaṣāyasya lakṣaṇam

(viell. mit Anspielung auf die Kleiderfarbe der buddhistischen Geistlichen)

“ein Anzeichen des Verfalls” HARIV. 11182. fgg. kaṣāyopaplave kāle

11184. Die Buddhisten nehmen 5 kaṣāya an: āyuskaṣāya, dṛṣṭi-, kleśa-,

sattva-, kalpa- VYUTP. 66. BURN. Lot. de la b. l. 354. kaṣāya =

krodhādayaḥ H. an. In der Philos.: layavikṣepaṇābhāve (ŚKDR. –

vikṣepābhāve) ‘pi cittavṛtte (ŚKDR. cittasya) rāgādivāsanayā

stabdhībhāvādakhaṇḍavastvanavalambanaṁ kaṣāyaḥ VEDĀNTAS. in

BENF. Chr. 218, 1. 217, 22. “attachment to wordly objects” WILS. — 3) m.

a) “Leidenschaft” (rāga) SVĀMIN zu AK. im ŚKDR. — b) “das” Kalijuga

SĀRAS. zu AK. im ŚKDR. Beide Bedeutungen gehen wohl in 2,c auf. — c)

Name eines Baumes, “Bignonia indica” (śyonāka), DHAR. im ŚKDR. — d)

N. pr. eines Lehrers gaṇa śaunakādi zu P. 4, 3, 106. — 4) m. f. n. Name

eines Baumes, “Grislea tomentosa Roxb.” (dhava), RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

5) f. kaṣāyā Name einer Pflanze (kṣudradurālabhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

Vgl. pañcakaṣāya und kāṣāya.

kaṣāya 1) c) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 66, 5. 68, 3. -danta “eine Mausart” Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 309,a,19. roṣakaṣāyadūṣita “Röthe” mit Anspielung auf 2) c)

BHĀG. P. 4, 2, 20. “ein rothes Gewand” Spr. 3615 (ed. Bomb. des MBH.

kāṣāya). MBH. 2, 675 hat die ed. Bomb. gleichfalls kā-, was der Schol.

durch gairikaraktaṁ vastram erklärt. — 2) a) te pibantaḥ kaṣāyāṁśca

sarpīṁṣi vividhāni ca Spr. 4138. — b) vaṭakaṣāyeṇa = vaṭajaṭākaṣāyeṇa

Schol. zu MBH. 13, 5970. — c) füge “Leidenschaft” (vgl. 3, “a”) hinzu.

kaṣāyavarjitaṁ jñānam MBH. 12, 7873. sa- Ind. St. 3, 148. Z. 9 nach 354

hinzu- zufugen 360. Bei den Jaina vier kaṣāya WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 310.

SARVADARŚANAS. 37, 2. 10. 14. 19. 39, 18. mit Anspielung auf 2) a) 36,

20. 22. Etymologie 37, 2. sakaṣāyatva 12. — Vgl. niṣkaṣāya.

kaṣāya 2) c) bei den Jaina HEM. YOGAŚ. 4, 6. 77.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kaṣāya kaṣāya (probably vb. kṛṣ),

I. adj., f. yā.

1. Being of an astringent taste, MBh. 14, 1411.

2. Fragrant, Megh. 32.

3. Red, subst. m. and n., red colour, Yājñ. 1, 272; MBh. 14, 1263; of a

colour composed of red and yellow, Mṛcch. 113, 3.

II. m. and n.

1. An astringent juice, Man. 11, 153.

2. A decoction, Suśr. 2, 175, 9.

3. Ointment, MBh. 13, 5970.

4. Dirt, Bhāg. P. 2, 6, 45; impurity, 4, 22, 20.

5. Stupor, Vedāntas. in Chr. 218, 1.

— Comp. a-niṣkaṣāya, i. e. a-nis-, adj. full of impure passions, MBh. 12,

568.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kaṣāya a. astringent, sharp (of taste), fragrant, red, dark-red. m. red

colour, passion, emotion; decoct, extract, ointment (also n.); n. a

yellowish-red garment.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kaṣāya kaṣāya, a. astringent (taste); fragrant; red, yellowish red; m. red

colour; passion; m. n. astringent juice; decoction; medicinal potion;

ointment; dirt; taint; deterioration, moral decline; n. yellow garment;

-ya, den. P. dirty; molest;

i-ta, pp. coloured red; dirtied, stained; penetrated w., full of (-°).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kaṣāya puṁna° kaṣati kaṇṭham, kaṣa–āya–ardharcādi . (kaṣā) 1

rasabhede 2 tadvati tri° . tasya kāraṇaguṇādi suśrute uktaṁ yathā–tatra

śaityaraukṣalāghavavaiśadyavaiṣṭambhyaguṇalakṣaṇovāyustasya

samānayoniḥ kaṣāyo rasaḥ so’sya śaityāt śaityaṁ vardhayati, raukṣyāt

raukṣyaṁ, lāghavāt lāghavaṁ, vaiśadyāt vaiśadyaṁ, vaiṣṭambhyāt

vaiṣṭambhyamiti yovaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ stambhayati kaṇṭhaṁ

badhnāti hṛdayaṁ kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ . kaṣāyaḥ

saṁgrāhakoropaṇaḥ stambhanaḥ śodhanālekhanaḥ śoṣaṇaḥ pīḍanaḥ

kledīpaśoṣaṇaśceti . sa evaṁguṇo’tyekaevātyarthamupasevyamānaḥ

pīḍāsyaśoṣodarādhmānavākyagrahamanyāstambhagātrasphuraṇacumucu

māyanākuñcanakṣepaṇaprabhṛtīn janayati iti ca . kaṣāyavargaśca .

nyagrodhādirambaṣṭhādiḥ

priyaṅgvādīrodhrādistriphalāśallakījambvāmrabakulatindukaphalinīkatakaś

ākapāṣāṇabhedakavanaspatiphalāni sālasārādiśca prāyaśaḥ

kuravakakovidārakajīvantīcillīpālaṅkyasu niṣaṇṇakaprabhṛtīni

nīvārakādayomudgādayaśca samāsena kaṣāyovargaḥ suśru° .

asyotpattikāraṇamapi tatroktaṁ yathātasmādāpyorasaḥ

parasparasaṁsargāt parasparānugrahāt parasparānupraveśācca sarvesu

sarveṣāṁ sānnidhyamastyutkarṣāpakarṣāttu grahaṇam . sa

khalvāpyorasaḥ śeṣabhūtasaṁsargādvidagdhāḥ ṣoḍhā vibhajyate

ityupakramya . pṛthivyanilaguṇabāhulyāt kaṣāyaḥ iti . tatra tasya ca

pittakaphaghnatvamapi tatraivoktam maghurātaktakaṣāyāḥ pittaghnāḥ

kaṭutiktakaṣāyāḥ śleṣmaghnāḥ iti . kecidāhuragnīṣomīyatvājjagato rasāḥ

dvividhāḥ saumyā āgneyāśca, tatra madhuratiktakaṣāyāḥ saumyāḥ,

kaṭvamlalavaṇā āgneyāḥ madhurāmlalavaṇāḥ snigdhāḥ guravaśca

kaṭutiktakaṣāyā rūkṣā laghavaśca . saumyāḥ śītā āgneyāścīṣṇāḥ iti

suśrute anyamatenoktvā tacca dūṣayitvā pūrvadarśitamatamādṛtam

bhāvapra° tadetadvivṛtam yathākaṣāyo ropaṇo grāhī stambhanaḥ

śodhanastathā . lekhanaḥ pīḍanaḥ saumyaḥ śoṣaṇo vātakopanaḥ .

kaphaśoṇitapittaghno rūkṣaḥ śīto laghurmataḥ . tvakprasādanamālasya

stambhano viṣado mataḥ . jihvāyā jāḍyakṛt kaṇṭhasrotasāñca vibandhakṛt

. ropaṇaḥ vraṇasya, stambhano gātrāṇāṁ, śodhano vraṇasya, lekhano

vraṇādyutsannamāṁsasya, śoṣaṇovraṇamajjādīnām . pīḍano hṛdayasya

vātakāritvāt, saumyaḥ somādutpannaḥ . athātiyuktasya kaṣāyasya

guṇāstatroktāḥ so’ticayukto gudādhmānahṛtpīḍākṣepaṇādikṛt .

abhayāyāmatra viśeṣaḥ . prāyaśaḥ stambhanaṁ proktaṁ

kaṣāyamabhayāṁ vinā . 3 rāgadveṣādidoṣe . āhāraśuddhau satvaśuddhiḥ

satvaśuddhau dhruvā smṛtiḥ, smṛtilambhe sarvagranthīnāṁ

vipramokṣastasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya tamasaḥ pāraṁ darśayati chā° u° .

tasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya vārkṣārādiriva kaṣāyo rāgadbeṣādidoṣaḥ,

satvasya rañjanarūpatvāt jñānavairāgyābhyāsarūprakṣāreṇa kṣālitomṛdito

vināśito yasya nāradasya tasmai bhā° . kaṣāye karmabhiḥ pakve tato

jñānaṁ prajāyate vedā° pa° karmaṇāṁ

rāgadveṣādidoṣarūpakaṣāyanāśakatvamuktam . layavikṣepābhāve’pi

cittavṛtteḥ rāgādivāsanayā stakībhāvāt akhaṇḍavastvanavalambanaṁ

kaṣāyaḥ iti vedāntasāroktalakṣaṇe 4 nirvikalpakasamādhivighnabhede

sakaṣāyaṁ vijānīyāt śamaprāptaṁ na cālayet . sakaṣāyaṁ kaluṣitaṁ me

cittamiti, vijñāya śame’dvitī yātmani niveśayet vidvanma° . 5 rakte

anurāgānvite 6 surabhau 7 apaṭau ca keśavaḥ . cūtāṅkurāsvādakaṣāya

kaṇṭhaḥ kumā° . kaṣāyaḥ raktaḥ malli° . nidrākaṣāyitavipāṭalalocaneṣu

māghaḥ kaṣāyitānyapaṭūkṛtāni malli° . 8 rāge 9 kvāthabhede 10 niryāse

ca rāge kvāthe kaṣāyo’strī niryāse saurabhe rase vaija° . kaṣāyaḥ jāto’sya

tāra° itac, tatkarotīti ṇickarmaṇi ktavā . kaṣāyita jātakaṣāye kaṣāyīkṛte ca

tri° amunaiva kaṣāyitastanī kumā° kaṣāyitaḥ rañjitaḥ malli° . 11 vilepane

13 aṅgarāge ca viśvaḥ . karṇārpitolodhrakaṣāyarūkṣe kumā° kaṣāyeṇa

vilepanena malli° . kvaṣāyaśca sarasādikaḥ pañcavidhaḥ bhāvapra°

darśito yathā . sarasaśca tathā kalkaḥ kvāthaśca himaphāṇṭakau . jñeyāḥ

kaṣāyāḥ pañcaite laghavaḥ syuryathottaram teṣāṁ pañcānāṁ lakṣaṇāni

tu tattacchabde dṛśyāni . 13 śyonākavṛkṣe pu° jaṭāgharaḥ . 14 kaliyuge

amaraṭīkā rāgadīṣahetutvāttasya tathātvam 15 lohitavarṇayukte tri°

medi° 16 raktapītamiśritavarṇe amaraṭīkā . 17 dhavavṛkṣe pu° rājani° 18

kṣudradurālabhāyāṁ strī rājani° . deśe gamye asmāt pānaśabdasya

ṇatvam . kaṣāyapāṇodeśabhedaḥ .

kāla m. a black or dark-blue colour

kāla m. the black part of the eye

kāla m. the Indian cuckoo

kāla m. the poisonous serpent Coluber Nāga (= “kālasarpa”)

kāla m. the plant Cassia Sophora

kāla m. a red kind of Plumbago

kāla m. the resin of the plant Shorea robusta

kāla m. the planet Saturn

kāla m. N. of śiva

kāla m. of Rudra

kāla m. of a son of Hrada 189

kāla m. of the prince Kāla-yavana

kāla m. of a brother of king Prasena-jit

kāla m. of a future Buddha

kāla m. of an author of Mantras (= Aśva-ghosha)

kāla m. of a Nāga-rāja

kāla m. of a Rakshas

kāla m. of an enemy of śiva

kāla m. of a mountain

kāla m. of one of the nine treasures

kāla m. a mystical N. of the letter “m”

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ā”) f. N. of several plants (Indigofera tinctoria ; Piper

longum ; (perhaps) Ipomoea atropurpurea ; Nigella indica ; Rubia

Munjista ; Ruellia longifolia ; Physalis flexuosa ; Bignonia suaveolens

kāla m. the fruit of the Kālā g. “harītaky-ādi”

kāla m. N. of a “śakti”

kāla m. of a daughter of Daksha (the mother of the Kāleyas or

Kālakeyas, a family of Asuras)

kāla m. N. of Durgā

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. black colour, ink or blacking

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. abuse, censure, defamation

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a row or succession of black clouds

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. night

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a worm or animalcule generated in the acetous

fermentation of milk (= “kṣīra-kīṭa” or “kṣāra-kīṭa”)

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. the plant Kālāṇjanī

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Ipomoea Turpethum

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a kind of clay

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Bignonia suaveolens

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the seven tongues or flames of fire

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a form of Durgā

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the Mātṛis or divine mothers

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the

Kālakeyas) 11552

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the sixteen Vidyā-devīs

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of Satyavatī, wife of king śāntanu and mother

of Vyāsa or Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana (after her marriage she had a son Vicitra-

vīrya, whose widows were married by Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana, and bore to him

Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu ; according to other legends Kālī is the wife of

Bhīmasena and mother of Sarvagata

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. (with or without “gaṅgā”) N. of a river

kāla n. a black kind of Agallochum

kāla n. a kind of perfume (“kakkolaka”)

kāla n. iron

kāla m. (3. “kal”, “to calculate or enumerate”), [ifc. f. “ā” , a fixed or

right point of time, a space of time, time (in general) &c.

m. the proper time or season for (gen. dat. loc., in comp., inf., or Pot.

with “yad” e.g. “kālaḥ prasthānasya” or “-nāya” or “-ne”, time for

departure; “kriyā-kāla”, time for action ; “nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum”, this is

not the time to delay ; “kālo yad bhuṇjīta bhavān”, it is time for you to

eat &c.

m. occasion, circumstance

m. season &c.

m. meal-time (twice a day, hence “ubhau kālau”, “in the morning and

in the evening” ; “ṣaṣṭhe kāle”, “in the evening of the third day” ;

“ṣaṣṭhānna-kāla”, “one who eats only at the sixth meal-time, i.e. who

passes five meals without eating and has no meal till the evening of the

third day” ; or without “anna” e.g. “caturtha-kālam”, “at the fourth meal-

time i.e. at the evening of the second day”

m. hour (hence “ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ”, “at the sixth hour of the day, i.e.

at noon”

m. a period of time, time of the world (= “yuga”)

m. measure of time, prosody

m. a section, part

m. the end

m. death by age

m. time (as leading to events, the causes of which are imperceptible

to the mind of man), destiny, fate &c.

m. time (as destroying all things), death, time of death (often

personified and represented with the attributes of Yama, regent of the

dead, or even identified with him: hence “kālam-i” or “kālaṁ-kṛ”, “to die”

&c.; “kāla” in this sense is frequently connected with “antaka, mṛtyu” e.g.

“abhy-adhāvata prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ”, “e attacked the people like Time

the destroyer” ; cf. “kālāntaka; kāla” personified is also a Devarshi in

Indra’s court, and a son of Dhruva

kāla m. (“am”) acc. ind. for a certain time (e.g. “mahāntaṁ kālam”, for a

long time

kāla m. “nitya-k-“, constantly, always

kāla m. “dīrgha-k-“, during a long time

kāla m. (“ena”) instr. ind. in the course of time &c.

m. with “gacchatā” id.

kāla m. “dīrgheṇa kālena”, during a long time

m. after a long time

kāla m. “kālena mahatā” or “bahunā” id.

kāla m. (“āt”) abl. ind. in the course of time

kāla m. “kālasya dīrghasya” or “mahataḥ” id. &c.

kāla m. “kasya-cit kālasya”, after some time

kāla m. (“e”) loc. ind. in time, seasonably (cf. “a-kāle”)

kāla m. “kāle gacchati”, in the course of time

kāla m. “kāle yāte”, after some time

kāla m. “kāle kāle”, always in time

kāla m. ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘calen-doe’: Hib. ‘ceal’, “death and

everything terrible.”])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kāla a. (lī f.)

(1) Black, of a dark or dark-blue colour.

(2) Injuring, hurting. –laḥ

(1) The black or dark-blue colour.

(2) Time (in general); vilaṁbitaphalaiḥ kālaṁ nināya sa manorathaiḥ

R. 1. 33; tasminkāle at that time; kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatāṁ H. 1.

(1) the wise pass their time &c.

(3) Fit or opportune time (to do a thing), proper time or occasion;

(with gen., loc., dat., or inf.); R. 3. 12, 4. 6, 12. 69; parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī

Mk. 10. 60.

(4) A period or portion of time (as the hours or watches of a day);

ṣaṣṭhe kāle divasasya V. 2. 1; Ms. 5. 153.

(5) The weather.

(6) Time considered as one of the nine dravyas by the Vaiśeṣikas.

(7) The Supreme spirit regarded as the destroyer of the universe,

being a personification of the destructive principle; kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake kraḍiti prāṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39.

(8)

(a) Yama, the god of death; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt.

1. 146.

(b) Death, time of death.

(9) Fate, destiny. (10) The black part of the eye.

(11) The (Indian) cuckoo.

(12) The planet Saturn.

(13) N. of Śiva.

(14) A measure of time (in music or prosody).

(15) A person who distils and sells spirituous liquor.

(16) A section, or part

(17) A red kind of plumbago.

(18) Resin, pitch

(19) N. of an enemy of Śiva. (20) (with the Jainas) One of the nine

treasures.

(21) A mystical name for the letter m. –lā

(1) N. of several plants.

(2) N. of a daughter of Daksha.

(3) An epithet of Durgā. –lī

(1) Blackness.

(2) Ink, black ink.

(3) An epithet of Pārvatī, Śiva’s wife.

(4) A row of black clouds.

(5) A woman with a dark complexion.

(6) N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa.

(7) Night.

(8) Censure, blame.

(9) One of the seven tongues of Fire. (10) A form of Durgā;

kālītanayaḥ a buffalo.

(11) One of the Mātṛs or divine mothers.

(12) N. of a wife of Bhīma.

(13) A sister of Yama.

(14) A kind of learning (mahāviḍyā).

(15) A small shrub used as a purgative. –laṁ

(1) Iron.

(2) A kind of perfume.

— Comp.

–ayasaṁ iron.

–akṣarikaḥ a scholar, one who can read and decipher.

–agaru n. a kind of sandal tree, black kind of aloe; Bv. 1. 70, R. 4.

81. (–n.) the wood of that tree; Rs. 4. 5; 5. 5.

–agniḥ, –analaḥ 1. the destructive fire at the end of the world. –2.

an epithet of Rudra. –3. a kind of bead (rudrākṣa). –aṁga a. having a

dark-blue body (as a sword with a dark-blue edge).

–ajinaṁ the hide of a black antelope.

–aṁjanaṁ a sort of collyrium; Ku. 7. 20, 82. (

–nī) a small shrub used as a purgative.

–aṁḍajaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo.

–atikramaḥ –maṇaṁ delay, being late; Pt. 1. 154.

–atipātaḥ, –atirekaḥ loss of time, delay; Māl 2.

–atīta a. elapsed, passed by.

–atyayaḥ 1. delay, lapse of time. –2. loss by lapse of time.

–adhyakṣaḥ 1. ‘presiding over time’, epithet of the sun. –2. the

Supreme soul.

–anunādin m. 1. a bee. –2. a sparrow. –3. the Chātaka bird.

–anusārakaḥ 1. Tagara tree. –2. yellow sandal.

–anusāriḥ, –anusārin, –anusārivā, –anusāryaḥ, –ryakaḥ benzoin.

–aṁtakaḥ time, regarded as the god of death, and the destroyer

of every thing.

–aṁtaraṁ 1. an interval. –2. a period of time. –3. another time or

opportunity. -āvṛta a. hidden or concealed in the womb of time. -kṣama a.

able to bear delay; akālakṣamā devyāḥ śarīrāvasthā K. 263; S. 4. -prekṣin

Pt. 3. 172. -viṣaḥ an animal venomous only when enraged, as a rat.

–abhraḥ a dark, watery cloud.

–avadhiḥ appointed time.

–avabodhaḥ knowledge of time and circumstances; Mal. 3. 11.

–aśuddhiḥ f.,

–aśaucaṁ period of mourning, ceremonial impurity caused by the

birth of a child or death of a relation in the family; see aśauca. –ākṛṣṭa a.

1. led to death. –2. produced or brought by time.

–ātmaka a. depending on time or destiny.

–ātman m. the Supreme spirit.

–āyasaṁ iron.

–upta a. sown in due season.

–kaṁjaṁ a blue lotus.

–kaṭaṁkaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

–kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock. –2. a sparrow. –3. a wagtail. –4. a

gallinule. –5. an epithet of Śiva; U. 6.

–kaṁṭhakaḥ –kaṁṭakaḥ a gallinule.

–kaṁḍakaḥ a water-snake.

–karaṇaṁ appointing or fixing time.

–karṇikā, –karṇī misfortune.

–karman n. death.

–kalāyaḥ dark pulse.

–kalpa a. fatal, deadly.

–kālaḥ Supreme being.

–kīlaḥ noise.

–kuṁṭhaḥ Yama.

–kuṣṭhaḥ a myrrh.

–kūṭaḥ, –ṭaṁ

(a) a deadly poison; S. 6.

(b) the poison churned out of the ocean and drunk by Śiva; adyāpi

nojjhati haraḥ kila kālakūṭaṁ Ch. P. 50. –kṛt m. 1. the sun. –2. a

peacock. –3. Supreme spirit. –kṛta 1. produced by time. –2. fixed,

appointed. –3. lent or deposited. –4. done for a long time. (–taḥ) the

sun. –kramaḥ lapse of time, course of time; kālakrameṇa in course or

process of time; Ku. 1. 19. –kriyā 1. fixing a time. –2. death. –kṣepaḥ 1.

delay, loss of time; Me. 22; maraṇe kālakṣepaṁ mākuru Pt. 1. –2.

passing the time. –khaṁjaṁ, –khaṁjanaṁ, –khaṁḍaṁ the liver. —

gaṁgā the river Yamunā. –grāṁthiḥ a year. –ghātin a. killing by degrees

or slowly (as a poison) –cakraṁ 1. the wheel of time (time being

represented as a wheel always moving). –2. a cycle. –3. (hence fig.) the

wheel of fortune, the vicissitudes of life. (–kraḥ) an epithet of the sun. —

cihnaṁ a symptom of approaching death. codita a. summoned by the

angel of death. –jyeṣṭha a. senior in years, grown up; U. 5. 12. –jña a.

knowing the proPer time or occasion (of any action); atyārūḍho hi

nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ R. 12. 33; Śi. 2. 83. (–jñaḥ) 1. an

astrologer. –2. a cock. –jñānin m. an epithet of Śiva. –trayaṁ the three

times; the past, the present, and the future; -darśī K. 46. –daṁḍaḥ

death. –damanī an epithet of Durgā. –dharmaḥ, –dharman m. 1. the line

of conduct suitable to any particular time. –2. the law or rule of time. –3.

effects proper to the time. –4. fated time, death; na punarjīvitaḥ

kaścitkāladharmamupāgataḥ Mb.; parītāḥ kāladharmaṇā &c. –dhāraṇā

prolongation of time. –naraḥ (in astrology) the figure of a man’s body. —

nāthaḥ, –nidhiḥ Śiva. –niyogaḥ decree of fate or destiny; laṁdhyatena

khalu kālaniyogaḥ Ki. 9. 13. –nirūpaṇaṁ determination of time,

chronology. –nemiḥ 1. the rim of the wheel of time. –2. N. of a demon,

uncle of Rāvaṇa, deputed by him to kill Hanūmat. –3. N. of a demon with

100 hands killed by Viṣṇu. -ariḥ, ripuḥ, haraḥ, han m. epithets of Kṛṣṇa.

–pakva a. ripened by time, i. e. spontaneously; Ms. 6. 17, 21; Y. 3. 49.

–parivāsaḥ standing for a time so as to become stale. –pāśaḥ the noose

of Yama or death. –pāśikaḥ a hangman. –pṛṣṭhaṁ 1. a species of

antelope. –2. a heron. (–kaṁ) 1. N. of the bow of Karṇa; Ve. 4. –2. a

bow in general. –prabhātaṁ autumn or Śarad; (the two months following

the rainy season considered as the best time). –bhakṣaḥ an epithet of

Śiva. –bhṛt m. the sun. –bhairavaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –mānaṁ a

measure of time. –mukhaḥ a species of ape. –meṣī f. the Mañjiṣṭha

plant. –yavanaḥ a king of Yavanas and enemy of Kṛṣṇa and an invincible

foe of the Yadavas. Kṛṣṇa, finding it impossible to vanquish him on the

field of battle, cunningly decoyed him to the cave where Muchakunda was

sleeping who burnt him down. –yāpaḥ, –yāpanaṁ procrastination, delay,

putting off. –yogaḥ fate, destiny. -taḥ according to the requirements of

the time; Pt. 1. 184. –yogin m. an epithet of Śiva. –rātriḥ, –rātrī f. 1. a

dark night. –2. a sister of Yama. –3. the Amāvasyā on which lamps are

lighted (in the Divālī holidays). –4. the night of destruction at the end of

the world (identified with Durgā). –5. a particular night in the life of man,

on the 7th day of the 7th month of the 77th year. –lohaṁ –lauhaṁ steel.

–viprakarṣaḥ prolongation of time. –vṛddhiḥ f. periodical interest

(payable monthly, quarterly, or at stated times); Ms. 8. 153. –velā the

time of Saturn, i. e. a particular time of the day (half a watch every day)

at which any religious act is improper. –saṁkarṣā a girl 9 years old

personating Durga at a festival. –saṁrodhaḥ 1. keeping back for a long

time; Ms. 8. 143. –2. lapse of a long period of time. –sadṛśa a.

opportune, timely. –saṁpanna a. dated, bearing a date. –sarpaḥ the

black and most poisonous variety of the snake. –sāraḥ the black

antelope. (–raṁ) a yellow sort of sandal wood. –sūtraṁ, –sūtrakaṁ 1.

thread of time or death. –2. N. of a particular hell; Y. 3. 222; Ms. 4. 88.

–skaṁdaḥ the Tamāla tree. –svarūpa a. terrible as death, (deathlike in

form). –haraḥ an epithet of Śiva. –haraṇaṁ loss of time, delay; S. 3; U.

5; Mv. 4. 41. –hāniḥ f. delay; R. 13. 16.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kāla 1) adj. f. ī P. 4, 1, 42. “blauschwarz, schwarz”; als m. “die

blauschwarze Farbe, Schwärze” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 1397.

an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. P. 5, 4, 33. (rathe) kālāśvayukte R. 6, 67, 2. kālāḥ

kāñcanasaṁnāhāstasmiṁstamasi rākṣasāḥ. samadṛśyanta 19, 5. kālāni

bhūtvā māṁsāni śīryante yasya dehinaḥ SUŚR. 1, 299, 19. kālajīmūta R.

3, 55, 13. kālamegha 4, 10, 26. 6, 79, 13. MBH. 1, 7184. VET. 4, 20.

kālabāla und kālabāla ŚĀNT. 4, 4. MBH. 1, 1236. tasyāḥ – dīrdhaveṇī –

dadṛśe svasitā snigdhā kālī vyālīva mūrdhani 3, 16191. kālī strī

pāṇḍurairdantaiḥ 16, 57. timirābhyāhatāṁ kālīmaprakāśāṁ niśāmiva R. 2,

114, 2. pramadā 5, 27, 17. — 2) m. a) “das Schwarze im Auge” SUŚR. 2,

336, 20. Vgl. kālaka. — b) “der indische Kuckuck” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

= kālasarpa VET. 16, 13. — d) “Cassia Sophora Lin.” (s. kāsamarda). — e)

“eine Art Plumbago” (raktacitraka). — f) “das Harz der Shorea robusta”

(rāla) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “der Planet Saturn” (vgl. nīlavāsas) DĪPIKĀ

im ŚKDR. — h) ein Bein. Śiva’s H. an. H. ś. 45. MED.; vgl. kālakaṇṭha,

mahākāla und kālī Durgā. = Rudra BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 12. — i) N. pr. eines

Sohnes von Hrada HARIV. 189. eines Fürsten (kālayavana) BHĀG. P. 3, 3,

10. eines Bruders des Königs Prasenajit BURN. Intr. 173. eines künftigen

Buddha Lot. de la b. l. 126. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 85. eines Rakshas R.

6, 69, 12. eines Feindes von Śiva (s. kālāsuhṛd). — k) N. pr. eines Berges

R. 4, 44, 21. — l) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — m)

myst. Bez. des “Buchstabens m” Ind. St. 2, 316. — 3) f. kālā a) N.

verschiedener Pflanzen: “Indigofera tinctoria Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. H. an.

MED.; “Piper longum Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 15; eine der “Ipomoea Turpethum”

nahe verwandte Pflanze, viell. “Ipomoea atropurpurea Chois.” AK. 2, 4, 3,

27. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 131, 19. 2, 106, 19. 528, 16; “Nigella indica

Roxb.” AK. 2, 9, 37; “Rubia Munjista” (mañjiṣṭhā, kālameṣikā) “Roxb.” H.

an. (lies jiṅgyām). MED.; “Ruellia longifolia” (kulika) RATNAM. im ŚKDR.;

“Physalis flexuosa Lin.” (aśvagandhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; “Bignonia

suaveolens Roxb.” (pāṭalā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach dem gaṇa

harītakyādi zu P. 4, 3, 167 ist kālā auch “die Frucht der” Kālā. — b) N. pr.

einer Tochter des Daksha, der Mutter der Kāleya oder Kālakeya MBH. 1,

2520. 2542. HARIV. 11521. 11552. 12465. PADMA-P. in VP. 122, N. 19.

Vgl. kālakā. — c) ein Bein. der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32, Sch.; vgl. kālī. — 4) f.

kālī a) = kālikā “schwarze Farbe, Tinte” H. an. MED. — b)

“Anschwärzung, üble Nachrede” H. an. — c) “Nacht” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

d) “eine schwarz aufziehende Wolkenmasse” H. an. HĀR. 71. — e) “ein

best. in Milch vorkommendes Thierchen”, = kṣīrakīṭa H. an. = kṣārakīṭa

(sic) MED. — f) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = kālāñjanī; b) “Cajanus

indicus Spreng.” (tuvarī); g) “Ipomoea Turpethum” (trivṛt) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR.; d) “Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.” AK. 2, 4, 2, 35, Sch. — g) N. einer

der sieben Zungen Agni’s JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 4.

GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — h) eine Form der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. H. 203.

H. an. MED. MBH. 4, 195. HARIV. 10239. KUMĀRAS. 7, 39. DEV. 9, 27.

itthaṁ cemau rajanidivasau dolayandvāvivākṣau kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Hier wie bei kāla als

Bein. von Śiva hat man mit dem Begriff “der Schwärze” wohl auch den

“der Alles zerstörenden Zeit” vor Augen gehabt. Vgl. Ind. St. 1, 286. 287.

mahākālī und bhadrakālī. — i) N. einer der göttlichen Mütter H. an. MED.

— k) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālakā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, HARIV.

11552. — l) N. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 239. — m) Bein. der Satyavatī,

der Gemahlin Śāntanu’s und Mutter Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana’s TRIK. 2, 8, 10.

LIA. I, 629, N. 1. MBH. 1, 2209. 4244. BENF. Chr. 6, 1. Mutter

Vicitravīrya’s, mit dessen Gemahlin Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana die drei Kinder

Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu und Vidura zeugt HARIV. 1825. fg. Gemahlin

Bhīmasena’s und Mutter Sarvagata’s BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 30. — n) mit oder

ohne Beis. von gaṅgā N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 50. 56. 441. fg. — 4) n. a)

“eine dunkle Art Sandelholz” (kālīyaka) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) “ein

best. Parfum” (kakkolaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “Eisen” (vgl. kālāyasa)

VĀCASP. bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR.

kāla m. 1) “ein bestimmter” oder “richtiger Zeitpunkt; Zeit” überh. AK. 1,

1, 3, 1. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 1, 1, 103. H. 126. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. Im

ṚV. nur an einer Stelle: uta prahāmatidīvyā jayāti kṛtaṁ yacchvaghnī

vicinoti kāle 10, 42, 9. AV. 19, 53 und 54 sind Lieder, welche von Macht

und Wesen der Zeit handeln, deren Begriff an den der “Weltordnung” oder

des “Schicksals” streift (vgl. unter 2.). Einigermaassen gebräuchlich wird

das Wort (st. des alten ṛtu) erst in den BRĀHMAṆA: sa eṣa sviṣṭakṛtaḥ

kālaḥ ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 3, 3. 3, 8, 3, 36. yadi kāle yadyanākāle ‘thaivāśnanti

2, 4, 2, 4. juhoti kāla eva 4, 5, 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 5, 14. 25, 7, 2.

ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 15. M. 2, 80. 3, 105. 7, 164. 204. N. 2, 17. 25, 1. R. 1,

77, 13. 2, 40, 30. 3, 4, 7. SUŚR. 1, 124, 3. PAÑCAT. I, 253. 254. ŚĀK. 151.

RAGH. 3, 12. 12, 69. kāle kāle MBH. 1, 1680. RAGH. 4, 6. svakāle M. 4,

93. prāpte kāle 9, 307. kṣetre kālopapādite 36. kāloptāni vījāni 38.

kālayuktaṁ vacaḥ R. 5, 46, 2. parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī MṚCCH. 178, 10.

PAÑCAT. 149, 14. nainaṁ purā kālātprāṇo jahāti ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 11

(vgl. AIT. BR. 8, 25, wo āyuṣaḥ st. kālāt). kālameva pratīkṣeta M. 6, 45.

kālamanveṣayantau PAÑCAT. 182, 24. kālavid R. 4, 32, 13. kālaṁ

gacchati “er gelangt zum Endpunkt” (beim coitus) CHĀND. UP. 2, 13, 1.

“die zu Etwas bestimmte –, geeignete Zeit”; die Ergänz. im gen., dat.,

loc., im comp. vorang., im inf. oder im potent. mit yad (P. 3, 3, 167. 168):

saṁpratiṣṭhāmahe kālaḥ prasthānasya R. 2, 56, 2. tasya kālo ‘yamāgataḥ

“dazu ist jetzt die Zeit gekommen” VIŚV. 12, 9. eṣa dvaidhībhāvasya

kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 155, 9. 143, 12. VID. 241. nāyaṁ vaktavyasya kālaḥ

PAÑCAT. 194, 23. na rāma kālaḥ paridevanāya MBH. 3, 10259. na kālo ‘sti

vilambane R. 6, 8, 45. dakṣiṇākāla KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 2, 21 (vgl. dakṣiṇānāṁ

kāle ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 2, 21). karmakāla R. 1, 65, 34. kriyākāla SUŚR. 1, 5,

13. paṇakālamamanyata N. 7, 8. VIKR. 32, 15. 64, 18. nāyaṁ kālo

vilambitum N. 20, 11. DRAUP. 3, 7. R. 6, 93, 23. kālo yadbhuñjīta bhavān

P. 3, 3, 168, Sch. — kālamāsādya “in Berücksichtigung der Zeitumstände”:

kālamāsādya kāryaṁ ca daṇḍaṁ rājā prakalpayet M. 8, 324. 9, 293.

skandhenāpi vahecchatruṁ kālamāsādya buddhimān PAÑCAT. III, 247.

kālamāsādya kaṁcana “nach einer Weile”: yathā kāṣṭhaṁ ca kāṣṭhaṁ ca

sameyātāṁ mahārṇave. sametya ca vyapeyātāṁ kālamāsādya kaṁcana..

R. 2, 105, 24. — kālasaṁkhyāṁ na vedmi PAÑCAT. 242, 19. kālaṁ

kālavibhaktīśca M. 1, 24. evaṁ sarvaṁ sa sṛṣṭvedaṁ māṁ

cācintyaparākramaḥ. ātmanyantardadhe bhūyaḥ kālaṁ kālena pīḍayan 51.

kālasyānavasthitatvāt KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 6, 31. kālāvasthā SUŚR. 1, 113, 14.

151, 21. aitasmātkālāt ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 4, 5. ūrdhvaṁ tu kālādetasmāt M.

9, 90. etasminneva kāle N. 2, 12. anyeṣvapi tu kāleṣu M. 7, 183. sarveṣu

kāleṣu R. 1, 46, 11. viṣame kāle 2, 88, 15. kāle śubhe prāpte N. 5, 1.

tasminnatisukhe kāle DAŚ. 1, 19. deśakālau “der rechte Ort und die

rechte Zeit, Zeit und Ort” M. 3, 126. 7, 10. 16. 64. 8, 126. 156. 157. deśe

ca kāle ca 233. HIT. I, 14. deśakālajña N. 8, 12. kālaṁ kar “eine Zeit

festsetzen”: kālaśca kriyatāmasya svapne jāgaraṇe tathā R. 6, 38, 29.

Eine andere Bed. von kālaṁ kar wird u. 3 besprochen werden. trikālajña

R. 1, 1, 8. iṣṭapañcakālajña MBH. 12, 12797. agnau juhvadubhau

kālāvubhau kālāvupaspṛśan “bei Sonnenauf – und Niedergang” 1, 4623.

ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ “zur 6ten Stunde am Tage” d. i. “um Mittagszeit” VIKR.

20. ṣaṣṭhānnakāla “der nur die sechste Esszeit hat” d. i. “der 5

Mahlzeiten vorübergehen lässt und erst am Abend des 3ten Tages seine

Mahlzeit hält”; davon nom. abstr. ṣaṣṭhānnakālatā M. 11, 200.

Gewöhnlich mit Weglassung von anna “Speise”: caturthakālam “zur

vierten Esszeit” d. i. “am Abend des zweiten Tages” 109. ṣaṣṭhe kāle “am

Abend des dritten Tages” MBH. 13, 5175. 14, 1663. 1665.

kadāciddvādaśe kāle kadācidapi ṣoḍaśe. āhāramakarodrājā mūlāni ca

phalāni ca.. 1, 8118. Vgl. caturthakālika und aṣṭamakālika adjj. “der erst

am Abend des zweiten” und “vierten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält” M. 6, 19.

ṛtukāla “die Zeit der monatlichen Reinigung” NIR. 1, 19. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3,

13, 47. M. 5, 153. āpatkāle 2, 241. mantrakāle 7, 149. niśā- N. 15, 14.

pradoṣa- HIT. 22, 1. śīta-, uṣṇa- I, 186. śiśukāla “die Kinderjahre”

PAÑCAT. 192, 3. kiyānkālastavaivaṁ sthitasya saṁjātaḥ “wie viel Zeit ist

verflossen, seitdem du stehst?” 242, 14. evaṁ tasya tāṁ nityaṁ

sevamānasya kālo yāti 45, 10. kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatām HIT. Pr. 48. athaivaṁ gacchati kāle PAÑCAT. 34, 14. gacchatā

kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, nach einiger Zeit” 47, 6. 76, 10. 224, 7. kāle

gacchati dass. VID. 61. evaṁ tena saha sakalāṁ rātriṁ

yāvadvigrahaparasya kālo vrajati PAÑCAT. 117, 9. 163, 22. tasya ca kṛṣiṁ

kurvatastadaiva niṣphalaḥ kālo ‘tivartate “die Zeit, welche er auf das

Bebauen des Ackers verwendet, geht ihm fruchtlos dahin” 174, 9.

tasyaivaṁ vartamānasya kālaḥ samabhivartsyati. agniṁ śuśrūṣamāṇasya

pitaraṁ ca yaśasvinam.. R. 1, 8, 10. sa ca vakabālakān – sadaiva

bhakṣayankālaṁ nayati PAÑCAT. 98, 10. sadaikasthānavihāriṇau kālaṁ

nayataḥ 43, 2. bhakṣaṇapānaviharaṇakriyābhiḥ kālo neyaḥ 25, 10. HIT.

37, 20. RAGH. 1, 33. kālaṁ yāpayati PAÑCAT. 183, 24. kva cāyaṁ

vihṛtastvayā. kālaḥ MBH. 1, 7. nityakālam “stets” M. 2, 58. 73.

dīrghakālam “eine lange Zeit hindurch” 8, 145. SUND. 1, 10. CĀT. 1.

mahāntaṁ kālam dass. PAÑCAT. 114, 24. dīrgheṇa kālena dass. SUND. 1,

8. “nach langer Zeit” R. 1, 45, 40. kālena mahatā dass. VIŚV. 10, 10.

kālena bahunā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kenacittvatha kālena “nach einiger Zeit”

VIŚV. 5, 13. kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit” M. 9, 246. MBH. 3,

8843. BHAG. 4, 38. R. 4, 15, 34. PAÑCAT. 32, 24. KATHĀS. 4, 20. 6, 21.

VID. 16. 184. 193. dīrghasya kālasya “nach langer Zeit” N. 18, 1. M. 8,

216. R. 3, 4, 37. 4, 8, 49. kālasya mahataḥ dass. 1, 17, 12.

kasyacitkālasya “nach einiger Zeit” ŚĀK. 110, 15. kasyacittvatha kālasya

MBH. 1, 5299. HARIV. 6386. R. 1, 26, 25. kālāt “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit

der Zeit” M. 8, 251. kālatas dass. KATHĀS. 6, 101. — 2) Ereignisse, deren

Ursachen sich dem Verstande entziehen, werden, da sie im Verlauf der

“Zeit” geschehen, als unmittelbare Wirkungen “der thätig gedachten Zeit”

aufgefasst. Schon oben u. 1. haben wir zweier Lieder des AV. gedacht, in

denen der Begriff der “Zeit” an den der “Weltordnung” oder des

“Schicksals” streift. na kartā kasyacitkaścinniyoge nāpi ceśvaraḥ.

svabhāve vartate kālaḥ kasya kālaḥ parāyaṇaḥ.. R. 4, 24, 5. fgg. SUŚR. 1,

18, 18. BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Verz. d. B. H. No. 948. sarve kālena sṛjyante

hriyante ca punaḥ punaḥ MBH. 13, 56. kālasyāhaṁ vaśānugaḥ 51. R. 6,

12, 1. pracodito ‘haṁ kālena pannaga tvāmacūcudam MBH. 13, 50. ayaṁ

rāmastvayaṁ rāma iti kālena coditāḥ. anyo ‘nyaṁ samare jaghnuḥ R. 3,

31, 47. kālacodita 1, 1, 50. 3, 8, 8. ARJ. 10, 31. DRAUP. 8, 4. — 3) “die

Alles zu Ende führende, vernichtende Zeit; Tod”, sowohl der, welcher nur

das einzelne Individuum trifft, als auch der, welcher am Ende der Welt

Alles zerstört. Nach SUŚR. 1, 122, 11 “der Tod der durch die Zeit, durch’s

Alter kommt”: tatraikaḥ kālasaṁjñastu śeṣāstvāgantavaḥ smṛtāḥ

(mṛtyavaḥ). Sehr häufig personificirt mit den Attributen Jama’s und mit

diesem bisweilen auch identificirt. AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 3,

3, 382. H. 323. 184. H. an. MED. kālameyivān “er starb” BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 2.

kālaṁ kar “sterben” MBH. 14, 1784. R. 2, 64, 52; vgl. kālakarman und

kālakriyā. kālasamāyukta “gestorben” 6, 93, 23. kālasya nayane yuktā

yamasya puruṣāśca ye MBH. 2, 343. so ‘yaṁ vyaktaṁ bhavatāṁ

kālahetuḥ 2096. sa hi meghācalaprakhyaḥ kālaḥ puruṣavigrahaḥ.

varāyudhadharaḥ śrīmānutpapāta vihāyasā.. R. 5, 89, 45. kālo hi

vyasanaprasāritabhujo gṛhṇāti dūrādapi PAÑCAT. II, 21. upetya muniveṣo

‘tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam RAGH. 15, 92. pitṝṇāṁ (patiṁ)

sarvanidhanaṁ kālaṁ vaiśvānaraṁ prabhum HARIV. 12492. kālāyāḥ

kālakalpastu gaṇaḥ paramadāruṇaḥ 12465. prahrādastu – yuyudhe saha

kālena raṇe kāla iva sthitaḥ 13191. (nivātakavacāḥ) kālarūpāḥ MBH. 3,

12107. ARJ. 7, 5. svaṁ rūpaṁ kālarūpābhaṁ bheje vaiśravaṇānujaḥ R. 3,

55, 3. kālarūpin 4, 59, 20. kālopamau yuddhe 1, 22, 24. RĀJA-TAR. 1,

289. kālamivolvaṇam 5, 148. nidrayā kālarūpiṇyā HARIV. 3237.

śūnyamāsījjagatsarvaṁ kāleneva hataṁ tadā SUND. 2, 18.

saṁjihīrṣurdurādharṣaṁ kālo lokakṣaye yathā R. 6, 70, 35. kālasya

kālaśca bhavetsa rāmaḥ saṁkṣipya lokāṁśca sṛjedathānyān 3, 43, 42.

mṛtyurdaṇḍaṁ sapāśaṁ ca kālaḥ śaktimagṛhṇata HARIV. 12146.

khaḍgadaṇḍaṁ dhanuṣpāśaṁ śaraughajaṭharaṁ prabhum.

rāmakālamakālena na kālayitumarhasi.. R. 3, 41, 26. kālapāśa 1, 21, 13.

29, 9. 3, 31, 16. 35, 73. 45, 19. 5, 47, 35. VIŚV. 6, 8. 9, 18. MṚCCH. 163,

7. HIT. 21, 11. kāladaṇḍa MBH. 1, 984. R. 3, 35, 43. VIŚV. 6, 2. kālāstra

11. kālamudgara R. 3, 54, 10. kālajihva MBH. 1, 2932. kālaviṣa 3, 10884.

kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam VIŚV. 15, 16. 6, 19.

MBH. 3, 10393. kālāgnisadṛśaḥ krodhe R. 1, 1, 19. kālāgnimiva duḥsaham

74, 17. 4, 33, 32. 50, 9; vgl. kālānala. In Verbindung mit antaka (vgl.

kālāntaka) und mṛtyu “Tod”: antakaścābhaddogdhā kālo lokaprakālanaḥ

HARIV. 374. abhyadhāvata saṁkruddhaḥ prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ R. 3, 7, 9.

mṛtyukālasama 4, 37, 20. kālamṛtyuyugāntābha 31, 17. yathā yamo yathā

mṛtyuryathā kālo yathā vidhiḥ hantāsmi rākṣasānadya 3, 69, 20. kāla und

mṛtyu in Jama’s sabhā MBH. 2, 340. Kāla (kann hier wie im Folgenden

auch als Personif. der “Zeit” oder des “Schicksals” aufgefasst werden) als

Devarshi in Indra’s sabhā 295. Kāla ein Sohn Dhruva’s, “des

Polarsterns”: dhruvasya putro bhagavānkālo lokaprakālanaḥ (vgl. oben

HARIV. 374) 1, 2585. HARIV. 154. VP. 120. kāla = māṭhara im Gefolge

des Sonnengottes VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — 4) “Zeitalter, Weltalter” (= yuga):

tūrye kāle RĀJA-TAR. 5, 73. — 5) “Zeit” so v. a. “Zeitmaass; Prosodie”:

ekādaśidvādaśinorlaghāvaṣṭamamakṣaram (plabate). udaye saṁhitākāle

ṚV. PRĀT. 8, 21. hrasvo dīrghaḥ pluta iti kālato niyamā ṛci ŚIKṢĀ 11. AV.

PRĀT. 2, 39. P. 1, 1, 70. 2, 27. — 6) “Abtheilung, Abschnitt” VS. PRĀT. 3,

4. 5. — Vgl. akāla, ākāla, ekakālam, yathākālam.

kāla 1) KATHĀS. 64, 118. — 2) i) ein Sohn Vasu’s (vgl. kālin) Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 80,b,40. Verfasser von Mantra 101,b,16. = aśvaghoṣa WASSILJEW 35.

45. 58. 75. 200. — 4) f) b) nicht “Cajanus indicus”, sondern “eine best.

Lehmart.” — h) N. der Dākṣāyaṇī auf dem Berge Kālañjara Verz. d. Oxf. H.

39,b,4. ein Aṁśa der Prakṛti 23,b,1. WILSON, Sel. Works 1,246.

kāla 1) yathaiva śṛṅgaṁ goḥ kāle vardhamānasya vardhate “mit der Zeit,

allmählich” Spr. 4802. paritoṣakālāḥ “Zeit” so v. a. “Gelegenheit” 3012.

brāhmaṇastriṣu kāleṣu śastraṁ gṛhṇanna duṣyati. ātmatrāṇe varṇadoṣe

durdamyaniyameṣu ca.. MBH. 12, 2950. — 3) mṛtyukālau R. 7, 22, 22. —

5) ṚV. PRĀT. 6, 9. 11. 11, 1. 16. varṇāpattīnāṁ trayaḥ kālā bhavanti

mātrārdhamātrāṇumātropalakṣitāḥ Schol. zu VS. PRĀT. 4, 146. — 7) in

den Verbindungen pada-, krama-, saṁhitā- so v. a. pāṭha Schol. zu AV.

PRĀT. 4, 123. fg.

kāla 1) kālena “von Zeit zu Zeit, dann und wann” (Gegens. pade pade)

Spr. (II) 6900. “zu spät” 6007.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kāla 1 (yama) I (YAMA)>span class=”red”>* The god of Death.

When the life span of each living being allotted by Brahmā is at an end

Yama sends his agents and takes the soul to Yamapurī (the city of

Yama). From there, the holy souls are sent to Vaikuṇṭha (Heaven, the

abode of Viṣṇu) and the sinful souls to Hell.

kāla 2 II A Maharṣi. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 7, Verse 14,

refers to this sage as offering worship to Indra, in Indra’s assembly.

kāla See under the word Kālamāna.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kāla 1. kāla, m.

1. Due season, Man. 2, 80; instr. kālena, In due season, Man. 9, 246.

2. Time, Man, 1, 24; 7, 183; instr. kālena, and abl. kālāt, In the long

run, Pañc. 32, 24; Man. 8, 251; gen. dīrghasya kālasya, After a long time,

Nal. 18, 1; kasya cit kālasya, After some time, Śāk. 110, 15.

3. Mealtime; there are two meal-times a day, therefore, ṣaṣṭha kāla,

The sixth meal-time = the evening of the third day, MBh. 13, 5175; Rām.

3, 31, 47.

4. A period, Rājat. 5, 73.

5. Death, Bhāg. P. 9, 9, 2.

6. Time personified, fate, MBh. 13, 56; Rām. 6, 70, 35; endowed with

the attributes of Yama, the regent of the dead, Rām. 1, 21, 13; 3, 35, 43,

etc.

— Comp. a-, m. unseasonableness, Sund. 2, 31; loc. le, unseasonably,

Man. 3, 105. ādi-, m. beginning of time, Rām. 3, 20, 6. ṛtu-, m. 1.

seasonable time, MBh. 3, 14763. 2. time approved for sexual intercourse,

Man. 3, 45. eka-kāla + m, adv. once, Man. 6, 55. kārya-, m. time of

action, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1809. kṛta-,

I. m. appointed time, Yājñ. 2, 184.

II. adj. having waited a certain time, MBh. 2, 1875. caturtha-kāla + m,

adv. at the fourth meal-time, i. e. on the evening of every second day,

Man. 11, 109. tad-kāla + m, adv. instantly, Pañc. 192, 6. tāvatkāla + m, i.

e. tāvant-, adv. such a long time, MBh. 3, 16889. tri-, n. 1. past, future,

and present time, Bhāg. P. 5, 23, 8. 2. morning, noon, and evening, MBh.

13, 6607. duṣkāla, i. e. dus-, m. the formidable, all-destroying, time, Rām.

2, 33, 21; a name of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10418. nitya-kāla + m, adv.

continually, Man. 2, 58. purva(n)-, m. the periodic change of the moon.

prāpta-kāla + m (vb. āp with pra), adv. in due season, Pañc. 16, 6. a-

prāpta-kāla + m, adv. Out of due season, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 173. yathā-kāla

+ m, adv. At the proper time, Man. 2, 39. sa-kāla + m, adv. Betimes,

early in the morning. sūrya-, m. day.

kāla 2. kāla (cf. kalaṅka),

I. adj., f. lī, Dark blue, black, Rām. 6, 67, 2; MBh. 16, 57.

II. m.

1. A black and poisonous snake, Coluber naga, Lass. 16, 13.

2. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 336, 20.

3. A name of Rudra, Bhāg. P. 3, 12, 12.

4. A proper name, Hariv. 189.

5. The name of a mountain, Rām. 4, 44, 21.

III. f. lā.

1. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 131, 19, etc.

2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2520.

3. The name of a female demon, Hariv. 11552.

IV. f. lī.

1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 195.

2. A surname of Satyāvatī, Chr. 6, 1.

— Comp. bhadra-kālī, f. 1. a name of Durgā. 2. a fragrant grass, Cyperus.

mahā-,

I. m. a name of Śiva.

II. f. lī, Durgā.

— Cf. [greek] etc., under kalaṅka.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kāla f. ī1 dark-blue, black, m. the black part of the eye, E. of Rudra-Śiva;

N. of sev. kings etc., also = kālasarpa q.v.; f. ī E. of Durga etc.

kāla [2] m. time, esp. the right or proper time (w. gen., dat., loc., inf., or

–°); opportunity, case; season, mealtime (twice a day); the half of a day,

hour, age, era, measure of time, prosody; time as ruler or destroyer of

the world, i.e. destiny, fate; end; death or the god of death. –paraḥ kālaḥ

high time (w. inf.). kālaṁ kṛ appoint a time for (loc.). kālena in course of

time (also -gacchatā; kālāt or kālatas), at times; kālena dīrgheṇa bahunā,

or mahatā (also gen.) after a long time. kasya citkālasya after some time.

kāla & kāle in time, at the right or appointed time; (also kāle gacchati) in

course of time, little by little. kāle kāle always in time or at the right time.

kasmiṁścitkāle one day. — ubhau kālau morning and evening. ṣaṣṭhe kāle

on the sixth half-day i.e. after three days; pancaśate kāle after 250 days.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kāla 1. kāla, a. (ī) dark blue, black; m. the black in the eye; ep. of Śiva.

kāla 2. kāla, m. due season, appointed or right time (for d., g., lc., inf., –

°); time; opportunity; season; meal-time (of which there are two day);

half a day; hour; age, era; measure, prosody; Time, fate; death, god of

death; -°, at the right time; in time, gradually;

paraḥ kālaḥ, high time (w. inf.);

kālaṁ kṛ, fix a time for (lc.);

kālam āsādya, according to circumstances; in. kālena, in due season;

in course of time: -gacchatā, as time goes on, in course of time;

dīrgheṇa-, mahatā -or bahunā-, after a long time;

kenacit-, after some time;

tena-, at that time; ab. kālāt, in the long run, in course of time;

kālatas, id.; with regard to time; g. dīrghasya or mahataḥ kālasya,

after a long time;

kasya -cit-, after some time; lc. kāle, at the right or appointed time,

opportunely; in time = gradually; — prāpte, when the time has come;

-gacchati, in course of time; -yāte, after the lapse of some time;

-kaśmiṁś cit-, one day;

kāle kāle, always at the right time;

ṣaṣṭhe –, at the end of the third day: –‘hnaḥ, at the sixth hour of the

day, i. e. at noon;

pañ- caśate-, = after 250 days;

ubhau kālau, morning and evening.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kāla t ka kālopadeśe . iti karikalpadrumaḥ . (adantacurāṁ–paraṁ–

sakaṁ–seṭ .) yathā acakālat kālamiyattayā gaṇakaḥ . etāvatī veleti

kathitavānityarthaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kāla kālopadeśe (iyattayā kālaniścayārthopradeśe) ada° cu° ubha° saka°

seṭ . kālayati te avakālat–ta, kalayām–babhūva–āsa–cakāra–cakre .

kālayiṣyati–te

kāla pu° īṣadalati ala–ac koḥ kā° . 1 kṛṣṇabarṇe tasya varṇeṣu

īṣadbhūṣakatvāt tathātvam . astyarthe arśa ādyac . 2 tadvarṇayukte tri° .

3 lauhe na° vācaspatiḥ . dhātuṣu tasya kṛṣṇatvāt tathātvam . 4 kakkole

na° rājani° 5 kāloyake gandhadravyabhede na° śabdaca° .

tayaurgrandhadravyeṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam . 6 kokile puṁstrī° rājani°

tasya pakṣiṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7 rāle 8 raktacitrake 9 ka

samarde (kālaka sendā) vṛkṣe ca pu° rājani° . 10 śanigrahe medi°

kṛṣṇatvāttasya tathātvam . kalayatisarvaṁ cu° kala–ac

kālasamayavelāsviti pā° nirdeśāt ni° upadhārdardhaḥ . 11 yamarāje 12

mahākāle śive medi° . 13 parameśvare kālo’smi lokakṣayakṛtpravṛddhaḥ

kālaḥ kalayatāmaham iti ca gītā ṛtuḥ sudarśanaḥ kālaḥ parameṣṭhī

parigrahaḥ viṣṇusa° . trayīmayo’yaṁ bhagavāna kālātmā kālakṛdvibhuḥ

sū° si° . svanāmakhyāte paratvāparatvadhīhetau nyāyādimatasiddhe 1 4

dravyabhede . tannirūpaṇaṁ kaṇādasūtre upaskaravṛttau ca yathā

aparasminnaparaṁ yugapat ciraṁ kṣipramiti kālaliṅgāni ka° sū° .

itiśabdo jñānaprakāraparaḥ pratyekamabhimambadhyate

tathācāparamiti pratyayo yugapaditipratyayaḥ ciramitipratyayaḥ

kṣipramitipatyayaḥ kālaliṅgānītyarthaḥ aparasminnaparamityanena

parasmit paramityapi draṣṭavyaṁ, tenāyamarthaḥ–

bahutaratapanaparispandāntaritajanmani sthāpire yuvānamavadhiṁ kṛtvā

‘paratvamutpadyate taccāparatvamasamavāyikāraṇasāpekṣam, na ca

rūpādyasamavāyikāraṇaṁ vyabhicārāt trayāṇāṁ gandhādīnāṁ vāyau

paratvādyanutpādakatvāt sparśasyāpyuṣṇādibhedena bhinnasya

pratyekaṁ vyabhicārāt na cāvacchinnaparimāṇaṁ tathā tasya

vijātīyānārambhakatvāt tapanaparispandānāñca vyadhikaraṇatvāt

tadaṣacchinnadravyasaṁyoga evāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ pariśiṣyate tacca

dravya piṇḍamārtaṇḍobhayasaṁyuktaṁ vibhu syāt ākāśasya

tatsvābhāvyakalpane kvacidapi bheryabhidhātāt sarvabherīṣu

śabdotpattiprasaṅgaḥ . tathāca kālasyaiva mārtaṇḍasaṁyuktasya piṇḍena

saṁyogo’paratvāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ kāla eva mārtaṇḍakriyopanāyakaḥ

ātmanaśca dravyāntaradharmeṣu dravyāntarāvacchedāya

svapratyāsattyatiriktasannikarṣāpekṣatvāt anyathā vārāṇasīsthena

mahārajanāruṇimnā pāṭaliputre’pi sphaṭikamaṇerāruṇyaprasaṅgāt .

kālasya tu tatsvabhāvatayaiva kalpanādayamadoṣaḥ . kālenāpi

rāgasaṁkramaḥ kathaṁ na iti cet niyatakriyopanāyakatvenaiva

tatsiddheḥ evaṁ sthaviramavadhiṁ kṛtvā yūni paratotpattirnirūpaṇīyā .

yugapaditi yugapajjāyante yugapattiṣṭhanti yugavat kurvanti ityādi–

pratyayānāñca ekasmin kāle ekasyāṁ sūryagatau ekasmin

sūryagatvavacchinnakāle ityarthaḥ, na cāprāptā e sūryagatayo

viśeṣaṇatāmanubhavanti . na ca svarūpapratyayāsannāeva tāḥ

tasmādetāvṛśaviśiṣṭapratyayānyathānupapattyā viśeṣaṇa prāpakaṁ yad

dravyaṁ sa kālaḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ .

nanu sidhyatu kālaḥ, sa tu nityo dravyaṁ veti na pramāṇamata āha .

dravyatvamityatve vāyunā vyākhyāte ka° sū° .

yathā vāyuparamāṇorguṇavattvāddravyatvam adravyadravyatvācca

nityatvaṁ tathā kālasyāpītyarthaḥ upa° .

tathāpi santu bahavaḥ kālā ityata āha .

tattvambhāvena ka° sū° .

vyākhyātamiti bipariṇatenānvayaḥ . cirādiprayayānāṁ kālaliṅgānāṁ

sarvatrāviśeṣādanekatve’pyāratmanāmiva viśeṣaliṅgābhāvāt

sattāvadekatvaṁ kālasyetyarthaḥ .

nanvevaṁkṣaṇalavamuhūrteyāmadivasāhorātrapakṣamāsartvayanasaṁva

tsarādibhedena bhūyāṁsaḥ kālāstat kathamekaḥ iti cenna

bhedabhānasya upādhinibandhanatvāt yathā eka eva

sphaṭikamaṇirjavātāpiñjādyupādhyaparāgeṇa bhinna iva bhāsate tathaika

eva kālaḥ

sūryaspandādyavacchedabhedenatattatkāryāvacchedakabhedena ca

bhinna iva bhāsat ityayupagamāt tathāca kālopādhyavyāpakaḥ

kālopādhiḥ, svādheyakādācitkābhāvapratiyogyanādhāraḥ kālo vā kṣaṇaḥ

pratikṣaṇaṁ kasyacidutpatteḥ kasyacidvināśādetadadhyavaseyam .

kṣaṇadvayañca lavaṁ ityādyāgamaprasiddham . nanu

tathāpyatītānāgatavartamānabhedena kālatrayastu, śradhūyate hi

trekālyamupāvartate traikālyāsiddhiḥ ityādīti cenna traikālyavyavahārāt

yena hi vastunā yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya vartamānaḥ

yatprāgabhāvena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya bhaviṣyatkālaḥ

yatpradhvaṁ sena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasyātītakālaḥ

tathācāvacchedakatritvādhīnaḥ kālatritvavyavahāraḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ!

idānīṁ sarvotpattimatāṁ kālaḥ kāraṇamityāha .

nityaṣvabhāvādanityeṣu bhāvāt kāraṇe kālākhyeti ka° sū° . itiśabdo

hetau itihetoḥ kāraṇe–sarvotpattimatkāraṇe kālaḥ ityākhyā . hetumāha

nityeṣvabhāvāt anityeṣu bhāvāditi nityeṣu ākāśādiṣu yugapajjātaḥ

ciraṁjātaḥ kṣipraṁ jātaḥ idānīṁ jātaḥ divā jātaḥ rātrau jāta

ityādipratyayasyābhāvāt anityeṣu ghaṭapaṭādiṣu

yaugapadyādipratyayānāṁ bhāvāt anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ kāraṇaṁ kāla

ityathaḥ . na kevalaṁ yaugapadyādipratyayabalāt kālasya

sarvotpattimannimittakāraṇatvam api tu puṣpaphalādīnāṁ

haimantikavāsantikaprāvṛṣeṇyādisajñābalādeva tadadhyavaseyam upa° .

bhāṣāmuktāvalyośca saṅkṣepeṇa tannirṇayo yathā

janyānāṁ janakaḥ kālojagatāmāśrayomataḥ .

parāparatvadhīhetuḥ kṣaṇādiḥ syādupādhitaḥ bhāṣā .

kālaṁ nirūpayati janyānāmiti tatra pramāṇaṁ darśayitumāha

jagatāmiti tathāhi idānīṁ ghaṭaityādipratītiḥ sūryaparispandādikaṁ yadi

viṣayīkaroti tadā sūryaparispandādinā ghaṭādeḥ sambandhovācyaḥ sa ca

saṁyogādirna sambhavatīti kālaeva tatsambandhaghaṭakaḥ kalpyate

itthañca tasyāśrayatvamapi samyak . pramāṇāntaraṁ darśayati

parāparatveti paratvāparatvabuddherasādhāraṇaṁ nimittaṁ ka laeva

paratvāparatvayorasamavāyikāraṇasaṁyogāśrayolāghavādatiriktaḥ

kalpyataiti bhāvaḥ . nanvekatya kālasya siddhau

kṣaṇadinamāsavarṣādisamayabhedona syādataāha kṣaṇādiriti

kālastveko’pi upādhibhedāt kṣaṇādivyāhāraviṣayaḥ . upādhistu

svajanyavibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnaṁ kamma,

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnavibhāgovā

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnauttarasaṁyogaprāgabhāvo vā

uttarasaṁyāgāvacchinnaṁ karma vā . nacottarasaṁyogānantaraṁ

kṣaṇavyavahārī na syāditi vācyaṁ karmāntarasattvāditi . mahāpralaye

kṣaṇādivyavahāroyadyapi, tadā’nāyattyā dhvaṁ senopapādanāyaḥ .

dinādivyavahārastu tattatkṣaṇakūṭaireveti muktābalī .

tārkikaśiromaṇinā raghunāthaśiromaṇinā ca

padārthanirūpaṇaprakaraṇe tatra dikkālau neśvarādatiricyete iti vadatā

vibhurūpasyaikasya kālasya khaṇḍanaṁ kṛvam .

raghudevarāmabhadrābhyāṁ tadvivṛtaṁ tataḥ saṁkṣipya

padārthatattvasāre ca jayanārāyaṇatarkapañcānanena darśitaṁ yathā

dikkālau neśvarādatiriktau prācyāṁ ghaṭa idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ

ityādivyavahārasya īśvarātmakavibhuviṣayakatvenaivograpatteḥ, naca

tayorbhinnaviṣayakatvamanubhavasiddhamiti vācyaṁ tathā sati prācyāṁ

ghaṭaḥ pratīcyāṁ ghaṭaḥ idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ tadānīṁ ghaṭa ityāderapi

bhinnabhinnaviṣayakatvānubhavāt kāladiśorapi bahutvāṅgokāraprasaṅgāt,

tathā ca upādhibhedādekayā diśā ekena kālena ca yathā bhavatāṁ

bahūnāṁ vyavahārāṇa apaprattistathā’smākamapi

ekeneśvareṇāgamānumānāpyāṁ siddhena sarveṣāmeva

tādṛśavyavahāṇāsupadhibhedāduṣapatti sambhavati, suryakriyādau

svasaṁyukteśvarasaṁyogitapanāśritatvādisambandhena ghaṭādeḥ

sattvasambhavena tatsambandhaghaṭakatayā’pyati raktakālādyasiddheḥ .

ayavā kṣaṇā evātiriktāḥ idānāmityādivyavahāraviṣayāḥ,

vibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnakarmaṇaḥ kṣaṇatvāsambhavāt

bhābikarmāntarajanyavibhāgāntaraprāgabhāvāvacchinnasya karmaṇaḥ

kṣaṇacatu yādisthāyitvena tādṛśasyopā dhitvāmambhavāt naca vibhāge

svajanyatvaṁ viśeṣaṇīyam, svavānanugamādanangaptāpatteḥ,

vibhāgajananādidaśāyāmupādhyantarasya vācyatayā

tāvatāpyananugamācca, evañcopādhīnāmatiriktānāṁ

kṣaṇikapadārpamvarūpāṇāṁ kṣaṇānāmavaśyābhyupeyatayā tere .

tādṛśāḥ sarve vyavahārā upapādanīyāḥ kimatiriktena kāleveti .

sāṁkhyamate tasya kāśalarbhāvaḥ na pṛthakatattvāntaratvaṁ

tadetatsāṁkhyasūtrabhāṣyayordarśitam

khaṇḍadikkālayoḥ sṛṣṭimāha bhā° .

dikkālābākāśādibhyaḥ sāṁ° sū° .

nityau yau dikkālautāvākāśaprakṛtibhūtau pakṛterguṇaviśeṣaveva . ato

dikkālayorvibhatvopapattiḥ . ākāśavat savagataśca nitya itya

diśrutyaktaṁ vibhutvaṁ cākāśasyopapannam . yau tu khaṇḍadikkālau tau

tu tacadupādhisayogādākāśādatpadyete ityathaḥ

ādaśabdenopādhigrahaṇāditi . yadyapi tattadupādhiviśiṣṭākāśameba

khaṇḍadikka lau tathāpi ṣiśiṣṭasyātiriktatābhyupagamavādena

vaiśeṣikanaye śrotrasya kāryatāvat tatkābhāpamatroktam pra° bhā° .

atapadaṁ darśayiṣyamāṇamādhavagranthe ca vācaspatimatena

kālakhaṇḍanaṁ tu nityapibhukālakhaṇḍanaparaṁ tathāhi upādhibhidyate

na tu tadvāniti sā° sū° upādhibhedeca dharmibhedāsambhavasya

vyāsthāpanāt dharmiṇaḥ kālasya ekatvena upādhinā bhedāsambhavāt

upādhinā nā’nāgatādi bhedavyavahārasambhavaḥ tathā ca kriyādereva

upādhibhūtasyānāgatādivyavahāropapādakatayā tasyaiva kālatvam .

ataeva kriyaiva kāla ityabhiyuktoktiḥ . kālamādhavīye ca mādhavena

śaṅkāpūrvakaṁ kālaścetthaṁ nyarūpi

nanu nāyamudyamaḥ saphalaḥ kālasya gaganakusumāyamānatvāta

tadetatparamarahasyamabhijānānaḥ kapilamahāmunistattvāni

nirvivektukāmaḥ kālamupekṣyānyānyeva pañcaviṁśatitattvāni viveca

mūlaprakṛtiravikṛtirmahadādyāḥ prakṛtivichatayaḥ sapta . ṣāḍaśakastu

vikārā na prakṛtina vikṛtiḥ puruṣaḥ iti . na caiteṣveva

tattveṣakālamyāntarbhāvo muninā vivajita iti śaṅūnīyam

tvadabhimatamya kālamya pañcaviṁśatitattvānāṁ cānyādṛśāni lakṣaṇāni

. satvarajastamoguṇānāṁ sāmyāvasthā

malaprakṛtirmadahaṅkārapañcataktātrākhyānāṁ svaptānāṁ

prakṛtivikṛtīnām madhyetdhyavasāyaheturmattattvava

abhimānaheturahaṅkāraḥ . śabdasparśaruparasagandhātmakāni

pañcatanyātrāṇi pṛthivyādipañcamahābhūtānāṁmekādaśendiyāṇāñca

ṣoḍaśavikārāṇāṁ lakṣaṇāni prasiddhāni . apra kṛtiravikṛtiḥ

puruṣaścidātmakaḥ . na hyevaṁlakṣaṇakeṣ tattveṣu kālamyāntarbhāvaḥ

sambha vyate nāpi ṣaḍvaṁśaṁ tattvāntaraṁ muniranubhanyate . kathaṁ

tarhi munipraṇītāni tattvāni āryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāna īśvarakṛṣṇau

bahiḥkaraṇāntaḥkarane vicinvan kālaṁ vyājahāra? sāṁpratakālaṁ bāhya

trikālamābhyantara karaṇamiti . paraprasiddhyāparo bodhanīya iti

nyāyenāyaṁ vyavahāro na tu sasiddhāntābhipāyeṇeti vadāmaḥ . ata

evaitadvaco vyācakṣāṇā vācaspatimiśrāstattvakaumuhyāmevamāhuḥ

kālastu vaiśeṣikābhibhata eko nānāgatātītādi bhedaṁ pravartayitumarhati

. tasmādayaṁ yairupādhibhedairatītānāgatādibhedabhāvaṁ pratipadyate

santu taevopādhayo vyavahārahetavaḥ kṛtamantargaḍunā kāleneti

sāṁkhyācaryāḥ . tasvānna kālarūpatattvāntarābhyupagama iti .

athocyeta–bhūtakālo vartamānakāloṁ bhaviṣyatkāla iti evaṁ triṣvapi

bhūtādiṣvanugataḥ kālapratyaya ekamanugataṁ

kālatvamantareṇānupapanna iti tanna padārthapratyayavadupapatteḥ

yathā bhavanmate dravyapadārtho guṇapadārtha iti ṣaṭsu bhāveṣu

caturṣvabhāveṣvanugataḥ padārthapratyaya ekamanugata

padārthaśabdavācyaṁ tattvāntaramantareṇāpyupapannaḥ . tathā

kālaprayogo’pi kuto nopapadyeta! . tasmānnistattvaṁ kāla nirṇetuṁ

mahānayamudyamaḥ prekṣāvacchiromaṇermādhavācāryasya na

kathañcidapyapapanna ityevaṁ prāpte brūmaḥ āyuṣmataśce tasyevaṁ

nirūḍhakālatattve yaḥ pradvaṣaḥ sa kasya hetoḥ? itivaktavyam . ki

kapilamahāmuninā nirākṛtatvāt? 1 kiṁvā

sāṁkhyaśāstrapraṇoteṣutattveṣu asaṁgṛhītatvāt? 2 uta lakṣaṇābhāvāt? 3

āhosvitpramāṇā bhāvān? 4 athavā prayojanāmāvāt? 5, athavā

tattvagatapañcaviṁśatisaṁ khyābhyāsapāṭavenābhyasitāt

śraddhājāḍyāt? 6, na prathamaḥ kālanirākaraṇasūtrasya muninā

praṇītasyānupalambhāt . na dvitīyaḥ atiprasaṅgāt ṛgvedaproktānā

jyotiṣṭomādīnāmāyurvedadhanurvedagāndharvavedaproktānāsaitradhapas

trasvarādīnāṁ māsaṁgṛhītatvena teṣvapi bhāvataḥ pradveṣaḥ phana

vāryeta? . aya teṣāṁ viṣaśaṣyā’maṁgrahe’pi

sukhaduḥkhamohātmakatvena guṇatrayāntargatatvādastyevārthāt

saṁgrahaiyacyate tarhi kālasyāpyasau na daṇḍavārita iti buddhiṁ

samādhatasva . kālasya guṇavayapariṇāmatve sāvayavatvama nityatā ca

ghaṭāderiva prasajyeteti cet? nityaniraptayava kālatattvābhiniveśavato

vaiśeṣikādeḥ patatvayaṁ vajraprahāraḥ śirasi . vedavādināṁ tu na kāpi

kṣatiḥ . kālasyotapattisāvayatvayoḥ pratyakṣaśrutāvapalabhyamānatvāta

. taittiroyaśa khāyāṁ nārāyaṇīye kālotpattirāmnāyate sarve nimeṣajijñire

vidytaḥ puruṣādadhi kalāmuhūrtā kāṣṭhāścāhorātrāśca sarvaśaḥ .

ardhasāmā māmā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsaraśca kalpattāmiti tamyāmeva

śāsvayāmāruṇakrtukacayana brāhmaṇe māvayavatvaṁ śrūyate uktoveṣo

vāsāṁsi ca ka lābayavānāmitaḥ pratīcyeṣiti . itosmādanuvākātpranocyeṣ

adhastaneṣu anuvākeṣa kālāvayavānāmṛtnāṁ dhyātavyo beṣa uktaḥ

vastrāṇi coktānītyathaḥ . nityatvaniravayavatvābhidhāyino

vaiśeṣikādiśāstrasya amṛtā devatā iti

badāpekṣikanityatāyāmantardhānaśaktyupetayakṣarākṣasādivat

saṁṛrśayogyāvayavaśvanyatāthā ca tātparye varṇanīyam .

atha manyase mahatā tapasā śivamārādhya tatprasāda

labbasarvajñatvapadaḥ kaṇādamunirvedavātparyaṁ mamyagvettīti ved

syaiva mandamatipratītādarthādarthāntaraṁ netavyasiti . evamapi yasya

prasādādayaṁ sarvaṁjñatāmalabhata saeva śivo mukhyaḥ sarvajña iti

tanmatānusāreṇa kaṇādamatasyaivātyathānayanamatyantamucitam .

śivo hi śaiveṣu āgameṣu ṣaṭatriṁ śattattvāni nirūpayat

kālavattvasyotpattimaṅgīncakāra . nikhilaśaivāgamasāramāryābhiḥ

saṁgṛhṇāno bhojarājaḥ śuddhāni pañca tattvaḥni

śivaśaktisadāśiveśvaravidyākhyāni nirdiśyetarāṇi

nirdiśanmāyākāryatvoktipūrvakameva kālaṁ niradikṣat puṁso jagataḥ

kṛtaye māyātastattva pañcakaṁ bhavati . kālo niyatiśca tathā kalā ca

vidyā ca rāgaśca iti tāni māyāsahitānyekādaśa tattvāni

sāṁkhyaprasiddhapañcaviṁśatitattvāni coddiśya vivṛṇvannidamāha

nānāvidhaśaktimayī sā janayati kālatattvamevādau . bhāvi

bhavadbhūtamayaṁ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . taṭṭīkākāra itthaṁ

vyācakhyau . nanveṣa kālo naiyāyikādibhinityo’bhyapagataḥ ata āha

māvibhavadbhūtamayamiti . bhūtādi rūpeṇa trividhatvāt

acetanatvenāsyānityataṁ siddhamiti bhāvaḥ . kena ka ryeṇāsya

siddharataāha kalayavi jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti .

cirakṣiprādipratyayopādhidvāreṇa kalayatyākṣipatatyartha’iti . ittha

pratyakṣaśrutisahakṛtaśaitāptamaiḥ kaṇādaśāstrasya bādhe sati

uttaramāmāṁsāgataḍitīyādhyāyaprathamādhikaraṇanyāyo’nugṛhyate

tasya ca nyāyasya saṁgrāhakau ślokau sāṁkhyasmṛtyaḥsti saṅkoco na

vā yedasamanvaye . dharme vedaḥ sāvakāśaḥ saṅkocyo’navakāśayā .

pratyakṣaśrutimūlābhirmanvādismṛtibhi smṛtiḥ amūlākāpilo bādhyā na

saṅkoca’nayā tataḥ iti . ayamarthaḥ . ṛgvedadi bharagnihotrādidharmo

brahmaṇo jagatkartṛtvaṁ ca prati pādyate . sāṁkhyasmṛtyādistu

padhānasya jagatkāraṇatva pratipāṭayati tatra tayā smṛtyā vedasya

saṅkoco’sti . veti saṁśaye smṛterjagatkāraṇatvamantareṇānavakāśatvāt

prābalya vedasya tu dharme’pi caritārthacāddaurbalyam . tataḥ

smṛtyanusāreṇa vedaḥ samkucita iti pūrvaḥ pakṣaḥ .

pratyakṣaśrutibhirbahva bhiranugṛhītābahvyo manvādimṛtayo

brahmakāraṇatāmācakṣate sāṁkhyasmṛtistvekā mūlahīnā ceti

durbalatvāt saiva bādhyā ato nāsti vedasya saṅkoca iti siddhānta iti . atha

tārkikatvābhimānagrahagṛhītaḥ sana paravaśa evaṁ brūṣe

bhūtādonāmaupādhikānāṁ kālaviśeṣāṇāmevotpattirna tu nirupādhikasya

mukhyasya kālasyeti tarhi kapardikānveṣaṇāya

pravṛttaścintāmaṇimalabhatetyevaṁvāsiṣṭarāmāyaṇa

proktasyābhāṇakamya tvameva viṣayo’bhūḥ . yataḥ

sādharyavaidharmyajñānāya dravya dīnyanviṣyan

parabrahmatattvamavāgamaḥ . vyavahārahetūnāṁ

bhūtādikālaviśeṣāṇāmādhāraḥ svayaṁ vyāhārātīto nityo niracayavo

mukhyoyaḥ kālaḥ sa paramātmaiva . tathāca śvetāśvatarā āmananti . yaḥ

kālakālo guṇī sarvavidya iti . āstāṁ nityatvānityatvasāvayavatvacintā .

sarvathāpyasti sāṁkhyatattveṣu ārthikaḥ kālasargrahaḥ

sākṣātsaṁgrahābhāvastu jyotiṣṭomādivat

prakṛtipuruṣavivekānupayogādityavagantavyam . tṛtīyacaturthapakṣau tu

bhavato vaiśeṣikaparicayagandho’pi nāstīti prakaṭayataḥ . vaiśeṣika

grantheṣu sarveṣvapi kālaprakaraṇeṣu tallakṣaṇasya

tatsādhakānumānasya ca papañcitvāt pramāṇāntarāṇi tu kālasādhakāni

śrutyaivopanyastāni tathā ca taittirīyā āruṇaketuke mantramāmananti

smṛtiḥ pratyakṣamaitihyam anumānaścatuṣṭayam . etairādityamaṇḍalai

sarvaireva vidhāsyate iti . tatra smṛti anumeyaśrutimūlaṁ

manvādiśāstraṁ prayakṣaṁ śrotragrāhyo ‘kṛtrimo vedākhyo’kṣararāśiḥ,

yogipratyakṣamaupaniṣadābhimataṁ sākṣipratyakṣaṁ vā .

aitihyamitihāsapurāṇādike jyotiḥśāstrasyāpyatrāntarbhāvo draṣṭavyaḥ .

anumīyate svamūlabhūtaṁ smṛtivākyamanenetyenumānaḥ

śiṣṭācārastasya ca smṛtyanumāpakatvaṁ .

bhaṭṭācāryarvispaṣṭamabhihitam . ācā rācca smṛtiṁ jñātvā smṛteśca

śrutikalpanamiti, tadevaṁ smṛtyādīnāṁ catuṣṭayaṁ saphalam,

etaiścaturbhiḥ sarvairapyādityamaṇḍalaṁ pramīyata iti mantrasyārthaḥ .

nanu smṛtyādīni maṇḍalasādhakatvenātropanyastāni na tu

kālasādhakatveneti cet maivaṁ maṇḍalasya

sārvajanīnapratyakṣasiddhatvena tatra smṛtyādyanupayogāt,

kālavivakṣayevātra kālanirvāhakamaṇḍale tānyupanyastāni, tathā ca

maṇḍaladvārā kālaḥ pramīyate . kālavivakṣā cottaramantreṣvatisphuṭā

tatrānantaro mantraevamāmnāyate, sūryo marīcimādatte

sarvasmādbhuvanādadhi, tasyāḥ pākaviśeṣeṇa smṛtaṁ kālaviśeṣaṇamiti

tasyāyamarthaḥ . bhuvanagataṁ

sarvabhūtajātamadhikṛtyarasavīryapākādibhistattadanugrahasamarthaṁ

marīciṁ sūryaṁ svīkaroti tatkṛtena bhūtapākabhedena nimeṣādiḥ

parārdhaparyantaḥ kālavibhedo’smābhiravagato bhavatīti . kālaprati

pādakāni ca smṛtyādītyudāharāmaḥ . tatra manuḥ kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñceti

sṛṣṭiprakaraṇe kālaṁ vyavajahāra . yājñavalkyo’pi, śrāddhakālaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ iti . evamanyāsvapi smṛtiṣūdāhāryam . śrutiṣvapi kṛtaṁ svapne

vicinoti kālaḥ iti bahvṛcāḥ . ahameva kālonāhaṁ kālasyeti taittirīyāḥ . kā

ca sandhyā kaśca sandhyāyāḥ kāla iti sāmagāḥ . yogaśāstre’pi

saṁyamaviśeṣāddhāraṇādhyānasamādhitrayarūpādyogino’tītādikālaṁ

pratyakṣataḥ paśyantīti abhihitam tathā ca pātañjalabhūtram

pariṇāmatrayasaṁyamādatītānāgatādijñānamiti . sāṁkṣipratakṣamapi,

ahamasminakāle nivasāmi, ityanubhavastāvatsārvajanīnaḥ . na cāsau

bāhyendriyakṛtaḥ kālasya rūpādihīnatvāt . nāpi

mānasastārkikaistadanaṅgīkārāt . nāpyanumānādijanyaḥ

aparokṣapratyayatvāt . ataḥ

sāmagryabhāva’pyaparokṣadarśanātsākṣipratyakṣametadityaupaniṣadām

anyante . itihāse’pi mahābhārate praharau ghaṭikānyūnau praharau

ghaṭikādhikau . sa kālaḥ kutapojñeya pitṝṇāṁ, dattamakṣayamiti .

purāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavānkālo’santā’jaraḥ paraḥ iti śiṣṭāśca

paurṇamāsyākhyakāle svasvakalocitān devaviśeṣebhyaḥ

kṣīradadhyādisamarpyaṇādikāndharmaviśeṣānbhānuvārādikālaviśeṣe ca

samācaranti . tadevamanekapramāṇapramite kāle

pramāṇābhāvarūpaścaturthaḥ pakṣaḥ kathamāśaṅkyeta? . nāpi

prayojanābhāvāditi pañcamaḥ pakṣo yujyate . tārkikaistāṣat

sarvotpattinimittakāraṇatvamuddhoṣitam . loke

kṛṣyādyupayogaḥḥkālaviśeṣya kṛṣīvalādibhirvyavahriyate .

gṛhapraveśaprayāṇādyupayogo jyotiḥśāstraprasiddhaḥ .

śrautasmārtakarnopayogastu pradarśayiṣyate . tasmāt

sāṁkhyaśraddhājāḍyakṛtasrava pradveṣa ityayaṁ ṣaṣṭaḥ pakṣaḥ

pariśipyate . tathāca pāpā tmanaḥ svasya budbyaparādhaṁ puṇyātmani

mādhavācārye samāro payan kayā vā śikṣayā na daṇḍyo’si . tadevaṁ

kālasyapratyā khyātumaśakyatvānnirṇayodyamaḥ saphala iti sthitam .

nanu katarakālo’tra nirṇīyate . kiṁ kevalaḥ kālaḥ kiṁ vā kālakālaḥ . nanu

kimityaprasiddhabhāṣayā bhīṣayasi, na bhīṣayāmyahaṁ kiñcāstyeva

kalayitavyabhedātkāladvaividhyam . yena

prāṇidehādayo’tītavartamānādirūpeṇa kalayitavyāḥ sa kevalaḥ kālaḥ . sa

ca tattvaprakāśavacanena pūrvam udāhṛtaḥ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti

. tādṛśo’pi kāryotpattisthitivināśakāriṇā yena kalayitavyaḥ sa kālakāla iti .

sa ca vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇedaśitaḥ kāle pi kalyte yeneti śrutiśca bhavati sa

viśvakṛdviśvavidātma yonirjñaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidyaḥ

pradhānakṣatrajñaḥ iti guṇī sasāramokṣasthitibandhaheturiti ca

kūrmapurāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavān kālo’nanto’jaraḥ paraḥ . sarvagatvāt

svatantratvāt sarvātmatvānmaheśvaraḥ . brahmāṇo bahavo rudrā anye

nārāyaṇādayaḥ . ekohi bhagavānīśaḥ kālaḥ kaviriti smṛtaḥ .

brahmanārāyaṇeśānāṁ trayāṇāṁ prākṛtolayaḥ . procyate kālayogena

punareva ca sambhavaḥ . paraṁ brahma ca bhūtāni vāsudevo’pi śaṅkaraḥ

. kālenaiva ca sṛjyante saeva grasate punaḥ . tasmāt kālatmakaṁ viśvaṁ

sa eva parameśvaraḥ iti . viṣṇudharmottare’pi . anādinidhanaḥ kālo

rudraḥ saṅkarṣaṇaḥ smṛtaṁ . kalanātsarvabhutānāṁ sa kālaḥ parikīrtitaḥ

. karṣaṇāt sarvabhūtānāṁ sa tu saṅkaṣaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ .

sarvabhūtaśamitvācca sa rudraḥ parikīrtitaḥ anādinidhanatvana sa mahān

parameśvara iti jyotiḥśa stre’pi bhūtānāmantakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ

kalanātmakā iti . tatraivaṁ sati dvayormadhye kālakālotra na nirṇetaka

tasya dharmānuṣṭhāneṣvahetutvema heyatvādanupādeyatvācca .

yastvitaro māsapakṣatithyādirūpaḥ so’pi jyotiḥśāstre samyaṅnirṇīta iti

kṛtamanayā kālanirṇayapravṛttyeti prāpte brūmaḥ umayamapyatra

nirṇetavyaṁ kālakālasya jagadīśvarasya sarveṣu karmārambheṣu

anusmartavyatvāt ataeva śiṣṭāḥ puṇyāhavācanādāvīśvaramanusmaranti .

sarveṣu kāleṣu samasta deśeṣvaśeṣakāryeṣu tayeśvareśvaraḥ .

sarvaiḥsvarūpairbhagavānanādimānmamāstu māṅgalyavivṛddhaye hariḥ .

yasya smṛtyā ca nāmoktyā tapoyajñakriyādiṣu . nyūnaṁ saṁpūrṇatāṁ

yāti sadyovande tamacyutamiti . māsādirūpabhedasya tu svarūpeṇa

jyotiṣe nirṇītatve’pi śrautasmārtakarmaviśeṣeṇa saha kālasyāṅgāṅgibhāvī

nirṇetavyaḥ . yadyapyasau hemādiprabhṛtiṣu grantheṣu

nirṇītastathāpyanekatra viprakīrṇasyaikatra saṁgrahārthamatra yatnaḥ

kriyate . tadevaṁ cikīrṣitasya granyasya kālarūpo viṣayaḥ

saṁgraharūpaṁ prayojanaṁ cāstīti ayaṁ grantha ārabhyate . nityo

janyaśca kālau dvau tayorādyaḥ pareśvaraḥ . so’vāṅamanasagamyo’pi

dehī bhaktānukampayā nityakālasya parameśvaratve pramāṇaṁ

pūrvamevopanyastam . parameśvarasya cāvāṅmanasagocaratve sarve

vedāntāstadanusārismṛtipurāṇāni tattvavidanubhavaśca pramāṇam .

bhaktānugrāhimūrtisvīkāraśca ta lavakārākhye sāmavedaśākhāviśeṣe

kasyāṁ cidākhyāyikāyāmāmnāyate tasyāṁ hyāstyāyikāyāmevamuktam–

agnivāyvi ndrādayo devā īśvarānugṛhītāḥ sarvatra vijayamānāḥ

svakīyameva tatsāmarthyamityamimanyante sma . tān

bodhāyitumavāṅmanasagamyaṁ parameva brahma pūjyāṁ

cakṣurgamyāṁ kāñcinmūrtiṁ dhārayitvā prādurbabhūva . tayā saha

vādaṁ kṛtvāpi rājasacittāvagnivāyū tadbrahmatattvaṁ naiva bubudhāte

indrastu sātvika cittobubudhe iti . vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇe’pi śukropākhyāne

śukraṁ mṛtamavalokya tatpitā bhṛguḥ kruddho mārayitāraṁ kālaṁ

śapnumudyata tadānīṁ kālo’nugrahītumīdṛśena rūpeṇāvirbabhūveti

paṭhyate athākalitarūpo’sau kālaḥ kavalitaprajaḥ . ādhibhautikamāsthāya

vapurmunimupāyayau . bahupāśadharaḥ śrīmān kuṇḍalī kavacānvitaḥ .

ṛtuṣaṭkamayodāravaktraṣaṭkasamanvitaḥ .

māsadvādaśakoddāsabhujadvādaśakodbhaṭaḥ . svākārasamayā bahvyā

vṛtaḥ kiṅkarasenaya . sa upetya praṇamyādau kupitaṁ taṁ mahāmunim .

kalpakṣubdhāvdhigambhīraṁ sāntvapūrvamuvāca h . tvamatyantatapā

vipra! vayaṁ niyatiprālakā tena saṁpūjyase pūjya . sādho! netaravīkṣayā

. mā tapaḥ kṣapayā’buddha! kalpakālamahānalaiḥ . yo na dagdho’smi me

tasya kiṁ tvaṁ śapena dhakṣyasi? . saṁsārāvalayo grastā

nigīrṇārudrakoṭayaḥ . bhuktāni viṣṇuvṛndāni kena śaptā vayaṁ mune! .

bhoktāro hivayaṁ brahman bhojanaṁ yuṣmadādayaḥ . svayaṁ niyatireṣā

hi nāvayoretadokṣitamiti . na ca bhaktānujighṛkṣayā svekṛtā

mūrtirīdṛśyeveti kaścinniyamosti sarvātmakasya parameśvarasya

bhaktacittapriyāyāḥ sarvasyā api mūrte svakīyatvāt ataeva

bhagavadgītāyām yo yo yāṁ yāṁ tanu bhaktaḥ śraddhayārcitumicchati .

tasya tasyācalāṁ śraddhāṁ tāmeva vidadhāmyaham . sa tayā śraddhayā

yuktastasyā rādhanamīhate . labhate ca tataḥ kāmān mayaiva vihitān

hitāniti . viṣṇurudrādivat acetanamūrtayo’pi

tattatphalaviśaṣārthibhirośvaratvenopāsyāḥ . tadetadṛgvede

samāmnāyate . etaṁ hyeva bahvyaca mahatyukthe mīmāṁsa

ntaetamagnāvadhvaryava, etaṁ mahāvratecchandogā, etamasyām

(pṛthivyām) etaṁ divyetaṁ vāyāvetamākāśa etamoṣadhīṣvetaṁ

vanaspatiṣvetaṁ chandasyetaṁ nakṣatreṣvetaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣviti

vājasaneyino’pi maṇḍalabrāhmaṇe tametamagnimadhvaryava upāsata

ityāramya paṭhanti viṣamiti sarpāḥ, sarpa iti sarpavidaḥ, urgiti devaḥ,

rayiriti manuṣyāḥ, māyetyamurāḥ, svadheti pitaro, devajana iti

devajanavido rūpamiti gandharvā, gandhaityapsarasastaṁ

yathāyathopāsate tadeva bhavatīti . taittirīyāśca paṭhanti kṣema iti vāci,

yogakṣemam iti prāṇāpānayorityādi . parabrahmaṇyāropitaṁ

yadyāvajjagadrūpam asti tena sarveṇaḥpyupāsanayā parameśvaro

rūpavānbhavatītihiraṇmayādhikaraṇatejomayādhikaraṇayoḥ prapañcitam .

evaṁ ca sati yo yadā yatkarmārabhate sa tadā tatkarmopayuktāṁ

kālātmakasyeścarasya mūrtimiṣṭadevaṁtārūpeṇānusmaret . ata eva

mantraśāstreṣu nānāvidhāni dhyānānyupadiṣṭāni .

loke’pyāvidvadāgopālāṅganaṁ sarvo’pi jana ekaikāṁ devatāṁ svecchayā

pūjayati tadetadbhagavānāha yajante sātvikādevān yakṣarakṣāṁsi

rājasāḥ pretān bhūtagaṇāṁścānthe yajante tāmasā janāḥ iti tasma

dārabhyamāṇakarmaphalapradonijeṣṭadevatārūponityaḥ kālaḥ

karmārambheṣu anusmartavya iti siddham .

atha janyaṁ kālaṁ nirūpayāmaḥ . nanu kālasya janyatve sati kathaṁ

pralaye kālavyavahāraḥ . pralayatvasya janyānadhikaraṇatvarūpatvāt .

pralayo’tītaḥ pralayobhāvīti kālanityatvavādinastavāpi samodoṣaḥ .

nityasya kālasya tapanaparisyandādyupādhibhiḥ paricchede satyetāvān

kāla iti kāleyattā varṇayitavyā . na ca pralaye tadupādhayaḥ santi .

atastava kathaṁ pralayakāle iyattānirṇayaḥ . atha

satkāryavādābhyupagamenopādhayo’pi vāsanā rūpeṇa santi tarhi kāle’pi

tatsamānaṁ, na caitāvatā nityatāprāptiḥ upādhiṣu tadanaṅgīkarāt . atha

manyase iyattārahite’pi pralayakāle sṛṣṭikāleyattāvāsanāvaśādiyattā

vyavahriyate . tatropādhyāyatvādirdṛṣṭāntaḥ . yathā kaścinmāṇavakaḥ

triṁśadvarṣavayaskādadhyetumupakramya

saṁvatsaramadhītyāsmadupādhyāya ekatriṁśadvarṣavayaska

ityadhyayanarahite’pyatote vayasyvapādhyāyatvaṁ vyavaharati .

tadvadiyattāvyavahāraḥ . evaṁ tarhyanena nyāyena kālarahitapralaye

kālavyavahāraḥ kiṁ na syāt? . kālarahitaṁ ca pralayādikaṁ vastvastoti

māṇḍūkyādiśrutayo’bhyupra gacchanti . tathā ca śrūyate,

yaccānyattrikālātītaṁ tadapyoṅkāra eveti . prābhākarāścāpūrvasya

kālatrayāsaṁsṛṣṭāṅkāñcidavasthābhāhuḥ . tasmātkālaḥ sukhena

janyatāṁ sa ca sāmānyaviśeṣābhyāndvividhaḥ . tasya

cobhayavidhasyeśvarākhyānnityātkālādutpattiṁ manurāha kālaṁ

kālavibhaktiñca nakṣatrāṇi grahāṁstathā . sṛṣṭiṁ sasarja caivemāṁ

sraṣṭumicchannimāḥ prajāḥ iti . tatra yaḥ sāmānyakālaḥ sa

viśeṣānugatatvāttadapekṣayā nityograhagatyādibhiranumeyo

bhūtotpattinimittakāraṇamiti tārkikajyautiṣikādayaḥ pratipedire . tatra

jyautiṣikā evamāhuḥ prabhavaviratibhadhyajñānabandhyā nitāntaṁ

viditaparamatattvā yatra te yogino’pi . tamahamiha nimittaṁ

viśvajanmātyayānāmanumitamabhivande bhagrahaiḥ kālamīśam .

yugavarṣamāsadivasāḥ samaṁ pravṛttāstu caitraśuklādeḥ .

kālo’yamanādyanto graharbharanumīyate kṣetra iti kālaviśeṣeṣu ca

saṁvatsaraḥ prādhānabhūtaḥ . anye sarve guṇabhūtāḥ .

tathācāruṇaketuke samāmnāyate nada va prabhavā kācidakṣayyā

syandate yathā . tāṁ nadyobhisamāyanti saha, sā na nivartate . evaṁ

nānāsamutthānāḥ kālāḥ saṁvatsaraṁ śritāḥ . aṇuśaśca

mahāntaścasarvesamavayanti tam . sa taiḥ sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭa ūhaḥ

sanna nivartate iti . ayamarthaḥ . bhāgīrathīgodāvaryādikā nadīva kālaḥ

kutaścidutpattisthānādutpadyate . taccotpattisthānaṁ sāṁkhyoktaṁ

prakṛtiḥ śivāgamoktamāyā vā śrutismṛtyuditā nityakālātmaka īśvaro vā

bhaviṣyati . yathā tāṁ gaṅgādikāṁ mahānadī manyāṁ

svalpanadyo’bhitaḥ praviśanti sā ca praviṣṭairnadyantaraiḥ saha vistīrṇā

pravahatpravāhā satī na kadācit śuṣyati . evaṁ nānāvidharūpaiḥ

samutpannāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁvatsarākhyaṁ pradhānaṁ kālamāśritāḥ .

tatra nimeṣādyā ayanaparyantāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁsatsarādaṇavo,

yugādyāḥ parārdhaparyantāḥ saṁvatsarānmahāntaste sarve taṁ

saṁvatsaraṁ samyak praviśanti . aṇū nāmavayavatvena praveśaḥ .

mahatāntu saṁvatsarāvṛttiniṣpādyānāmadhyakṣaḥ saṁvatsaraiti tatra

praveśo’bhidhīyate . tathāca yedāṅgajyotiṣagranthe paṭhyate

pañcasaṁyatsaramayaṁ yugādhyakṣaṁ prajāpatim .

dinartvayanamāsāṅga praṇamya śirasā sthita iti . sa ca

saṁvatsarasteraṇubhirmahadbhiśca sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭo’tidīrghaḥ

sannasmin jagati ta cchidyata iti . nanvaṇutvaṁ nimeṣe paryavasitaṁ

mahattvotu parārdhe tathā ca tayoranyatarasya prādhānyamucitam .

tatra kathaṁ saṁvatsarasya prādhānyam? iti cet īśvareṇa prathamaṁ

sṛṣṭatvāditi brūmaḥ . tathā ca vājasaneyinaḥ samāmananti so’kāmayata

dvitīyoma ātmājāyeteti sa manasā vācā mithunaṁ samabhavadyattadreta

āsīt sa saṁvatsaro’bhavaditi . tasmātsaṁvatsaraḥ pradhānam, ataeva

vayaṁ saṁvatsarabhāramya kālaviśeṣaṁ nirṇayāmaḥ . tatra

saṁvatsaro’yanamṛturmāsaḥ pakṣaḥ tithirnakṣatraṁ yoga ityevaṁ vidhāḥ

karmakālāḥ . yadyapi purāṇaṣu mṛtyumārkaṇḍeyādīnāṁ

yugādikalpādiparimitaṁ tapaḥ smaryate tathāpi śatasaṁvatsarāyuṣo

manuṣyānadhikṛtya dharmaśāstrapravṛtteḥ yugādinirṇayonoyayuktaḥ .

śāstrāṇāṁ manuṣyādhikāratvaṁ cāsmābhiḥ pārāśarasmṛtivyākhyāne

manuṣyāṇāṁ hitaṁ dharmam ityasminvacane prapañcitam . yetu kalau

pañca vivarjayet ityādayomanuṣyadharmāsteṣvapi na yugādikaṁ

nirṇetavya saṁdehābhāvāt . na ca śatāyuṣāmadhikāre kathaṁ

sahasrasaṁvatsarasatraśrutiriti śaṅkanīyam tatra

saṁvatsaraśabdodivasapara iti ṣaṣṭhādhyāye sapnamapādenirṇītatvāt .

ye’pi caturdaśasavatsarāvṛttisādhyā anantavratādayasteṣvapi na

saṁvatsarādhikaḥ kaścitkālo nirṇetavyo’sti . ataḥ

saṁvatsaramārabhyāvāṁñca eva nirṇetavyāḥ karmāṅakālāḥ . na ca

kālasya karmāṅgatve vivaditavyam sāyaṁ buhoti prātarjahotītiḥ śruteḥ

tattatkarmaṇastāvadapūrvaviṣayatvāt (apūrvajanakatvāt,

prādhānyamabhyugamya tathā ca kālasya guṇatvenānvayaḥ pariśiṣyate

ataeva gargaḥ tithinakṣatravārādi sādhanaṁ puṇyapāpayoḥ .

pradhānaguṇabhāvena svātasthyeṇa na te kṣamāḥ iti .

tasmādaṅgabhūteṣa nirṇeyeṣa kāleṣvavayavitvena

saṁvatsarasyābhyarhitatvādalpavaktavyatayā sūcīkaṭāhanyāyānusāreṇa

ca saeva ādau nirṇīyataitisthitam . sū° si° raṅga° kālavibhāgaścetthaṁ

pradarśitaḥ

lokānāmamakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ . sa dvidhā

sthūlasūkṣmatvānmūrtaścāmūrta ucyate sū° si° . kālo dvidhā tatraikaḥ

kālo’khaṇḍadaṇḍāyamānaḥ śāstrāntarapramāṇasiddhaḥ . lokānāṁ

jīvānāmupalakṣaṇādacetanānāmapi . antakṛdvināśakaḥ . yadyapi

kālasteṣāmutpattisthitikārakastathāpi vināśasyānantatvāt

kālatvapratipādanāya cāntakṛdityuktam .

antakṛdityanenaivotpattisthitikṛdityaktamanyathā nāśakatvāsambhavāt .

ataeva kālaḥ sṛjati bhūtāni kālaḥ saṁharati prajāḥ ityādyuktaṁ

granthāntare . anyo dvitīyaḥ kālaḥ khaṇḍakālaḥ . kalanātmako

jñānaviṣayasvarūpaḥ . jñātuṁśakyaityarthaḥ . sa dvitīyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ

kālo’pi dvidhā bhedadvayātmakaḥ . tadāha sthūlasūkṣmatvāditi

mahattvāṇutvābhyām . mūrtaḥ–iyattāvacchinnaparimāṇaḥ .

amūrtastadbhinnaḥ kālatattva vidbhiḥ kathyate . cakāro hetukrameṇa

mūrtāmūrtakramārthakaḥ . tena mahān mūrtakālo’ṇṛramūrtaḥ kāla

ityarthaḥ . athoktaṁ bhedadvayaṁ svarūpeṇa pradarśayan

prathamabhedaṁ pratipipādayiṣustadavāntarabhedeṣu bhedadvayamāha

raṅganāthaḥ . prāṇādiḥ kathito mūrtastruṭyādyo’mūrtasañjñakaḥ .

ṣaḍabhiḥ prāṇairvināḍī syāt tatṣaṣṭhyā nāḍikā smṛtā sū° si° .

prāṇaḥ svasthasukhāsīnasya śvāsocchāsāntarvartī kālo

daśagurvakṣaroccāryamāṇa ādiryasyaitādṛśaḥ prāṇanāntargato mūrtaḥ

kāla uktaḥ . truṭirādyā yasyaitādṛśaḥ kāla eva

prāṇāntargatastraṭitatparādiko’mūrtasañjñaḥ . athāmūrtasya

mūrtādibhūtasya vyadhahārāyogyatvenāpradhānatayānantaroddiṣṭasya

bheda pratipādanamupekṣya mūrtakālasya vyavahārayogyatvena

pradhānatayā prathamoddiṣṭabhedān vivakṣuḥ prathamaṁ

palaghaṭyāvāha . ṣaḍbhiriti . ṣaḍabhiḥprāṇairasubhiḥ pānīyapalaṁ bhavati

palānāṁ ṣaṣṭhyā caṭikoktā kālatattvajñaiḥ . atha dinamāsādikamāha

raṅga° .

nāḍīṣaṣṭyā tu nākṣatramahorātraṁ prakīrtitam . tattriṁśatā

bhavenmāsaḥ sāvano’rkodayaignathā .

aindavastithibhistadvat saṅkrāntyā saura ucyate .

māsairdvādaśabhirvarṣaṁ divyaṁ tadaharucyate .

surāsurāṇāmanyo’nyamahorātraṁ viparyavāt . tatṣaṣṭiḥ ṣaḍguṇā 360

divyaṁ varṣamāsurameśa ca .

taddvādaśa sahasrāṇi caturyugamudāhṛttam . sūryābdasaṅkhyayā

dvitrisāgarairayutāhataiḥ 4320000 .

sandhyāsandhyāṁśasahitaṁ vijñeyaṁ taccaturyugam . kṛtādīnāṁ

vyavastheyaṁ dharmapādavyavasthāyā . yugasya daśamo

bhāgaścatustridvyekasaṅguṇaḥ . kramāt kṛtayugādīnāṁ, ṣaṣṭhāṁśāḥ

sandhayaḥ svakāḥ .

yugānāṁ saptatiḥ saikā manvantaramihocyate . kṛtābdasaṅkhya

1728000 stasthānte sandhiḥ proktojalaplavaḥ .

sasandhayaste manavaḥ kalpe jñenyāścaturdaśa . kṛtapramāṇaḥ

kalpādau sandhiḥ pañcadaśaḥ smṛtaḥ .

ityaṁ yugasahasreṇa bhūtasahārakārakaḥ . kalpo brāhmamahaḥ

proktaṁ śarvarī tasya tāvatī .

paramāyuḥ śataṁ tasya tayā’horātnasaṅkhyayā . āyuṣordhamitaṁ

tasya śeṣe kalpoyamādimaḥ sū° si° . aharādikālabhedāḥ (ahan) śabde

uktāḥ .

si° śi° tu nimeṣatatparatruṭirūpāḥ sūkṣmāḥ kālāvayavāḥ darśitāḥ

tasya vākyaṁ 1788 pṛ° darśitam . sa ca kālastrividhaḥ

vartamānabhūtabhaviṣyadbhedāt tatra bhūtabhaviṣyat kālāvapi

pratyekaṁ dvidhā adyatanānadyatanabhedāt tadbhedenaiva

lakāraviśeṣaṁ pāṇiniranuśaśāsa .

so’yaṁ kālaḥ ṣaḍindriyavedyaḥ iti mīmāṁsakā manyante na so’sti

pratyayoloke yatra kālo na bhāsate iti teṣāmukteḥ . vedāntinastu tasya

sākṣipratyayabhāsyatvamaṅgīcakruḥ tatra pramāṇaṁ kālamā°

anupadameva darśitam . so’yaṁ kālaḥ

deśavṛttaravyāpyavṛttitāniyāmakaḥ . tathāhi yaḥ padārthaḥ

svādhikaraṇavṛttyabhāvapratiyogī so’vyāpyavṛttiriti bhaṇyate

tattānirvāhakaśca kālodeśaśca . kvaciddeśe sthitasya tādṛśapadārthasya

kālabhedena tatraivādhikaraṇe’bhāvastiṣṭhati yathā jñānāśraye ātmani

suṣuptikāle icchādiviśeṣaguṇāntarakāle ca jñānābhāvaḥ . yathā vā

guṇavati janyadravye utpattikāle guṇābhāvaḥ śyāmale apakve ghaṭe

raktatvābhāvaḥ raktatvasya pākīttaraṁ jāyamānatvāt . kālasattva ca

deśo’pi tathā . yathā ātmani jñānakāle śarārāvacchedena jñānaṁ,

ghaṭādyavacchedena tadabhāvaḥ . tathā vṛrkṣa kapisaṁyogakāle’pi mūle

tadabhāvaḥ . kālena kṛtasambandhaśca kālikasambandhaḥ tena

sambandhena sarveṣu janyabhāveṣu janyabhāvānāṁ vṛttimattā nityeṣu

gu kālikasambandhena na kasyāpi sattvam

nityānuyogikakālikatambanyānupagamāt iti naiyāyikāḥ . tasya ca

pauruṣaṁ daivasampāyā kāle phalati pārthiva! . trayametanmanuvyasya

piṇḍitaṁ syāt phalāvaham ityukteḥ kāryamātre nimittakāraṇatā . yadyapi

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge dṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcaneti śāstrāntareṇa tattatkālānāmeva

yattatkāryotpattau hetutā ‘dhigatā tathāpi yadviśeṣayoḥ

kāryakāraṇabhāvastatsāmānyayorapīti nyāyāt sāmānyataḥ kāryamātraṁ

prati kālasāmānyasya hetutvam . kālaḥ krīḍati gacchatyāyustadapi na

muñcatyāśāvāyuḥ mohamu° . kāle bhavaḥ ṭhañ . kālika kālabhave tri°

samāsapratyayabidhau pratiṣedho vaktavyaḥ bā° ukteḥ

tadantavidhiparibhāṣāyāḥ apravṛtteḥ kālāntaśabdānnāsya pravṛttiḥ tena

tadanta śabdāt khaeva sādhuḥ samānakānīnaḥ prākkālīna ityādi

bhūriprayogāt . si° kau°

samānakālonaprākkālonaśabdayoraprāmāṇikatoktiḥ prauḍhoktireva

udāhṛtavārtikasya jāgarūkatvāt iti gauḍāāhuḥ . pratīcyāstu

kaumudīkāraśraddhāvaśāt ṭhañvidhāyakasūte

kālasāmānyatadviśeṣaparyāyāṇāṁ grahaṇāt samānakālaprākkālayorapi

kālaviśeṣatvena tataḥ ṭhañeva pravṛttirna khasyeti bhāṣyādiprayogastu

ārṣatvāt samādheyaḥ iti manyante . kālena nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ kālika

kālasādhye tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . kartustātkālikī śuddhiriti smṛtiḥ tatra

tatkālaśabdasyaiva ṭhañaḥ prakṛtitvāt tena na pūrvoktavārtikasaṅkocaḥ

ataeva tatra tacchabdasyaivādyacovṛddhiḥ tena nivṛttamityadhikārāt

prakṛtimātrasyaiva grahaṇāt na kālatvena tatraprakṛtitā . kāle sādhuḥ

puṣyan pacyamāno vā aṇ . kāla–kāle sādhau kāle yikaśa māne kāle

pacyamāne ca tri° . atra sūtre kālaviśeṣasyaiva grahaṇaṁ na svarūpasya

tena na tato’ṇ ityanye . kālaḥ prāpto’sya yat . kālya prāptakāle śītādau

tri° kālodevatā’sya kālebhyobhavavat pā° ṭhañ . kālika kāla devatāke

havirādau striyāṁ ṅīp . 15 tattatkarmocitakāle varamekāhutiḥ kāle nākāle

lakṣakoṭayaḥ tri° ta° . akāle’pyatha vā kāle gaṅgāṁ prāpya saridvarām

prā° ta° . kāle kālakṛto naśyet phalabhogyo na naśyati yā° smṛ° .

ardhayāmaśabde 376 pṛ° darśite ravyādivāreṣu kālavelākhye 16

divāniśorardhayāmabhede yātrāyāṁ maraṇaṁ kāle vaidhavyaṁ

pāṇipīḍane . brate brahmabadhaḥ proktaḥ sarvaṁ karma tatastajet jyo°

ta° tasya sarvakarmasu varjyatāmāha 17 sāṁkhyīkte meghāsvye

vivekasākṣātakārāntarāye tuṣṭibhede yathā ādhyātmikyaścatasraḥ

prakṛtyupādānakālabhāgyākhyāḥ . bāhyāviṣayoparamāt pañca, nava

tuṣṭayobhavanti sā° kā0

yā tu pravrajyāpi na sadyonirvāṇadeti saiva kālaparipākamapekṣya

siddhinte vidhāsyati alamuttaptatayā tavetyapadeśe yā tuṣṭiḥ sā kālākhyā

megha (1) ucyate kau° . vivṛtañjaitadasmābhiḥ . pravrajyāmātrasya

vivekakhyātihetutve prabrajyāgrahaṇamātreṇa vivekakhyātyāpattirūpam

upadeśe asattavaprayojakaṁ dūṣaṇam sahakāryantarāpekṣākalpanāt

pariharannupadeśāntaraṁ darśayati na sadyo nirvāṇadeti . sadyaḥ,

grahaṇamātrāt na tu kālarūpasahakāryantarāpekṣaṇāta na nirvāṇadā

vivekakhyātijananadvārā na muktidetyarthaḥ . tathā ca

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge vṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcana iti śāstreṇa kāryamātraṁ prati kālasya sahakāritāyā

anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ ca prasiddhatvāt kālasyaiva taddhetutvamastu

kṛtaṁ dhyānābhyasādineti samuditārthaḥ .

kālasyasādhanatāsādhakaśāstreṇa kṛṣyādeḥ pradhāna phalahetutvaṁ

tatra kālasya sahakāritāmātraṁ pratipāditaṁ na tu tanmātrasya

hetutvamevañca kālasya sādhāraṇakāraṇatvam asādhāraṇakāraṇatvantu

kṛṣyādereva evañca prakṛte’pi vivekakhyātiṁ prati

dhyānābhyāsāderevārādpakārakatvāt asādhāraṇahetutvaṁ, kālasya

sādhāraṇahetutvamityasyāsadudhadeśatva miti bodhyam iti .

varsavācikālaśabdasya striyāṁ janapadā° ni° ṅīṣ . kālī kākālī

kāmadhurā kāśītalavāhino gaṅgā . bidagdha mu° samānapraśnottaram .

18 hiṁsake tri° tataḥ striyāṁ na ṅīṣ . kālāt vaṇṇaścet vārtikokteḥ .

kālānyā si° kau° . kālasyeyam aṇ ṅīp kālasya patnī ṅīṣ vā . kālī kālaśaktau

śivakāntāyāñca strī . adhikaṁ kālīśabde vakṣyate . 19 mṛtyau medi°

sarvasyāgrahaṇānāttasya tathātvam . aśumāṁśca tapastepe

gaṅgānayanakāmyayā . kālaṁ mahāntaṁ nāśaknīt tataḥ kālena

saṁsthitaḥ . dilīpastatsutastadbadaśaktaḥ kālameyikān bhāga° 9 9 2 3 1

kālaṁ mṛtyum śrīdharaḥ .

varṇavācakāt tasya bhāva ityarthe imanic kāliman pu° tal kālatā strī,

tva kālatva na° . kṛṣṇavarṇe . tatra yame upetya muniveśo’tha kālaḥ

provāca rāghavam raghuḥ . yamaparatve 20 dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 21

tatsaṁkhyānvite ca bharaṇyāyamadaivatatvāt tasyāśca

aśvinyādinakṣatracakre dvitīyatvāt lakṣitalakṣaṇayā tatparatvam .

śivaparatve 22 ṣaṭsaṁkhyāyāṁ 23 tadanvate ca śivadaivatārdrāyā

aśvinyādiṣu ṣaṣṭhatvāduktarītyā tathātvam . ṛṇidhanicakraśabde 1428 pṛ°

darśitaṁ ṣaṭkālakāletyādi vākyam udā° kālasya velā ravitaḥ

śarākṣikālānalāgāmbudhayo gajendū jyo° ta° .

candrādigrahāṇāṁ dṛṣṭiyogyatāprāpakakālātmake 24 aṁśabhede ca .

sa ca si° śi° darśito yathā

dasrendavaḥ 12 śaulabhuvaśca 17 śakrā 14 rudrāḥ 11 khacandrā 10

stithayaḥ 15 krameṇa . candrāditaḥ kālalavā niruktāḥ

jñaśukrayorvakragayordvihīnāḥ si° śi° .

candrādīnāmene 12 . 17 . 14 . 11 10 . 15 . kālāṁśā jñeyāḥ .

budhaśukrayostu vakragatayordvihīnā 12 . 8 dvivarjitā jñeyāḥ .

atropapattiḥ . kālāṁśā iti kālātmakā aṁśāḥ ṣaḍbhira śairekā ghaṭikā .

ekasyāṁśasya daśa pānīyapalāni . atraitaduktaṁ bhavati . candrasya kila

dvādaśa 12 kālāṁśāḥ . arkasyāstamayādudayādvā

ghaṭikādvayādhike’ntare candro dṛṣṭiyogyo bhavati . tadūne

tatprabhācchāditatvādadṛśyaḥ . atastasya dvādaśa kālāṁśāḥ . evaṁ

bhaumasya saptadaśa 17 ṣaḍaṁśonāstisro ghaṭikāḥ 2 . 50 ityarthaḥ .

ebamanyeṣāṁ yathāpaṭhitāsteṣāṁ vimbasya sthūlasūkṣmatāvaśāt

nyūnādhikatā . ata eva budhaśukrayorvakragatayorvimbasya

sthūlatvāddvihīnāḥ . atropalabdhireva vāsanā prami0

yatrodayo vāstamayo’vagamyastaddigbhavo dṛkkhacaro raviśca .

astodayāsannadine kadācit sādhyastu paścāt taraṇiḥ saṣaḍbhaḥ si° śi° .

iha kendrabhāgairgrahasyodayo’stamayo vā yasmin dina

āyātastasyāsanne kasmiṁściddine taṁ grahaṁ raviṁ ca sphuṭaṁ kṛtvā

yasyāṁ diśi grahodayo’stamayo vā taddigbhavo dṛggrahaḥ kāryaḥ . yadi

prācyāṁ tadaudayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvodayalagnaṁ sādhyam . yadi ca

pratīcyāṁ tadāstamayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvāstalagnaṁ sādhyamityarthaḥ .

yadā pratīcyāṁ, tadāraviḥ saṣaḍbhaśca kāryaḥ .

idānīmiṣṭakālāṁśānayanamāha prami° .

dṛkkhecarārkāntarajātanāḍyo rasāhatāḥ kālalavāḥ syuriṣṭāḥ si° śi° .

dṛggrahārkayorantaraghaṭikāḥ sādhyāstā rasa 6 hatā iṣṭāḥ kālāṁśā

bhavanti . atha tairudayāstayorgataiṣyāḥ nāḍyaḥ prami° .

uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭāḥ kheṭodayo gamyagatastadā syāt .

ato’nyathā vā’stamayo’vagamyaḥ prokteṣṭakālāṁśaviyogaliptāḥ .

khābhrāṣṭabhū 1800 ghnādyucarodayāptāḥ

kheṭārkabhukyantarabhājitāśca . vakre tu bhuktyaikyahṛtā

avāptāstadantarāle divasā gataiṣyāḥ . tātkālikābhyāṁ ravidṛggrahābhyāṁ

muhuḥ kṛtāste sphuṭatāṁ prayānti si° śi° .

evaṁ ya iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāste proktebhyo yadi svalpā bhavanti tadā

grahasyodayo gamyaḥ . yadyadhikāstadā gata iti veditavyam .

ato’nyathāstamaya iti . atha proktāuktebhyoyadīṣṭāḥ svalpāstadā

grahasyāstamayogatoyadyadhikastadā gamya iti . atha

proktānāmiṣṭakālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstā aṣṭādaśaśatai 1800

rguṇyā dṛggrahākrāntasya rāśeḥ svadeśodayāsubhirbhājyāḥ .

phalakalānāṁ grahārkabhuktyantareṇa vakrage grahe bhuktiyogena

bhāge gṛhīte yallabdhaṁ te gatā eṣyā vādivasā bhavantyudaye

vāstamaye vā . tairdivasaistātkālikau dṛggrahārkau

kṛtvaivamasakṛtkarmaṇā samyak tatkālajñānaṁ bhavati .

atropapattiḥ . iṣṭakālāṁśasādhane lagnavāsanaiva . proktānāṁ

kālāṁśānāmanantarvartī graho dṛśyo bhavati . ato yāvadiṣṭā

nyūnāstāvadadṛśyaḥ . udaye vilokyamāne udeṣyati . aste

bilokyamāne’staṁ gata ityarthājjñāyate . iṣṭā yadyadhikāstadā

proktebhyo vilokyamāne’staṁgate bahirbhūtādgraho’dṛśya udaye

vilokyamāna uditaḥ astaṁ yāsyatītyarthājjñāyate . atha teṣāṁ

prokteṣṭānāṁ kālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstāsāṁ kṣetraliptīnāṁ

karaṇāyānupātaḥ . yāvatyaḥ kālakalāstāvanta evāsavo bhavanti . atha

yadi dṛggrahodayāsubhiraṣṭādaśaśatāni 1800 kṣetraliptā labhyante tadā

tadantarakalāsubhiḥ kimiti . phalaṁ kṣaitraliptāḥ . tā

grahārkabhuktyantareṇa bhājyāḥ . bhuktyantaraṁ hi

kṣetraliptāntarātmakamataḥ sajātīyakaraṇāya kṣetraliptīkaraṇam .

bhuktyantareṇaiko divaso labhyata iti yuktamuktam . vakre tu bhuktiyoga

eva bhuktyantaram . dūrāntare sthūlakālo bhavatītyasakṛtkarma

sūkṣmārtham . atra viśeṣamāha . prami0

prāgdṛggarhaścedadhiko raveḥ syādūno’tha vā paścimadṛggrahaśca .

prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhiḥ sādhyastadānīṁ divasāgataiṣyāḥ . tathā

yadīṣṭakālāṁśāḥ proktebhyo’bhyadhikāstadā . vyatyayaścagataiṣyatve

jñeyo’hnāṁ sudhiyā khalu si° śi0

yadi prāgdṛggraho raveradhiko bhavati . atha vā paścimadṛggraho

nyūno bhavati tadāye iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāsteṣāṁ proktānāṁ ca

yogakalābhirdivasāḥ sādhyāḥ . nāntarakalābhiḥ tathā

prāgdṛggrahe’rkādadhike sati paścāddṛggrahe vā nyūne ya iṣṭakālāṁśā

āgatāste ca yadi proktebhyo’dhikāntarāḥ tadā prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ

kalābhirye divasāḥ sādhitāsteṣāṁ divasānāṁ gataiṣyatve viparyayojñeyaḥ

.

atropapattiḥ . yo grahaḥprācyāmudeti pratitiṣṭhati vā asau raverūnaḥ

san praścimāyām adhikaḥ san prācyāṁ diśi proktakālāṁśairūnaḥ san

dṛśyatāmeti . tāvadbhireva paścimā yāmadhikaḥsan . ato raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ

prācyāṁ proktakālāṁśāḥ pratīcyāmagrataḥ . prācyāmūne grahe ya

iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ . ataḥ pṛṣṭhagataireva

proktakālāṁśaisteṣāmantaraṁ kartuṁ yujyate . atha prācyāṁ

raveradhike dṛggrahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveragrato bhavanti

. ato’gragatānāṁ pṛṣṭhagatānāñca kālāṁśānāṁ yoge kṛtesatyantaraṁ

kṛtaṁ bhavati tathā uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭā iti

yadgatagamyalakṣaṇamuktaṁ tat sajātīyānāmeva . yadā punareke

pṛṣṭhagatā eke’gragatāstadā tadgatagamyalakṣaṇaṁ vyatyayena bhavati

. ata uktaṁ vyatyayaśca gataiṣyatva ityādi . atra sudhiyeti

viśeṣaṇādubuddhimataidadanuktamapi jñāyate prami° . vyavahāre

vādiprativādinoḥ pratijñātārthasāghanāya rājñādeye 25 avasararūpe

samayabhede ca tatkālaviśeṣaḥ smṛtau darśito yathā pratyarthī labhate

kālaṁ tryahaṁ saptāhameva ca . arthī tu prārthayan kālaṁ tatkṣaṇādeva

hīyate . pratyarthino’pi kvacidviṣayena kālo deyaḥ

kvaciccārthipratyarthinoricchayā kālodeyaḥ yathāha yājña°

sāhasasteyapāruṣyago’bhiśāpātyaye striyām . vivādayet sadyaeva

kālo’nyatrecchayā smṛtaḥ .

samayarūpakālasya vaiśeṣikamate

saṁyogavibhāgapṛthaktvasaṁkhyāparimāṇarūpā pañca guṇāḥ . bhīmo

bhīmasenavat uttarapadalopaḥ . kāladaṇḍarūpe 26 yoge kāladaṇḍaśabde

udā° . vāraviśeṣe digbhedena jyotiṣokte yātrādau niṣiddhe 27 yogabhede

. sa ca yogaḥ mu° ci° uktaḥ . kauverīto vaiparītyena kālo’rkādye vāre

sammukhe tasya pāśaḥ . rātrāvetau vaiparītyena gamyau yātrā yuddhe

saṁmukhau varjanīyau . ayamaryaḥ . ravāvuttarasyāṁ kālaḥ, some

vāyavyāṁ, bhaume paścimāyām, budhe nairṛtyām, gurau dakṣiṇasyām,

śukre āgneyyāṁ, śanau pūrvasyām . ravāvuttarataḥ kālaḥ some

vāyavyabhāgake . bhaume tu paścime bhāge budhe nairṛtabhāgake . jīve

ca yāmyadigbhāge śukre cāgneyakoṇake . śanau tu pūrvadigbhāge

kālacakraṁ prakīrtitam . svarodaye yatrasthastatrakālaḥ syāt pāśastasya

tu sammukhaḥ . dakṣiṇasthaḥ śubhaḥ kālaḥ pāśo vāmadigāśrayaḥ .

yātrāyāṁ samare śreṣṭhastato’nyatra na śobhavaḥ . rātrau ca

vaiparītyena yathā ravau rātrau dakṣiṇasyāṁ kālaḥ uttarasyāṁ pāśa

ityādikrameṇetyūhyam . 28 kalāye (maṭara) śimbībhede, vaija° .

vikasatkalāyakusumam māghavyā° kālakusumamiti malli°

dhruvanāmakavasoḥ 29 putrabhede pu° . dhruvasya putro bhagavān kālo

lokaprakālanaḥ harivaṁ° 3 a° .

kāṣāya n. a brown-red cloth or garment

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kāṣāya a. (yī f.) [kaṣāyeṇa raktaṁ aṇ] Red, dyed of a reddish colour;

kāṣāyavasanādhavā Ak. –yaṁ A red cloth or garment; ime kāṣāye gṛhīte

M. 5; R. 15. 77; na kāṣāyairbhavedyatiḥ ‘it is not the hood that makes a

monk’.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kāṣāya (von kaṣāya) adj. f. ī “roth” (in einer best. Nüance) “gefärbt”:

subst. “ein rothes Gewand” P. 4, 2, 1, Sch. VOP. 6, 14. yadi vāsāṁsi

vasīratraktāni vasīrankāṣāyaṁ brāhmaṇo māñjiṣṭhaṁ kṣattriyo hāridraṁ

vaiśyaḥ ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 19. KAUŚ. 57. gate pitari sarvāṇi

saṁnyasyābharaṇāni sā. jagṛhe valkalānyeva vastraṁ kāṣāyameva ca..

SĀV. 3, 18. kāṣāyavasanā N. 24, 9. MBH. 3. 14805. kāṣāyavasanādhavā

AK. 2, 6, 1, 17. H. 531. -vāsas MBH. 12, 566. 13, 4369. HARIV. 11142.

kāśāyapaṭa (sic) DHŪRTAS. 70, 4. cīrakāṣāyavāsinī MBH. 3, 8588. 1,

5560. sūkṣmakāṣāyasaṁvīta R. 3, 52, 9. jīrṇakāṣāyadhāraṇa YĀJÑ. 3,

157. kāṣāyī makṣikā “eine bes. Biene” oder “Wespe” SUŚR. 2, 290, 17.

kāṣāya “ein rothes Gewand” MBH. 2, 675 und 12, 5292 (Spr. 3615) nach

der Lesart der ed. Bomb. (kaṣāya ed. Calc.). Spr. 3661. Z. 3 lies nraktāni

st. traktāni.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kāṣāya kāṣāya, i. e. kaṣāya + a, adj., f. yī.

1. Red, Sāv. 3, 18.

2. s. A red cloth, Rām. 3, 52, 9.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kāṣāya a. dyed brown-red; f. ī a kind of wasp or bee; n. a brown-red

garment.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kāṣāya kāṣāya, a. brownish; n. brownred garment;

ī, f. kind of bee or wasp.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kāṣāya tri° kaṣāyeṇa raktaḥ aṇ . kaṣāyeṇa rakte 1 vastrādau yadi vāsāṁsi

bamīran raktāni vasīran kāṣāyaṁ brāhmaṇo, māñjiṣṭhaṁ kṣatriyo,

hāridraṁ vaiśyaḥ āśva° śrau° 1, 19, 9 . kātyāyanyardhavṛddhā yā

kāṣāyavasanā’dhavā amaraḥ . striyāṁ ṅīp . tadantasya

raktārthāṇantatvāt ekārthaviśeṣyastrīliṅge śabde pare puṁvat . kāṣā yī

kanthā yasya kāṣāyakanthaḥ

kiṁkiraḥ

(1) A horse.

(2) The(Indian) cuckoo.

(3) A large black bee.

(4) N. of Cupid, the god of love.

(5) The red colour. –raṁ The frontal sinus of an elephant. –rā Blood.

kiyāhaḥ A horse of a red or bay colour.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kiyāhaḥ puṁ, (kiyān raktavarṇaḥ hayaḥ . pṛṣodarāditvāt nipātanāt sādhuḥ

.) raktavarṇaghoṭakaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ ..

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kīṭajā strī, (kīṭebhyo jāyate . jan + ḍaḥ . ṭāp .) lākṣā . iti ratnamālā ..

(lākṣāśabde ‘syā guṇādikaṁ jñeyam .. kīṭasambhave, tri, . yathā

mahābhārate 2 . 5 . 23 .

aurṇañca rāṅkavañcaiva paṭṭajaṁ kīṭajantathā ..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kīṭajā strī° kīṭebhyo jāyate jana–ḍa . 1 jatuni lākṣāyām ratnamālā° 2

kīṭajātamātre tri° .

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṛmilikā Linen cloth dyed with red colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṛmilikā (von kṛmila) f. “roth gefärbter” (vgl. kṛmi 1,b) “leinener Zeug”

VYUTP. 212.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṛṣṇarakta (kṛṣṇa + rakta) adj. “dunkelroth” H. 1242.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṛṣṇarakta pu° varṇovarṇeneti pā° sa° . 1 kālalohitavarṇe (vemugīraṅ) 2

tadvati tri° .

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṛṣṇalohita (kṛṣṇa + lo-) adj. “dunkelroth, purpurn” AK. 1, 1, 4, 25.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṛṣṇalohita pu° kṛṣṇaḥ san lohitaḥ varṇovarṇeneti pā° sa° . 1

raktakālamiśritavarṇe dhūmale (vegunīraṅa) . 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ .

kokanada “koka-nada” m. N. of an attendant in Skanda’s retinue f. and

2576

kokanada “koka-nada” n. the flower of the red water-lily

kokanada “koka-nada” n. “-cchavi” m. the colour of the red lotus

kokanada “koka-nada” n. (mfn.) of the colour of the red lotus

kokanada “koka-nada” &c. see “koka”.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kokanada 1) m. pl. N. pr. eines Volkes MBH. 2, 1026. Z. f. d. K. d. M. II,

50. SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 330 (100). — 2) n. “der rothe Lotus” AK. 1, 2,

3, 41. H. 1163. an. 4, 139. MED. d. 47. “die rothe Wasserlilie” H. an.

MED. kumudaiḥ puṇḍarīkaiśca tathā kokanadotpalaiḥ MBH. 3, 11578. 14,

1346. nīlanalinābhamapi tanvi tava locanaṁ dhārayati kokanadarūpam

GĪT. 10, 5. vyākośakokanadatā ŚIŚ. 4, 46. kokanadacchavi m. und adj.

“die Farbe des rothen Lotus” und “von der Farbe d. r. L.” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24.

H. 1242. Nach H. an. hat das blosse kokanada dieselbe Bedeutung. —

Zerlegt sich scheinbar in koka + nada.

kokanada 2) “die Blüthe”, nicht die Pflanze, welche kokanadinī heisst. —

3) m. N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2562. fg. 2576.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kokanada 1 I A Kṣatriya King of ancient India. It is mentioned in

Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, that at the time of the regional conquest of

Arjuna, this King fell at his feet and sought refuge.

kokanada 2 II A warrior of Skanda. (M.B. Sabhā Parva, Chapter 27).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kokanada kokanadaa,

I. n. The red lotus, Gīt. 10, 5.

II. m. pl. The name of a people, MBh. 2, 1026.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kokanada koka-nada, n. red lotus (flower);

-nadinī, f. red lotus (plant).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kokanada na° kokān cakravākān nadati nādayati antarbhūtaṇyarthe

nada–ac . 1 raktakanude, 2 raktapadme ca . vyākośakokanadatāṁ

dadhate nalinyaḥ māghaḥ . sarasaḥ kokanadabhramādiva naipa0

tvac”, the 4th of the 7 membranes with which an embryo is covered

tāmra mf (“ī”) n. made of copper

tāmra m. a kind of leprosy with large red spots, Karmavip.

tāmra m. N. of a son of Naraka Bhauma

tāmra m. = “-dvīpa”

tāmra n. = “-tā”

tāmra n. copper &c.

tāmra n. a coppery receptacle

tāmra n. = “-dru” (cf.

tāmra mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. Rubia Munjista

tāmra n. a red kind of Abrus

tāmra n. a kind of pepper

tāmra n. N. of a daughter of Daksha (one of the wives of Kaśyapa and

mother of various birds)

tāmra n. N. of a river

tāmra mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. a kind of clepsydra (cf. “-mra-pātra”)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tāmra a. [tam-rak dīrghaḥ Uṇ. 2. 16]

(1) Made of copper.

(2) Of a coppery red colour, red; udeti savitā tāmrastāmra evāstameti

ca. –mraḥ A kind of leprosy with red spots. –mraṁ

(1) Copper.

(2) A dark or coppery red. –mrī A copper pot having a small hole at

the bottom used in measuring time by placing it in a watervessel.

— Comp.

–akṣaḥ 1. a crow. –2. the (Indian) cuckoo.

–ardhaḥ bellmetal.

–aśman m. a kind of jewel (padmarāga). –ābhaṁ red sandal

(raktacaṁdana). –upajīvin m. a coppersmith.

–oṣṭhaḥ (forming tāmroṣṭha or tāmrauṣṭha) a red or cherry lip;

Ku. 1. 44.

–kāraḥ, –kuṭṭaḥ a brazier, coppersmith.

–kṛmiḥ. a kind of red insect (iṁdragopa). –2. the lady bird. –3.

cochineal.

–garbha sulphate of copper.

–cūḍaḥ a cock.

–trapujaṁ brass.

–druḥ the red sandalwood.

–dvīpaḥ the island of Ceylon.

–dhātuḥ red chalk.

–paṭṭaḥ, –patraṁ, a copper-plate on which grants of land were

frequently inscribed; Y. 1. 319.

–parṇī N. of a river rising in Malaya, celebrated for its pearls; R. 4.

50.

–pallavaḥ the Aśoka tree.

–phalakaṁ a copper-plate.

–mukha a. copper-faced. (

–khaḥ) a Frank or European.

–varṇī the blossom of sesamum.

–liptaḥ N. of a country. (

–ptāḥ pl.) its people or rulers.

–vṛkṣaḥ a species of sandal.

–śikhin m. a cock.

–sārakaḥ a sort of Khadira. (

–kaṁ) red sandal-wood.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

tāmra UṆĀDIS. 2, 16. 1) adj. f. ā “dunkelroth, kupferroth” NAIGH. 3, 7.

TRIK. 3, 3, 352. H. an. 2, 428. MED. r. 44. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. tāmra,

aruṇa (in TRIK. und MED. diesem gleichgesetzt) VS. 16, 6. 39. -nakhī

MBH. 1, 3295. -śīrṣa (krauñca) R. 1, 2, 15. -locana 2, 34, 13. PAÑCAT.

220, 1. tāmrāsya MBH. 4, 165. tāmroṣṭha KUMĀRAS. 1, 45. MĀRK. P. 23,

41. KATHĀS. 16, 81. -mūrdhaja R. 3, 23, 16. BHĀG. P. 4, 14, 44. – INDR.

5, 12. R. 3, 58, 22. fg. SUŚR. 1, 127, 2. 200, 16. 268, 16. 295, 16. 2, 307,

7. ŚĀK. 69. KUMĀRAS. 3, 65. kṛṣṇa- SŪRYAS. 6, 23. f. RAGH. 2, 15.

tāmrā (tvak) heisst “die vierte unter den sieben Häuten”, die nach SUŚR.

am entstehenden Embryo sich bilden, 1, 326, 7. Vgl. pratāmra. — 2) m. a)

“eine Art Aussatz mit kupferrothen Flecken” KARMAVIPĀKA im ŚKDR. —

b) N. pr. a) eines Mannes; vgl. tāmrāyaṇa. = b) einer Insel: dvīpaṁ

tāmrāhvayam MBH. 2, 1172; vgl. tāmradvīpa und LIA. I, 570, N. 1. — 3) f.

ā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = mañjiṣṭhā “Rubia Munjista Roxb.”

NIGH. PR. — b) = raktaguñjā “Abrus precatorius Lin.” NIGH. PR. — g) =

saiṁhalī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Unter tāmravallī erscheint das Wort im ŚKDR.

nach ders. Aut. auch als Synonym von dieser Pflanze. — b) N. pr. einer

Tochter Daksha’s, einer der Gemahlinnen Kaśyapa’s und Mutter

verschiedener Vögel, MBH. 1, 2620. HARIV. 170. 221. fg. R. 3, 20, 12. 18.

VP. 122. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 25. 27. — c) N. pr. eines Flusses MBH. 3, 12909.

6, 335. VP. 183. — 4) n. a) “dunkele Röthe” H. an. MED. ŚABDAR. im

ŚKDR. — b) “Kupfer” TRIK. 3, 3, 352. H. 1039. H. an. MED. VIŚVA. KAUŚ.

16. M. 5, 114. 8, 131. 11, 167. HARIV. 16265. R. 1, 38, 20. 4, 44, 23.

SUŚR. 1, 228, 1. 2, 67, 9. 336, 17. PAÑCAT. 241, 11. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6,

13. 47, 46. 53, 71. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 386. PRAB. 22, 18. Sch. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 1,

3, 12. tāmralohaiḥ MBH. 2, 2091. — c) “dunkelrothes Sandelholz” WILS.

-mṛṣṭānulepin R. 2, 83, 17.

tāmra (von 1. tāmra “Kupfer”) 1) adj. f. ī “kupfern” JAMA bei KULL. zu M.

6, 53. R. 3, 21, 17. SUŚR. 1, 99, 5. 171, 9. f. BHAVIṢYOTTARA-P. in

ZdmG.6, 94, 3. — 2) f. ī “ein Gefäss aus Kupfer mit einer Oeffnung im

Boden, welches in Wasser gestellt sich allmählich füllt und auf diese

Weise zur Messung der Zeit dient” (vgl. tāmrapātra), TRIK. 1, 1, 121.

tāmra 1) ā- LA. (II) 90, 4. — 2) b) a) ein Sohn des Naraka Bhauma BHĀG.

P. 10, 59, 12. — b) N. pr. einer Oertlichkeit Verz. d.Oxf. H. 338,b,36. — 4)

c) der Schol. des R.: gorocanakuṅkumādisaṁbandhastāmravarṇaṁ

mṛṣṭaṁ saṁpūrṇamanulepo ‘nulepanaṁ yeṣāṁ te.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

tāmra A demon, son of Murāsura. The demon Mura had seven children

named Tāmra, Antarīkṣa, Śravaṇa, Vasu, Vibhāvasu, Nabhasvān and

Aruṇa. Of these Tāmra was Mahiṣāsura’s minister for a long time. The

Chief Minister of Mahiṣāsura was Asilomā; Defence Minister, Cikṣura;

Foreign minister, Viḍāla and Finance minister, Tāmra. Udarka was the

Commander-in-chief and Bāṣkala, Trinetra and Kālabandhaka were

Cabinet Ministers. He was killed along with his father Mura, by Śrī Kṛṣṇa.

(10th Skandha Bhāgavata and 5th Skandha, Devī Bhāgavata).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

tāmra tāmra (vb. tam, cf. tamas),

I. adj.

1. f. rā, Of a coppery-red colour, Rām. 2, 34, 13.

2. f. rī, Of copper, Rām. 3, 21, 17.

II. n.

1. Copper, Man. 5, 114.

2. A sort of sandal, Rām. 2, 83, 17.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

tāmra [1] a. copper-coloured, dark-red (abstr. -tā f., -tva n.); m. a kind of

leprosy; n. copper or a copper vessel.

tāmra f. ī2 made of copper; f. ī a kind of clepsydra.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

tāmra tāmra, a. copper-coloured, dark red; m. eruption with dark red

spots; n. copper; a. (a) of cooper;

ī, f. kind of water-clock (a copper vessel having an orifice in the

bottom, which when placed in water, gradually fills).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

tāmra na° tama–rak dīrghaḥ . 1 dhātubhede (tāṁmā) amaraḥ 2

kuṣṭhabhede karmavipākaḥ . 3 raktavarṇe hemaca° . 4 tadvati tri° .

dhātubhedasyotpattikāraṇaguṇādi bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā atha tāmrasya

utpattirnāmalakṣaṇaguṇāśca . śukraṁ yat kārtikeyasya patitaṁ

dharaṇītale . tasmāttāmraṁ samutpannamidamāhuḥ purāvidaḥ .

tāmramaunduvaraṁ śulvamudumbaramapi smṛtam . ravipriyaṁ

mlecchamukhaṁ sūryaparyāyanāmakam . japākusumasaṅkāśaṁ

snigdhaṁ mṛdudhanakṣamam . lohanāgoñjhitaṁ tāmraṁ māraṇāya

praśasyate . kṛṣṇaṁ rūkṣamatistabdhaṁ śvetañcāpi ghanāsaham .

lohanāgayutañceti śulvaṁ duṣṭaṁ prakīrtitam . eko doṣo viṣe tāmre

tvasabhyagmārite punaḥ . dāhaḥ svedo rucirmūrchā kledo reko

vamirbhramaḥ (rekaḥ virekaḥ) tasya māraṇavidhistatrokto yathā

sūkṣmāṇi tāmrapatrāṇi kṛtvā saṁsvedayedbudhaḥ . vāsaratrayamamlena

tataḥ khāte viniḥkṣipet . pādāṁśaṁ sūtakaṁ dattvā yāmamamlena

mardayet . tata uddhṛtya patrāṇi lepayeddviguṇena ca .

gandhakenāmlaveṣṭena tasya kuryācca golakam . tataḥ piṣṭvā ca

maunākṣīṁ cāṅgerīṁ vā punarnavām (cāṅgerī

catuṣpatrāmlālonikābhedaḥ .) tatkalkena bahirgolaṁ

lepayeddvyaṅgulonmitam . dhṛtvā tadgolakaṁ bhāṇḍe sarāveṇa ca

rodhayet . vālukābhiḥ prapūryātha vibhūti lavaṇāmbubhiḥ . dattvā

bhāṇḍamukhe mudrāṁ tataścūllyāṁ vipācayet . kramavṛddhyāgninā

samyagyāvadyāmacatuṣṭayam . svāṅgaśītaṁ samuddhṛtya

mardavecchūraṇadravaiḥ . yāmaikaṁ golakaṁ tacca

niḥkṣipecchūraṇodare . mṛdā lepastu kartavyaḥ sarvato’ṅguṣṭhamātrakaḥ

. pācyaṁ gajapuṭe kṣiptaṁ mṛtaṁ bhavati niścitam . vamanaṁ ca

virekaṁ ca bhramaṁ śvāsamathārucim . vidāhaṁ svedamutkledaṁ na

karoti kadācana . evaṁ māritasya tāmrasya guṇā tāmraṁ kaṣāyaṁ

madhuraṁ ca tiktamamlañca pāke kaṭu sārakañca . pittāpahaṁ

śleṣmaharañca śītaṁ tadroṣaṇaṁ syāllaghu lekhanañca .

pāṇḍūdarārśojvara kuṣṭhakāsaśvāsakṣayān pīnasamamlapittam . śothaṁ

kṛmiṁ śūlamapākaroti prāhurbudhā vṛṁhaṇamalpametat . tāmramamlena

śuddhyati manuḥ . tāmrapatraśabde mojananiṣedhaḥ

ghṛtetaroddhṛtasāragavyabhojananiṣedhaśca vakṣyate . raktavarṇaviśiṣṭe

tāmrauṣṭhaparyastarucaḥ smitasya tapasvine tāmrarucā kareṇa kumā°

pracakrame pallavarāgatāmrā raghuḥ . 5 dvīpabhede pu° . svārthe ka .

tatrārthe amaraḥ .

tāmraka n. copper civ, 15

tāmraka n. Abrus precatorius

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

tāmraka (von 1. tāmra) 1) n. “Kupfer” AK. 2, 9, 97. TRIK. 2, 9, 32.

HĀR.111. YĀJÑ. 1, 296. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 15. — 2) f. tāmrikā a) =

tāmrī (s. u. 2. tāmra) BHŪRIPR. bei Wils. — b) “Abrus precatorius” (s.

guñjā) RĀGAN. im ŚKDR. NIGH. PR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

tāmraka tāmra + ka, n. Copper, Yājñ. 1, 296.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

tāmraka tāmra-ka, n. copper;

-kuṭṭa, m. copper-smith: ī, f.;

-cūḍa, a. having a red coxcomb; m. cock; N.: -yuddha, n. cock-fight;

-tā, f., -tva, n. copper-colour;

-dvīpa, m. the island of Ceylon;

-dhātu, m. red chalk;

-paṭṭa, m. copper-plate (for grants);

-parṇī, f. N. of a river (rising in the Malaya and celebrated for its

pearls);

-pātra, n. copper vessel;

-ma-ya, a. (ī) made of copper, coppery;

-lipta, m. pl. N. of a people: ā (?), ī, f. their capital on the western

mouth of the Ganges;

-varṇa, a. copper-colored;

-śāsana, n. copper-plate edict.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

tāmrakili m. “ein kleiner Wurm von rother Farbe” BHŪRIPR. im ŚKDR. —

kili soll angeblich “Wurm” bedeuten; vgl. tāmrakṛmi.

darśana ifc. seeing, looking at (see “tulya-, deva-, sama-“.)

mf (“ī”) n. “knowing”, see “dharma-”

mf (“ī”) n. exhibiting, teaching

darśana n. seeing, observing, looking, noticing, observation, perception

&c.

darśana n. ocular perception

darśana n. the eye-sight, vi, 17

darśana n. inspection, examination 1, 328 5460

darśana n. visiting

darśana n. audience, meeting (with gen. ; instr. with or without “saha” ;

in comp. )

darśana n. experiencing

darśana n. foreseeing

darśana n. contemplating

darśana n. apprehension, judgement &c.

darśana n. opinion

darśana n. intention (cf. “pāpa-“)

darśana n. view, doctrine, philosophical system (6 in number, viz.

[Pūrva-] Mīmāṁsā by by ; Nyāya by Gotama by Kaṇāda Sāṁkhya by ;

Yoga by &c.

darśana n. the eye

darśana n. the becoming visible or known, presence

darśana n. iv &c.

darśana n. appearance (before the judge)

darśana n. the being mentioned (in any authoritative text) śr. i, xxvi

darśana n. a vision, dream 1285

darśana ifc. appearance, aspect, semblance ( ii, 3; xii, 18 and 44)

mf (“ī”) n. colour

mf (“ī”) n. showing (cf. “danta-“)

mf (“ī”) n. a sacrifice

darśana mf (“ī”) n. = “dharma”

darśana mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. Durgā 10238

mf (“ī”) n. N. of an insect

darśana mf (“ī”) n. cf. “a-, su-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

darśana a. [dṛś-lyuṭ]

(1) Seeing, looking at, (at the end of comp.); deva-, dharma-, &c.

(2) Showing, exhibiting.

(3) Demonstrating, teaching. –naṁ

(1) Looking at, seeing, observing; R. 3. 41.

(2) Knowing, understanding, perceiving, foreseeing; R. 8. 72.

(3) Sight, vision; ciṁtājaḍaṁ darśanaṁ S. 4. 5.

(4) The eye.

(5) Inspection, examination.

(6) Showing, displaying, exhibition.

(7) Becoming visible.

(8) Visiting, paying a visit, a visit; devadarśanaṁ.

(9) (Hence) Going into the presence of, audience; mārīcaste

darśanaṁ vitarati S. 7; rājadarśanaṁ me kāraya &c. (10) Colour, aspect,

appearance, semblance; Bg. 11. 10; R. 3. 57.

(11) Appearance, producing (in court); Ms. 8. 158, 160.

(12) A vision, dream.

(13) Discernment, understanding, intellect.

(14) Judgment, apprehension.

(15) Religious knowledge.

(16) A doctrine or theory prescribed in a system.

(17) A system of philosophy; as in sarvadarśanasaṁgraha.

(18) A mirror.

(19) Virtue, moral merit. (20) Opinion.

(21) Intention.

(22) Demonstration.

(23) A sacrifice.

— Comp.

–īpsu a. anxious to see.

–ujjvalā the great white jasmine.

–pathaḥ the range of sight or vision, horizon; mama

darśanapathamavatīrṇaḥ S. 3 ‘crossed my sight’.

–pratibhūḥ, –prātibhāvyaṁ a bail or surety for appearance.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

darśana (von darś) 1) adj. “sehend, blickend” P. 5, 2, 6. Am Ende eines

comp.: tulya-, sama- s. u. dd. Ww. deva- “die Götter sehend” so v. a.

“besuchend, mit ihnen verkehrend”, Beiw. Nārada’s MBH. 13, 3203. 3254.

BHĀG. P. 2, 8, 1 (BURN.: “doue de la vue divine).” maithilīdarśanīnām (v.

l. -darśinīnām) – aṅganānām “hinschauend nach” RAGH. 11, 93. dharma-

“sehend, kennend” MBH. 13, 3254. bhāgavatadharma- BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 11

(BURN.: “lehrend).” Mit caus. Bed. “zeigend, angebend, lehrend”:

hetubhirmokṣadarśanaiḥ MBH. 1, 583 (vgl. mokṣadarśibhiḥ 522).

(śāstram) parokṣārthasya darśanam (v. l. darśakam) HIT. Pr. 9. darśanī

als Beiw. der Durgā HARIV. 10238 viell. “Wegweiserin, Führerin” (vgl.

darśayitar). — 2) n. proparox. a) “das Sehen, Erblicken, Wahrnehmen;

das Sichtbarwerden oder -sein, zum-Vorschein Kommen”: paśuṁ na

naṣṭamiva darśanāya viṣṇāpvaṁ dadathurviśvakāya ṚV. 1, 116, 23.

darśanena śravaṇena matyā vijñānenedaṁ sarvaṁ viditam ŚAT. BR. 14,

5, 4, 5. dūrācchravaṇāni darśanāni cāsya bhavanti “Wahrnehmungen

durch das Auge” SUŚR. 2, 158, 10. yantreṇotpīḍito doṣo nihanyādāśu

darśanam “Sehkraft” 343, 4. etacchrutvā vacastasya pratyakṣamiva

darśanam MBH. 13, 961. adya taṁ draṣṭumicchāvaḥ putraṁ

paścimadarśanam DAŚ. 2, 25. na tvekaḥ ko ‘pi

tāvatkṛtakanakapurīdarśano labhyate sma “der die goldene Stadt gesehen

hätte” KATHĀS. 24, 232. durlabhadarśanā “die man schwer zu Gesicht

bekommt” R. 1, 17, 23. darśanenaiva bhavatīnām (obj.) puraskṛto ‘smi

ŚĀK. 18, 18. mṛgasya (subj.) prathamadarśanadine HIT. 20, 18.

pravṛttāvupalabdhāyāṁ tasyāḥ saṁpātidarśanāt “durch das Erblicken,

das Zusammentreffen mit” S. RAGH. 12, 60. tapasvidarśanocite pradeśe

“zum Empfange der Einsiedler” ŚĀK. 61, 13. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 43.

samājotsava- “das Sehen, Besuchen von Gesellschaften und Festen”

YĀJÑ. 1, 84. puṇya- “das Besuchen heiliger Orte” ŚKDR. yayuḥ

svāmikumārasya darśane dakṣiṇāpatham “zu sehen” so v. a. “zu

verehren” KATHĀS. 3, 8. — duḥsvapna- ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 5, 5. R. 5, 27, 8.

MĀRK. P. 31, 22. ā nakṣatradarśanāt ĀŚV. GṚHY. 3, 7. ārkadarśanāt M. 2,

101. ārtavadarśane 4, 40. abhradarśane 104. ā pūyadarśanāt SUŚR. 1,

15, 9. vyādhi- 82, 14. sirāṇāṁ darśanaṁ lalāṭe 118, 3. aniṣṭadarśanaṁ

jātam HIT. 9, 7. bhāryādarśane “wenn die Frau sichtbar ist, in Gegenwart

der Frau” YĀJÑ. 1, 131. vikreturdarśanāt “dadurch, dass der Verkäufer

zum Vorschein kommt, offenbar wird” 2, 170.

nityādityadarśanodakasecanena dūṣiteyaṁ bhūmiḥ “durch das beständige

Sichtbarsein, Daraufscheinen der Sonne” MṚCCH. 47, 5. brahma- MBH.

13, 4104. BHĀG. P. 1, 2, 24. 3, 33. ko ‘yaṁ mama darśane sthitaḥ MBH.

4, 235. tatsarvathā dūre pariharaṇīyamasya darśanam PRAB. 46, 6.

DHŪRTAS. 70, 13. saṁprāpto darśanaṁ me R. 1, 47, 22. punarna

darśanamupaiti puruṣasya SĀṁKHYAK. 61. darśanamāyāti VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 3, 12. yadā vrajeddarśanamastameti vā 9, 36. āhūta iva me śīghraṁ

darśanaṁ yāti cetasi BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 34. dehi sundari darśanaṁ mama

“zeige dich mir” GĪT. 3, 9. tato ‘ntaḥ prabhuṇā tena skandena mama

darśanam. dattam KATHĀS. 7, 9. anyedyuratha bhūpena sa

bahirdattadarśanaḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 63. mārīcaste darśanaṁ vitarati

“gewährt dir seinen Anblick, ist bereit dich zu empfangen” ŚĀK. 108, 18.

dakṣiṇādhipatinā saha darśanaṁ saṁjātam “fand eine Zusammenkunft

statt” VET. 35, 11. 28, 15. tasya rājakumārasya padmāvatyā (ohne

saha!) darśanaṁ saṁjātam 10, 20. pratyahaṁ darśanaṁ karoti “sieht

ihn, besucht ihn jeden Tag” 2, 8. tataḥ saṁdhivigrahakeṇa sahānusarai

rājño darśanaṁ kāritam “wurde eine Zusammenkunft mit – veranstaltet”

20, 6. “das Erscheinen vor Gericht”: yo yasya

pratibhūstiṣṭheddarśanāyeha mānavaḥ M. 8, 158. darśanaprātibhāvya

160. -pratibhū YĀJÑ. 2, 54. 53. rājā rahasi dūṣyaṁ hi

darśanāyopamantrayet KĀM. NĪTIS. 6, 11. “das Vorkommen” (in einem

System oder Buch), “das Erwahntsein”, namentl. in kanonischen Büchern:

tathā hi darśanam VEDĀNTASŪTRA 1, 25. KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 1, 8. 19. 2, 9. 15.

svādhyāyadarśanāt 26, 7, 58. LĀṬY. 6, 1, 4. 11. 14. 9, 6, 19.

śāstradarśanāt “nach der Art, wie in den Ś. davon gesprochen wird, den

heiligen Vorschriften gemäss” MBH. 14, 2700; vgl. śāstrato dṛṣṭvā R. 1,

13, 7. śāstradṛṣṭamāha MĀLAV. 9, 13. — “das Besehen, Besichtigen, in-

Augenschein-Nehmen”: balānāṁ darśanaṁ kṛtvā YĀJÑ. 1, 328. HARIV.

5460. “das Sehen” so v. a. “Erfahren, Theilhaftwerden”: apunarbhava-

BHĀG. P. 1, 8, 25. “das Sehen im Geiste, Voraussehen”: vācyadarśanāt

RAGH. 8, 71. “das Beschauen mit dem Geiste, Prüfen, Untersuchen”:

kārya- M. 8, 9. 23. “das Auffassen einer Sache, Urtheilen”: na hi

svābhiprāyeṇa me darśanam ŚĀK. 34, 8. “das Einsehen, Erkennen,

Verstehen, Einsicht, Erkenntniss, Verständniss”:

atīndriyeṣvapyupapannadarśano babhūva bhāveṣu RAGH. 3, 41.

samyagdarśanasaṁpannaḥ karmabhirna nibadhyate. darśanena vihīnastu

saṁsāraṁ pratipadyate M. 6, 74. tattvajñānārtha- BHAG. 13, 11.

yogenātmadarśanam YĀJÑ. 1, 8. ayuktibuddhirguṇadoṣadarśane R. 3, 37,

23. na hi buddhiguṇenaiva suhṛdāmarthadarśanam MĀLAV. 64.

parārthanyāyavādeṣu kāṇo ‘pyamlānadarśanaḥ VID. 65. alpa- adj. “wenig

Einsicht habend” HIḌ. 1, 45. “das Einsehen” so v. a. “Anerkennen”:

pravṛttiṣvaghadarśanam YĀJÑ. 3, 158. vedaprāmāṇya- MĀRK. P. 15, 43.

“Ansicht, Meinung”: mantripariṣado ‘pyetadeva darśanam MĀLAV. 70, 7.

vidyāścatasra evaitā iti no gurudarśanam KĀM. NĪTIS. 2, 6. “Absicht”:

saśarīro divaṁ yāyāmiti me darśanam R. 1, 58, 18. pāpadarśanā “Böses

beabsichtigend” R. GORR. 2, 9, 38; vgl. pāpadarśinī R. Schl. 2, 35, 25. 73,

5. R. GORR. 2, 6, 13. 8, 37. Nach den Lexicogrr. darśana = īkṣaṇa AK. 3,

3, 31. H. 577. = upalabdhi TRIK. 3, 3, 243. H. an. 3, 382. MED. n. 73. =

buddhi H. an. MED. — b) am Ende eines adj. comp. (f. ā) “Aussehen,

Schein”: divyakānana- N. 12, 44. vimānopama- MBH. 7, 6440. caṇḍāla- R.

1, 58, 16. 4, 2, 8. anartho ‘rthadarśanaḥ MBH. 10, 554. saumya- M. 2, 47.

anekādbhuta- BHAG. 11, 10. adbhuta- KATHĀS. 14, 76. cāru- MBH. 3,

2707. R. 5, 14, 65. cārusarvāṅga- N. 12, 18. valgu- AK. 3, 4, 33. unmatta-

N. 2, 3. ugra- SUND. 2, 24. vikṛta- HIḌ. 3, 3. rudra- R. 2, 31, 29. ghora- 1,

1, 54. HIḌ. 2, 5. bhīma- RAGH. 3, 57. Viell. hierher zu ziehen darśana =

varṇa “Farbe” TRIK. — c) “Erscheinung im Schlafe, Traumgesicht”, =

svapna H. an. MED. dadarśa darśane rājā devaṁ nārāyaṇam HARIV.

1285. — d) “Anschauungsweise, Lehre, Doctrin”, = śāstra TRIK. H. an.

MED. vratānāṁ dhāraṇaṁ tulyaṁ darśanaṁ na samaṁ tayoḥ

(yogasāṁkhyayoḥ) MBH. 12, 11045. fg. yenaivāsau (bhagavān) na

tuṣyeta manye taddarśanaṁ khilam BHĀG. P. 1, 5, 8. nānādarśanaiḥ 8,

14, 10. PRAB. 61, 11. sugata- 52, 14. naiyāyika- 85, 8. “sechs

philosophische Systeme” (s. u. tarka, tārkika) VET. 29,7. KULĀRṆAVAT.

in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 91,a,1. — e) = dharma H. an. MED. “virtue, moral

merite” WILS. — f) “Auge” TRIK. H. 575. H. an. MED. kupitasya

munestasya lalāṭātsvedavindavaḥ.

apatandarśanādevamadhastāttīkṣṇavarcasaḥ.. SUŚR. 2, 296, 4.

cintājaḍaṁ darśanam ŚĀK. 81. paśyāmi yogāñjanaśuddhadarśanaḥ

PRAB. 53, 9. — g) “Spiegel” (vgl. ādarśa) TRIK. H. an. MED. MEGH. 59, v.

l. für darpaṇa. — h) “Opfer” AJAYAP. im ŚKDR. — i) (vom caus.) “das

Zeigen” DHŪRTAS. 87, 3; vgl. danta-. — 3) f. ī “ein best. Insect”

(tailakīṭa) NIGH. PR. — Vgl. a-, tulya-, sama-, su-.

darśana 2) a) sādhūnāṁ darśanam so v. a. “das Zusammenkommen mit

Guten” Spr. 5220.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

darśana darśana, i. e. dṛś + ana,

I. adj.

1. Looking on, Ragh. 11, 93, v. r.

2. Knowing, MBh. 13, 3254.

3. Teaching, MBh. 1, 583.

II. n.

1. Seeing, Suśr. 2, 158, 10. āditya-, Exposure to the sun, Mṛcch. 47, 5.

2. Sight, MBh. 13, 961; Śāk. 18, 18; a vision, Rām. 5, 27, 8; a dream,

Hariv. 1285.

3. Adoration, Kathās. 3, 8.

4. Appearance, Man. 2, 101; with the vbs. i and yā, To become visible,

Bhāg. P. 1, 6, 34; with dā, To show one’s self, Gīt. 3, 9.

5. Review, Yājñ. 1, 328; inspection, Man. 8, 9.

6. Knowledge, Man. 6, 74.

7. Opinion, Kām. Nītis. 2, 6.

8. Precept, MBh. 14, 2700.

9. Doctrine, Bhāg. P. 1, 5, 8.

10. A philosophical system, Lass. 29, 7.

11. Intention, Rām. 1, 58, 18.

12. An eye, Śāk. d. 81.

13. A mirror, Megh. 59, v. r.

14. Showing, Lass. 87, 3.

15. Producing, Yājñ. 2, 170.

16. abl. darśanāt, From, Ragh. 12, 60.

III. f. nī, Epithet of Durgā, Hariv. 10238.

— Comp. a-,

I. n. 1. not seeing, Rām. 5, 53, 6. 2. neglect, Man. 10, 43. 3.

disappearance, Rām. 3, 50, 11; with gam, to disappear, Pañc. 137, 21;

with nī, to cause to disappear, Rām. 5, 22, 2.

II. adj. invisible, Arj. 8, 28. acchidra-, i. e. a-chidra-, adj., f. nā, faultless,

MBh. 6, 384. adbhuta-, adj. wonderfully handsome, Nal. 12, 6. an-ati-. n.

not seeing too often, Daśak. in Chr. 180, 5. ātmadarśana, i. e. ātman-, n.

seeing one’s self, Yājñ. 3, 157. tulya-, adj. indifferent, Bhāg. P. 1, 5, 24.

dāra-, n. interview with a woman, Cāṇ. 22, in Berl. Monatsb. dus-, adj. 1.

difficult to be seen, Bhāg. P. 3, 13, 34. 2. disgusting, Suśr. 1, 260, 1.

dūra-, adj. hardly to be seen, Bhāg. P. 1, 11, 8. pāra-, adj. seeing the

opposite bank or shore, Bhāg. P. 9, 4, 58. puṇya-, adj. f. nā, of beautiful

aspect, beautiful. bhāla-, n. red lead. su-,

I. adj. handsome.

II. m. 1. The discus of Viṣṇu. 2. a vulture. 3. Mount Meru.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

darśana f. ī (–°) = darśaka; n. seeing, looking, observing; sight, view,

vision; appearance, (also in court), occurrence; apparition, dream; visit,

meeting with (gen., instr. ±saha or –°); trying, examining,

understanding; judgment, opinion, knowledge, doctrine; showing, eye.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

darśana darśana, a. (ī) -°, seeing, looking at; knowing; showing,

teaching; n. 1. with active meaning: seeing, looking at, beholding; sight

of meeting with, visiting, attendance at (-° or g.); adoration (of g.);

eyesight; review of (g.); inspection, investigation of (-°); foreseeing (-°);

perception, understanding, insight; recognition of (-°); opinion, intention;

doctrine, philosophical system; 2. with ps. meaning: becoming or being

visible, appearance, mention (esp. in a standard work); apparition, vision;

3. with cs. meaning: showing; with concrete meaning: showing; with

concrete meaning: eye; it is often -° a. having a — appearance, looking –;

-ṁ dā, show oneself.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

darśana na° dṛśa–bhāvakaraṇādau lyuṭ . 1 netre 2 svapne 3 buddhau 4

dharme 5 darpaṇe 6 śāstre medini° 7 ijyāyām ajayapā° 8 varṇe trikāṇḍa°

9 nibhālane jaṭādha° . dṛśyate yathārthatayā jñāyate padārthonena

karaṇe lyuṭ . adhyātmāvedake 10 śāstrabhede tāni ca

nāstikavauddhajainavaiṣṇavāstikādimatabhedena nānāvidhāni . tāni ca

sarvadarśanasaṁgrahe tattanmatapradarśanāvasare darśitāni .

tatrāstikadarśanāni ṣaṭ tatra gautamena nyāyadarśanaṁ, kaṇādena

vaiśeṣikaṁ, kapilena sāṅkhyaṁ, patañjalinā yogadarśanaṁ, jaimininā

pūrvamīmāṁsāvyāsena vedāntadarśanam praṇītam . tacca

vedāntadarśanaṁ vyāsapraṇītamekamapi bahubhirvidvadbhiḥ

dvaitādvaitaviśiṣṭādvaitaśuddhādvaitaprabhedena nānāvidhaṁ yathā

buddhasyaikasyopadeśakatve’pi vineyānāṁ buddhivaicitryāt

svasvabuddhyanumāripadārthakalpanayā yogācāramā dhyamikādibhedā

upaja tāḥ . evaṁ vedāntasyāpi ṣaḍdarśanāni me’ṅgāni pādau kukṣiḥ

karau śiraḥ . teṣu bhedantu yaḥ kuryānmadaṅgacchedako hi saḥ .

etānyeva kulasyāpi ṣaḍa ṅgāni bhavanti hi . tasmānmadātmakaṁ

kaulamahaṁ kaulātmakaḥ piye! tantraśāstram . padārthabhedadarśane

phalabhedo yathā

nanda uvāca . yeṣāñca darśane! puṇyaṁ pāpañca yasya darśane .

tatsarvaṁ vada sarveśa! śretuṁ kautūhalaṁ hi me . śrī bhagavān uvāca .

subrāhmaṇānāṁ tīrthānāṁ vaiṣṇavānāñca darśane . devatāpratimādarśāt

tīrthasvāyī bhavennaraḥ . sūryasya darśane bhaktyā satīnāṁ darśane

tathā . sannyāsināṁ yatī nāñca tathaiva brahmacāriṇām . bhaktyā

gavāñca vahnīnāṁ gurūṇāñca viśeṣataḥ . gajendrāṇāñca siṁhānāṁ

śvetāśvānāṁ tathaiva ca . śūkānāñca pikānāñca khañjanānāṁ tathaitra

ca . haṁsānāñca mayūrāṇāṁ cāsānāṁ śaṅkhapakṣiṇām .

vatsaprayuktadhenūnāmaśvatthānāṁ tathaiva ca . patiputravatīmāñca

narāṇāṁ tīrthayāyinām . pradīpānāṁ suvarṇānāṁ maṇīnāñca viśeṣataḥ .

muktānāṁ hīrakāṇāñca māṇikyānāṁ mahāśaya! . tulasīśuklapuṣpāṇāṁ

darśanaṁ pāpanāśanam . phalāni śukladhānyāni ghṛtaṁ dadhi madhūni

ca . pūrṇakumbhañca lājāṁśca rājendraṁ darpaṇaṁ jalam . mālāñca

śuklapuṣpāṇāṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . gorocanāñca karpūraṁ

rajatañca sarovaram . puṣpodyānaṁ puṣpitañca dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ

labhennaraḥ . devāśritaṁ devadhaṭaṁ sugandhipavanaṁ tathā .

śaṅkhañca dundubhiṁ dṛṣṭvā sadyaḥ puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ .

śuklapakṣasya candrasya pīyūṣaṁ candanaṁ tathā . kastūrīṁ kuṅkumaṁ

dṛṣṭvā nanda . puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . patākāmakṣayavaṭa taruṁ

devotthitaṁ śubham . devālayaṁ devakhātaṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ

labhennaraḥ . śuktiṁ prabālaṁ rajataṁ sphāṭikaṁ kuśamlakabh .

gaṅgāmṛdaṁ kuśaṁ tāmraṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . purāṇa

pustakaṁ śuddhaṁ savījaṁ viṣṇuyantrakam . snigdhadūrvākṣataṁ

ratnaṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . tapasvinaṁ siddhamantraṁ

samudraṁ kṛṣṇamārakam . yajñaṁ mahotsavaṁ dṛṣṭvā supuṇyaṁ

labhate naraḥ . gobhūtraṁ gemayaṁ dugdhaṁ godhūliṁ goṣṭha

gospadam . pakvaśasyānvitaṁ kṣetraṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ .

rucirāṁ padminīṁ śyāmāṁ nyagrovaparimaṇḍalām . suveśikāṁ

suvasanāṁ divyabhūṣaṇabhūṣitām . veśyāṁ kṣemaṅkarīṁ gandhaṁ

sadūrvākṣatataṇḍulam . siddhānnaṁ paramānnañca dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ

labheddhruvam . kārtikyāṁ pūrṇimāyāñca ṇadhikāpratimāṁ śubhām .

saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā natvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . hiṅgulāyāṁ

tathāṣṭamyāmiṣe māsi site śubhe . śrīdurgāpra tamāṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam . śivarātrau ca kāśyāñca viśvanāthasya darśanam .

kṛtvopavāsaṁ pūjāñca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . janmāṣṭamīdine bhakto

dṛṣṭvā māṁ vindhyamādhayam . praṇamya pūjāṁ kṛtvā ca karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam upovya vrajabhūmau . ca bhāṇḍīre mālatīvane .

saṁpūjya rādhāṁ māṁ caiva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . pauṣe māsi

śuklarātrau yatra tatra sthale naraḥ . padmāyāḥ pratimāṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam . saptajanma bhavettasya putraḥ pautro dhaneśvaraḥ .

upoṣyaikādaśīṁ srātvā prabhāte dvādaśīdine . dvaṣṭvā

kāśyāmannapūrṇākaroti janmakhaṇḍanam . dattvā viṣṇupade piṇḍaṁ

viṣṇuṁ yaśca vilokayet . pitṝṇāṁ svātmanaścaiva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam

. prayāge muṇḍanaṁ kṛtvā yaśca pitṝn pratarvayet . upovya naimipāraṇye

karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . ṣṭapoṣapra puṣkare snātvā kiṁ vā

vadarikāśrame . saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā māmeva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam .

siddhāṁ kṛtvā ca vadarīṁ bhuṅkte vadarikāśrame . dṛṣṭvā matpratiṣāṁ

nanda! karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . dolāyamānaṁ govindaṁ dṛṣṭvā

vṛndāvane ca mām . dṛṣṭvā sapūjya natvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam .

bhādre dṛṣṭvā ca mañcasthaṁ māmeva madhusūdanam . saṁpūjya natvā

bhaktaśca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . rathasthañca jagannāthaṁ yo

drakṣyati kalau naraḥ . saṁpūjya bhaktyā natvā ca karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam . uttarāyaṇasaṁkrāntyāṁ prayāge snānamācaret .

saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā māmeva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . kārtikyāṁ

pūrṇimāyāñca dṛṣṭvā matpratimāṁ śubhām . upoṣya pūjāṁ kṛtvā ca

karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . candrabhāgāsamīpe ca mādhyāñca māṁ namet

śanaiḥ . rādhayā saha māṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . rāmeśvaraṁ

setubandhe āṣāḍhapūrṇimādine . upoṣya dṛṣṭvā saṁpūjya karoti

janmanaḥ kṣayam . dīnanāthaṁ dinakaraṁ lolārke cottarāyaṇe . upoṣya

dṛṣṭvā maṁpūjya karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . ṛṣikoṣṭhe suvasane kalaviṅke

sugahvare . visyandake rājakoṣṭhe nandake puṣpabhadrake .

pārvatīpratimāṁ dṛṣṭvā kārtikeyaṁ gaṇeśvaram . nandinaṁ śaṅkaraṁ

dṛṣṭvā karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . trikūṭe maṇibhadre ca

paścimodadhisannidhau . samupoṣya dadhi prāśya māṁ dṛṣṭvā

muktimāpnuyāt brahma° ve° janma° kha° . śakunabhedadarśane

phalabhedaḥ śakunaśabde dṛśyam .

plant

mfn. excited, agitated (“krodha-”

dīpta mfn. (in augury) exposed to the sun (also “āditya-”

mfn. being on the wrong side, inauspicious (opp. to “śānta”)

mfn. clear, shrill (? applied to the inauspicious voice of an animal and

opp. to “pūrṇa”) lxxxviii, 11

mfn. xci, 1

dīpta m. a lion (from his bright colour)

dīpta m. the citron tree

dīpta m. inflammation of the nose

dīpta m. (“ā”), Methonica Superba

dīpta m. Cardiospermum Halicacabum

dīpta m. = “sātalā”

dīpta m. red arsenic

dīpta m. (in music) a partic. tone

dīpta m. a partic. śakti

dīpta n. Asa Foetida

dīpta n. gold

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dīpta p. p. [dīp kta]

(1) Lighted, inflamed, kindled.

(2) Glowing, hot, flashing, radiant.

(3) Illuminated.

(4) Excited, stimulated.

(5) Luminous, bright.

(6) Heated by the sun, exposed to sunshine.

(7) Inauspicious (in general). –ptaḥ

(1) A lion.

(2) The citron tree.

(3) Inflammation of the nose. –ptaṁ Gold.

— Comp.

–aṁśuḥ the sun.

–akṣaḥ a cat.

–agni a. kindled (as fire). (

–gniḥ) 1. blazing fire. –2. N. of agastya. –aṁgaḥ a peacock.

–ātman a. having a fiery nature.

–upalaḥ 1. the sunstone. –2. a crystalline lens.

–kiraṇaḥ the sun.

–kīrtiḥ, -varṇaḥ, -śaṁktiḥ epithets of Kārtikeya.

–jihvā a vixen; (used figuratively for an ill-tempered, quarrelsome

woman).

–tapas a. of glowing piety, fervent in devotion.

–piṁgalaḥ a lion.

–mūrtiḥ Viṣṇu.

–rasaḥ an earth-worm.

–locanaḥ a cat.

–lohaṁ brass, bell-metal.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dīpta (partic. von dīp) 1) adj. s. u. dīp. — 2) m. a) “Löwe.” — b)

“Citronenbaum” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Beide so benannt nach der

“Goldfarbe.” — c) “eine best. Krankheit der Nase, Nasenentzündung”

SUŚR. 2, 370, 6. 371, 11. — 3) f. ā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen mit

“glühend rothen” Blüthen: “Methonica superba” RATNAM. 38.

“Cardiospermum Halicacabum” (jyotiṣmatī); = sātalā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

b) “rother Arsenik” NIGH. PR. — 4) n. a) “Asa foetida.” — b) “Gold”

RĀJAN.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

dīpta Son of Manu Uttama Uttama was the third Manu. He had three

sons–Aja, Parāsu and Dīpta. (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 3, Chapter 1).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dīpta a. blazing, flaming, glowing, hot, bright, radiant.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dīpta tri° dīpa–kta . 1 prakāśānvite 2 samujvalite ca medi° .

samiddhaśaraṇā dīptā dehe laṅkā mateśvarā bhaṭṭiḥ . 3 svarṇe 4 hiṅguni

ca na° rājani° . 5 nimbūke pu° 6 siṁhe puṁstrī° rājani° striyāṁ jātitvāt

ṅīṣ . 7 jyotiṣmatyāṁ (śātalā) strī ratnamālā 8 lāṅgalivṛkṣe strī ṭāp . śuṇṭhī

pādamitā kaṇārṇavamitā dīptāyamānyoḥkramāt vaidyakam . 10

nāmārogabhede pu° nāsā pradīpteva ca yasya jantorvyādhintu taṁ

dīptamudāharanti suśrutaḥ nāsārogabhedoktau . dopte roge paittikaṁ

saṁvidhānaṁ kuryāt sarvaṁ svādu yacchītalañca suśrutaḥ svārthe ka .

dīptaka svarṇe na° rājani° .

nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. N. of śiva

nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. N. of a Kalpa (see s.v.)

nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. a mixture of blue and red, a purple colour

nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. N. of a goddess (the wife of śiva)

nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. “-tākṣa” m. “having dark-red eyes”, śiva

nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. “-tāntevāsin” m. śiva’s pupil i.e. Paraśu-rāma

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nīlalohita (nīla + lo-) 1) adj. “schwarzblau und roth, dunkelroth” ṚV. 10,

85, 28. VS. 16, 47. AV. 4, 17, 4. -tenāmūnabhyavatanomi 8, 8, 24. KAUŚ.

16. 32. 40. 48. 83. von Rudra-Śiva (auch subst.) AK. 1, 1, 1, 28. H. 198.

HALĀY. 1, 13. VP. 58, N. 2. BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 7. 15. 4, 6, 41. MBH. 13.

1084. KUMĀRAS. 2, 57. ŚĀK. 194. BRAHMA-P. in LA. 53, 12. nīlalohitākṣa

von Śiva ŚIV. — 2) m. N. eines Kalpa; s. u. kalpa 2,d. — 3) f. ā a) “eine

best. Pflanze” (s. bhūmijambu) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N. einer Göttin

BRAHMA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 19,a,39. Śiva’s Gemahlin ŚKDR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

nīlalohita a. blue-red, E. of Śiva.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

nīlalohita pu° varṇāvarṇana pā° karma° . kaṇṭhena nīle keśeṣu

lohitavarṇayukte 1 śive amaraḥ . aṁśāyute niṣikasya nīlalohitatisaḥ kṛpā°

drāpe anyasaspate daridra! nīlalohita! yaju° 16 . 47 prajārthaṁ

varayāmāsa nīlalohitasaṁjñitam bhā° ānu° 16 a° . 2 niśritanīlalohitavarṇe

3 tadyute tri° . 4 bhūbhijabyāṁ strī śabdaca° .

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

paripaṇa (von 1. paṇ mit pari oder pari + paṇa) n. = nīvī AK. 2, 9, 80. 3,

4, 27, 214. H. 869 (m.). an. 2, 529. MED. v. 15. HALĀY. 5, 38. Wird durch

“Kapital” erklärt; vgl. jedoch u. nīvī 2.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

paripaṇa pari-paṇa, n. playing for (-°);

-pat-ana, n. flying about, hovering;

-pantha-ka, m. (obstructor of one’s path), adversary, enemy;

-pantha-ya, den. P. oppose, resist (ac.);

-panthin, a. besetting one’s path; m. waylayer, opponent, enemy;

-panthī-bhū, become the adversary of, oppose (g.);

-pava-na, n. cleansing (of grain), winnowing flail;

-paśavya, a. relating to the sacrificial animal;

-pāka, m. becoming fully cooked; digestion; ripening; maturity;

perfection; consequence, effect; fulness, fulfilment (of time): -tas, ab. in

consequence of;

-pācana, a. cooking fully; maturing;

-pācayitṛ, a. id.;

-pāṭala, a. very pale-red;

-pāṭi, f. succession;

-pāṭha, m. complete enumeration: in. (know) completely;

-pāṇa, n. hiding-place;

-pāṇḍiman, m. extreme whiteness;

-pāṇḍu, a. very white or pale: -ra, a. very white;

-pārśva, a. being at the side, close at hand: -vartin, a. remaining at

one’s side, standing beside (g.);

-pā-laka, a. protecting; maintaining;

-pālana, n. protection; maintenance; nurture: ā, f. protection, nurture,

ī-ya, fp. to be guarded; — maintained;

-pālya, fp. to be protected; — maintained or observed;

-piṅgī-kṛ, colour deep red-brown;

-piñja, a. full of (in.);

-piñj-ara, a. brownish-red, orange-coloured;

-pi-pālayiṣā, f. desire to maintain;

-pīḍana, n. squeezing out; injuring, prejudicing (-°);

puṣṭa-tā, f. being nourished by, feeding on (-°);

-pūti, f. complete purification;

-pūra-ka, a. fulfilling; bestowing abundance;

-pūr-aṇa, n. filling; completion;

-pūrin, a. bestowing abundantly;

-pūrṇa, pp. (1. pṛ) filled with (-°);

-pūrṇendu, m. full moon;

-pūrti, f. becoming full of (-°); completion;

-pelava, a. very delicate, tiny;

-pothaka,a. furthering, confirming;

-poṣaṇīya, fp. to be cherished;

-praśna, m. enquiry, after (-°);

-prāpti, fp. obtainment;

-prepsu, des. a. wishing to reach or obtain, seeking after, desiring

(ac.);

-plavā, a. running to and fro; m. fluctuation;

-pluta, pp. (plu) overwhelmed; bathed (in tears: -°).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

paripāṭala a. Pale red; R. 19. 10; Śi. 13. 42.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

paripāṭala (pa- + pā-) adj. “blassroth”: dhautarāgaparipāṭalādhara RAGH.

19, 10. bhrūbhaṅgabhīmaparipāṭaladṛṣṭipāta PRAB. 67, 8. abjadala ŚIŚ.

13, 42.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

paripāṭala pari-pāṭala, adj. Palered, Śiś. 13, 42.

palāśa mfn. cruel (lit. = next)

palāśa n. (for 1. see under “pala”) a leaf, petal, foliage (ifc. f. “ī”) &c.

n. the blade of a sharp instrument (cf. “paraśu-p-“)

n. the blossom of the tree Butea Frondosa

palāśa n. = “śmaśāna”

palāśa n. = “paribhāṣaṇa”

palāśa m. (ifc. f. “ā”) the tree Butea Frondosa (its older name is “parṇa”

q.v.) &c.

palāśa m. Curcuma Zedoaria

palāśa m. N. of Magadha

palāśa m. (ifc. it denotes beauty g. “vyāghrādi”)

palāśa m. cochineal

palāśa m. red lac

palāśa mfn. green (w.r. for “pālāśa”).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

palāśa a.

(1) Green.

(2) Unkind, cruel. –śaḥ A demon.

(2) N. of the Magadha country.

(3) N. of a tree, Butea Frondosa (also called kiṁśuka);

navapalāśapalāśavanaṁ puraḥ Śi. 6. 2. –śaṁ

(1) The flower or blossom of this tree;

bāleṁduvakrāṇyavikāśabhāvādbaṁbhuḥ palāśānyatilohitāni Ku. 3. 29.

(2) A leaf or petal in general; calatpalāśāṁtaragocarāstaroḥ Śi. 1. 21,

6. 2.

(3) The green colour. –śī Lac.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

palāśa 1) n. “Blatt, Laub” AK. 2, 4, 1, 14. H. 1123. an. 3, 723. fg. (lies

palāśaṁ pattre). MED. ś. 23. HALĀY. 2, 30. ŚAT. BR. 1, 5, 4, 5. 5, 2, 1,

17. 14, 9, 3, 15. śamī- 2, 5, 2, 12. palāśasya palāśena 6, 2, 8. anuvṛtaḥ

palāśairā mūlāt ŚĀÑKH. BR. 10, 2. -puṭa KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 6, 26. – ĀŚV.

GṚHY. 1, 12. KAUŚ. 42. 47. 48. 116. mālāṁ saptapalāśīm 38. R. 2, 59, 9.

SUŚR. 1, 108, 9. Spr. 638. śākhāpuṣpapalāśavān MBH. 3, 1400.

“Blüthenblatt”: puṣkarapalāśa LĀṬY. 1, 5, 8. CHĀND. UP. 4, 14, 3.

nālatāḍanavibhraṣṭaṁ palāśaṁ (collect.) nalinādiva MBH. 7, 1299.

padmapalāśākṣa 1, 6399. HARIV. 4323. R. 1, 15, 2. 2, 99, 6. RĀJA-TAR.

4, 436. BHĀG. P. 3, 19, 7. puṇḍarīkapalāśākṣa R. 2, 87, 3. palāśapattra

“ein einzelnes Blatt”: palāśapattrārdhamapi tvayājito na pārijātasya tava

pradāsyati HARIV. 7334; dagegen ŚĀNTIŚ. 4, 11 und PAÑCAT. 245, 14

“ein Blatt der Butea frondosa.” Vgl. a-, ayuk-, aśvattha-, ni-, bṛhat-, vi-,

sa-, su-. — 2) m. “Butea frondosa” (deren älterer Name parṇa ist) AK. 2,

4, 2, 10. H. 1136. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 42. RATNAM. 44. AIT. BR. 2, 1.

ŚAT. BR. 1, 3, 3, 19. 2, 6, 2, 8. 6, 6, 3, 7. 12, 7, 2, 15. 13, 4, 4, 10. KĀTY.

ŚR. 5, 10, 9. 25, 8, 1. KAUŚ. 8. 10. 18. MBH. 1, 4868. 2, 336. 14, 2449. R.

GORR. 2, 65, 7 (DAŚ. 1, 7. 9). SUŚR. 1, 6, 17. 32, 15. 138, 8. 21, 141, 10.

15. 333, 14. 2, 511, 9. PAÑCAT. 91, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 6. 43, 12. 53,

59. 96. BṚH. 26 (25), 11. sapalāśā vadarī BṚH. S. 53, 17. neutr. “die

Blüthe des Baumes” KUMĀRAS. 3, 29. palāśa am Ende eines comp. als

Ausdruck der “Schönheit” gaṇa vyāghrādi zu P. 2, 1, 56. — 3) m.

“Curcuma Zedoaria Rosc.” AK. 2, 4, 5, 20. MED. RATNAM. 127. — 4) m.

“ein” Rākṣasa TRIK. 1, 1, 74. H. an. MED. — 5) ein N. für Magadha

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 6) adj. “grün” H. an. MED. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.;

falsche Variante für pālāśa. — 7) adj. “grausam” (diese Bed. hat das in

den Wörterbüchern in der Nähe stehende nistriṁśa) DHAR. im ŚKDR. —

8) f. palāśī a) “Cochenille” (lākṣā) — b) “eine best. Schlingpflanze” (=

pattravallī, parṇavallī, palāśikā u. s. w.) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Vgl. gandha-. —

In H. an. werden dem n. noch die Bedd. śāsana und paribhāṣaṇa ertheilt;

diese sind aber ohne Zweifel aus dem 722sten Śloka irrthümlich

wiederholt. — Vgl. pālāśa, pālāśaka.

palāśa 2) aharniśaṁ varṣati vāridaścettathāpi pattratritayaṁ palāśe Spr.

(II) 4568.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

palāśa palāśa,

I. n.

1. A leaf.

2. Foliage, MBh. 3, 1400.

II. m. A tree bearing red blossoms, Butea frondosa.

— Comp. sa-, adj., f. śā, together with a Butea frondosa.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

palāśa n. (adj. –° f. ī) leaf, petal; m. a kind of tree ( = parṇa m.), n. its

blossom.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

palāśa palāś-a, n. (a. -° f. ī), leaf; foliage (-tā, f. abst. N.); petal; flower

of the Palāśa; m. a tree with large leaves, bearing red blossoms (Butea

frondosa);

-in, a. leafy; m. tree; N. of a town or village, Plassey.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

palāśa na° pala–gatau bhāve ghañarthe ka palaṁ gatiṁ

kampranamaśnute aśa–vyāptau aṇ upa° sa° . 1 pattre amaraḥ palaṁ

māṁsasavarṇaṁ brahmamāṁsotpannatvena kāraṇatayā tadvā aśnute

aśa–vyāptau aṇ upa° sa° . 2 svanāmakhyāte vṛkṣabhede tasyotpattiḥ

śata° brā° 1 3 . 4 . 4 māṁsebhya evāsya palāśaḥ samabhavat . tasmātsa

bahuraso lohitarasī lohitamiva hi māṁsaṁtenaivainaṁ tadrūpeṇa

samardhayantare khādirā bhavanti bāhye pālāśā antarāṇi hyasthīni

bāhyāni māṁsāni sa evaināṁstadāyatane dadhāti . ma ca

brahmamāṁsajatvāt brahmarūpaḥ yathoktaṁ śata0brā° 66 . 37 brahma

vai palāśaḥ iti aśvattharūpo bhagavān viṣṇureva na maṁśayaḥ .

rudrarūpo vaṭastadvat palāśī brahmarūpadṛk pahyotta 160 a° .

tatparyāyaguṇādi bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā palāśaḥ kiṁśukaḥ ṣarṇo yājñiko

raktapuṣpakaḥ . kṣāraśreṣṭho vātapotho brahmavṛkṣaḥ samidvaraḥ .

palāśo dīpano vṛṣyaḥ saroṣṇo vraṇagulmajit .

bhagnasandhānakṛddoṣagrahaṇyarśaḥkimīn haret . tatpuṣpaṁ svādu pāke

tu kaṭutiktaṁ kaṣāyakam . vātalaṁ kaphapittāsrakṛcchrajid grāha śītalam

. tṛḍdāhaśamanaṁ vātaraktakuṣṭhaharaṁ param . phalaṁ lavūṣṇaṁ

mehārśaḥkrimivātakaphāpaham . vipāke kaṭukaṁ rūkṣaṁ

kuṣṭhagulmodarapraṇut . navapalāśapalāśavanam māghaḥ 3 striyāṁ 4

śaṭyāṁ ca strī . palaṁ māṁsamaśnāti aśa–bhojaye aṇ upa° sa° . 5

rākṣase puṁstrī° medi° striyāṁ jātitvāt ṅīṣ . tasya

māṁsabhojitvāttathātvam . 6 haridvarṇe ca 7 magadhadeśe pu°

śabdaratnā° 8 lākṣāyāṁ strī rājani° yaurā° ṅīṣ .

pāṭala mf (“ā”) n. (f. “ī”) made of the Pāṭalī or forming a part of it g.

“bilvādi”

pāṭala m. a pale red hue, rose colour

pāṭala m. Bignonia Suaveolens (the tree bearing the trumpet-flower) &c.

pāṭala m. a species of rice ripening in the rains

pāṭala m. Rottleria Tinctoria

pāṭala m. N. of a man

pāṭala mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. Bignonia Suaveolens

pāṭala m. red Lodhra

pāṭala m. a kind of fresh water fish

pāṭala m. a form of Durgā

pāṭala m. of Dālkṣāyaṇī

pāṭala n. the trumpet-flower (also “ā” f.) &c.

pāṭala n. saffron

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pāṭala a. [paṭ-ṇic kalac] Palered, of a pink or pale-red colour; agre

strīnakhapāṭalaṁ kurabakaṁ V. 2. 7; R. 1. 83; 2. 29; 7. 27;

pāṭalapāṇijāṁkitamuraḥ Gīt. 12. –laḥ The pale-red or pink colour;

kapolapāṭalādeśi babhūva raghuceṣṭitaṁ R. 4. 68.

(2) The trumpetflower, Bignonia Suaveolens;

pāṭalasaṁsargasuramivanavātāḥ S. 1. 3. –laṁ

(1) The flower of this tree; R. 16. 52; 19. 46.

(2) A kind of rice ripening in the rains.

(3) Saffron.

— Comp.

–upalaḥ a ruby.

–drumaḥ the trumpet-flower.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṭala 1) adj. f. ā a) “blassroth” AK. 1, 1, 4, 25. H. 1395. an. 3, 664.

MED. l. 109. HALĀY. 4, 48. dhenu KAUŚ. 126. RAGH. 2, 29.

pallavasnigdha- 1, 83. -gaṇḍalekha (mukha) 7, 24.

asaṁskārapāṭaloṣṭhapuṭa (mukha) ŚĀK. 182. agre ṣtrīnakhapāṭalaṁ

kuravakam VIKR. 26. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 4. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. -dhāman (der

Sonne) PRAB. 85, 2, v. l. -pāṇijāṅkitamuraḥ GĪT. 12, 13. aśva H. 1240.

subst. “die blassrothe Farbe”: kapolapāṭalādeśin RAGH. 4, 68. — b) oxyt.

(f. ī) “aus der” Pāṭalī “gebildet” oder “einen Theil von ihr bildend” gaṇa

vilvādi zu P. 4, 3, 136. — 2) “Bignonia suaveolens”, ein Baum mit

wohlriechender Blüthe, m. MBH. 1, 2375. 3, 11594. R. 3, 17, 11. 5, 12, 35

-puṣpa MBH. 7, 964. -kusuma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 58. pāṭalā f. ŚĀNT. 1, 2.

dass. (sowohl “der Baum” als auch “die Blüthe”) AK. 2, 4, 2, 35. 1, 20. H.

1144. H. an. MED. RATNAM. 1. MBH. 1, 7587. 3, 11573. 13, 635. HARIV.

945. R. GORR. 1, 27, 14. 6, 15, 4. SUŚR. 1, 32, 16. 59, 6. 137, 9. 143, 7.

144, 18. 171, 7. 2, 53, 10. 483, 20. navapāṭalāparimala Spr. 1769, v. l.

smitapāṭalādhararuc 546. 1752. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 7. BHĀG. P. 4, 6, 15.

8, 2, 10. “die Blüthe” auch n. P. 4, 3, 166, Vārtt. 2, Sch. AK. 2, 4, 1, 20.

TRIK. 3, 5, 20. 21. MED. SUŚR. 1, 223, 19. RAGH. 16, 52. 19, 46. ŚĀK. 3.

— 3) m. “eine Art Reis. der in der Regenzeit reift”, AK. 2, 9, 15. TRIK. 3,

3, 400. H. 1168. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 196, 3. — 4) m. N. pr. eines

Mannes RĀJA-TAR. 6, 212. — 5) f. ā a) “Bignonia suaveolens”, s. u. 2. —

b) “rothblühender” Lodhra ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — c) “ein best. Flussfisch”

SUŚR. 1, 206, 6. — d) Bein. der Durgā TANTRASĀRA im ŚKDR. eine Form

der Dākṣāyaṇi MATSYA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,9. — 6) n. a) “die

Blüthe der Bignonia suaveolens”, s. u. 2. — b) “Safran” H. an. — pāṭalī s.

u. pāṭali. Vgl. ekapāṭalā, kāṣṭha-, citrapāṭala, divya-, pari-.

pāṭala 1) a) adhara- Spr. 2981. roṣapāṭalakānti LA. (II) 90, 3. saṭā-

“Röthe” RĀJA-TAR. 5, 332.

pāṭala adj. von pāṭalī “Bignonia suaveolens”: mūlāni PAT. a. a. O.4,89,a.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

pāṭala A monkey. This monkey met Śrī Rāma at Kiṣkindhā when the

latter was going to Laṅkā to meet Vibhīṣaṇa. (Chapter 88, Sṛṣti Khaṇḍa,

Padma Purāṇa).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṭala pāṭala,

I. adj., f. lā.

1. Of a pale red colour, Ragh. 7, 24.

2. Pallid, Śāk. d. 182.

II. m.

1. Pale red, rose colour, Ragh. 4, 68.

2. A kind of rice ripening in the rains.

3. A proper name.

4. The tree of trumpet flower, Bignonia suaveolens.

III. f. lā, The tree and its flower.

IV. n. Its flower, Pañc. i. d. 152.

— Comp. satā-pāṭala, m. the red mane of a lion, Rājat. 5, 332.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pāṭala a. pale-red; m. pale-red colour, redness; N. of a tree, n. its

blossom, f. ā = both.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṭala pāṭala, a. pale-red; m. pale-red, rose colour; the tree bearing the

trumpet-flower (Bignonia suaveolens): ā, f. id.; n. and f. the trumpet-

flower; (a) -kīṭa, m. kind of insect.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pāṭala pu° pāṭayati paṭa–ṇic–kalac . 1 śvetaraktavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri°

(pārula) khyāte 3 vṛkṣe strī° amaraḥ . 4 tatpuṣpe 5 āśudhānye ca na°

atyuṣṇaṁ pāṭalaṁ baddhaniṣyandi ca tridoṣakṛt rājani° . 6 raktalodhre

strī śabdaca° . pāṭalotpattiryathā . pradahyamānau caraṇau dṛṣṭvā’sau

kusumāyudhaḥ . utsasarja dhanuḥ śreṣṭhaṁ tajjamāmātha ṣañcadhā .

yadāsīnmuṣṭibandhantu rukmapṛṣṭhaṁ mahāprabham . sa

campakatarurjātaḥ sraggandhādyo guṇākṛtiḥ . nāhasthānaṁ śubhākāraṁ

yadāsīd vajrabhūṣitam . tat jātaṁ keśarāḍhyaṁ ca bakulo nāmato nagaḥ

. yā ca koṭī śubhāhyāsīdindranīlavibhūṣitā . jātā sā pāṭalā ramyā

bhṛṅgarājivibhūṣitā vāmanapu° 6 a° . pāṭalavarṇatvāt 7 durgāyām strī

tantrasā° . pāṭalāvatośabde dṛśyam . pāṭalānāṁ samūha pāśā° ya .

pāṭalyā tatsamūhe strī .

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pāṭalaka a. Of a pale-red colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṭalaka (von pāṭala) adj. “blassroth” COLEBR. Alg. 228.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṭalaya pāṭala-ya, den. P. colour pale-red.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pāṭaliman m. Pale-red colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṭaliman (von pāṭala) m. “blasse Röthe” PRAB. 85, 2.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṭaliman pāṭaliman, i. e. pāṭala + iman, m. Pale red, rose colour, Prab.

85, 2.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṭaliman pāṭal-i-man, m. pale-red, rose colour.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṭalīkṛ pāṭalī-kṛ, colour red.

pīta ifc. having drunk, soaked, steeped, saturated, filled with (also with

instr.) (cf. g. “āhitāgny-ādi”)

pīta n. drinking

pīta mf (“ā”) n. (possibly fr. 2. “pi” or “pyai”, the colour of butter ind oil

being yellowish) yellow (the colour of the Vaiśyas, white being that of the

Brāhmans, red that of the Kshatriyas, and black that of the śūdras) &c.

pīta m. yellow colour

pīta m. a yellow gem, topaz

pīta m. a yellow pigment prepared from the urine of kine

pīta m. N. of sev. plants (Alangium Hexapetalum, Carthamus Tinctorius,

Trophis Aspera)

pīta m. of the Vaiśyas in śālmala-dvipa

pīta mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of sev. plants (Curcuma Longa and Aromatica,

a species of Dalbergia Sissoo, a species of Musa, Aconitum Ferox,

Panicuni Italicum = “mahā-jyotihmatī”)

pīta m. a kind of yellow pigment (= “go-rocanā”)

pīta m. a mystical N. of the letter “ṣ”

pīta n. a yellow substance

pīta n. gold

pīta n. yellow orpiment

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pīta a. [pā-karmaṇi kta]

(1) Drunk, quaffed; vanāya pītapratibaddhavatsāṁ (gāṁ musoca) R.

2. 1.

(2) Steeped, soaked in, filled or saturated with

(3) Absorbed, drunk up, evaporated; Ku. 4. 44.

(4) Watered, sprinkled with water; pātuṁ na prayama vyavasyati

jalaṁ yaṣma svapīteṣu yā S. 4 8

(5) Yellow; vidyutprabhāracitapītapaṭottarīyaḥ Mk. 5. 2. –taḥ

(1) Yellow colour.

(2) Topaz.

(3) Safflower.

(4) A yellow pigment prepared from cow’s urine. –taṁ

(1) Gold.

(2) Yellow orpiment.

— Comp.

–abdhiḥ an epithet of Agastya.

–aṁbaraḥ 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu; iti nigaditaḥ prītaḥ pītāṁbaropi

tathākarot Gīt. 12. –2. an actor. –3 a religious mendicant wearing yellow

garments.

–aruṇa a. yellowish-red. (

–ṇaḥ) the middle of day-break.

–aśman m. topaz.

–kadalī a species of banana (svarṇakadalī). –kaṁdaṁ the carrot.

–kāveraṁ 1. saffron. –2. brass.

–kāṣṭhaṁ yellow sanders.

–gadhaṁ yellow sandal.

–caṁdanaṁ 1. a species of sandal-wood. –2. saffron. –3.

turmeric.

–caṁpakaḥ a lamp.

–tuṁḍaḥ a Kāraṇḍava bird.

–dāru n. a kind of pine or Sarala tree.

–dugdhā 1. a milch cow. –2. a cow whose milk has been pledged.

–3. a cow tied up to be milked.

–druḥ the Sarala tree.

–nīla a. green. (

–laḥ) the green colour.

–pādā a kind of bird (Mar. mainā). –puṣpaḥ N. of several plants,

caṁpaka, karṇikāra &c.

–maṇiḥ a topaz.

–mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance

–mūlakaṁ the carrot.

–yūthī yellow jasmine.

–rakta a. yellowish-red, orange-coloured. (

–ktaṁ) a kind of yellow gem, the topaz.

–rāgaḥ 1. the yellow colour. –2. wax. –3. the fibres of a lotus.

–lohaṁ brass.

–vālukā turmeric.

–vāsas m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa.

–sāraḥ 1. the topaz. –2. the sandal tree. (

–raṁ) yellow sandal-wood.

–sāri n. antimony.

–skaṁdhaḥ a hog.

–sphaṭikaḥ the topaz.

–harita a. yellowishgreen.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pīta (partic. praet. pass. von 1. pā) “getrunken”: jīvapītasarga adj.

“dessen Strahlen (Güsse) von Lebendigen getrunken sind” ṚV. 7, 149, 2.

Belege aus der späteren Literatur für diese und andere Bedd. s. u. pā.

pīta 1) adj. f. ā “gelb” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1394. an. 2, 178. MED. t. 34.

HALĀY. 4, 50. BALA beim Schol. zu NAIṢ 8, 98. VYUTP. 48. ĀŚV. GṚHY.

2, 8. CHĀND. UP. 8, 6, 1. SUŚR. 1, 45, 3. 61, 9. pītāvabhāsa 84, 6. 259, 6.

262, 15. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 29, 22. Die Farbe der Vaiśya, wie weiss

die der Brahmanen, roth die der Krieger und schwarz die der Śūdra, 3, 19;

vgl. MBH. 12, 6934. MUIR, Sanskrit Texts I, 191. – AK. 2, 4, 2, 52. 56.

HALĀY. 2, 50. MĀRK. P. 109, 65. -kauṣeya Citat beim Schol. zu ŚĀK. 6, 5.

-cchavivarṇa VYUTP. 205. -māñjiṣṭha R. 2, 94, 5. āpītasūryaṁ nabhaḥ

MṚCCH. 84, 8. — 2) m. a) “Topas” RATNAM. bei WILS. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

— b) “ein gelbes aus Kuhurin verfertigtes Pigment” RATNAM. bei WILS. —

c) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Alangium hexapetalum” (aṅkoṭha);

“Safflor, Carthamus tinctorius; Trophis aspera” (śākhoṭa) RĀJAN. — 3) f.

ā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Gelbwurz”, = haridrā AK. 2, 9, 41. H.

418. H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. = dāruharidrā, mahājyotiṣmatī,

kapilaśiṁśapā, priyaṅgu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = ativiṣā ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. —

b) “eine Art gelbes Pigment” (gorocanā) RĀJAN. — c) mystische Bez.

“des Buchstabens” ṣa Ind. St. 2, 316. — 4) n. a) “Gold” BALA a. a. O.

NAIṢ 8, 98. — b) “Auripigment” RĀJAN.

pīta Z. 2 lies 1, 149, 2.

pīta s. u. 2. pī.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pīta pīta, adj., f. tā, Of a yellow colour, Rām. 2, 94, 5.

— Comp. ā-, adj. yellowish, Rām. 2, 76, 4.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pīta [1] -> pā2.

pīta [2] a. yellow; abstr. tā f.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pīta 2. pīta, a. yellow: -tā, f. yellowness; yellow colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pīta tri° pā–karmaṇi kta . 1 pānakarmaṇi bhāve kta . 2 pāne na° pivati

varṇāntaraṁ pā–ūṇā° kartari kta . 3 varṇabhede pu° 4 tadvati tri°

amaraḥ . 5 haritāle na° medi° . pītaṁ pānamastyasya ac . 6 pānakartari

tri° vanāya pīta pratibaddhavatsām raghuḥ . kāvye

varṇanīyapītavarṇadravyāṇi kavikalpalatāyāmuktāni yathā pītāni brahma 1

jīve 2 ndra 3 garuḍe 4 śvaradṛ 5 gjaṭāḥ 6 . gaurī 7 dvāpara 8 gomūtra 9

madhu 10 vīrarasā 11 rajaḥ 12 . haridrā 13 rocanā 14 rīti 15 gandhake 16

dīpa 17 campake 18 . kiñjalka 19 valkale 20 śāli 21 haritāla 22 manaḥśilāḥ

23 . karṇikāvaṁ 24 cakravāka 25 vānarau 26 śārikāmukham 27 .

keśavāṁśuka 28 maṇḍūka 29 sarāga 30 kanakādayaḥ 31 .

mfn. dyed red with vegetable colour

puṣparakta “puṣpa-rakta” m. Hibiscus Phoeuiceus

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

puṣparakta (pu- + rakta) 1) adj. “roth wie eine Blume”; vgl.

pratinavajavā- MEGH. 37. — 2) m. “Hibiscus phoeniceus Lin.”

(sūryamaṇivṛkṣa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

puṣparakta pu° puṣpaṁ raktaṁ yasya . sūryamaṇivṛkṣe rājani° .

the colour of a horse, but also applied to Soma and the Puroḍāśa)

mfn. great, mighty

bradhna m. the sun (cf. “viṣṭap”)

bradhna m. the world of the sun ()

bradhna m. a horse

bradhna m. the point or some other part of an arrow (in “śata-b-” q.v.)

bradhna m. a partic. disease (cf. “bradhma” and “budhna-roga”)

bradhna m. N. of a son of Manu Bhautya

bradhna n. lead (often w.r. for “budhṇa” and “budhnya”). -cakra, n. the

zodiac

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bradhna UṆĀDIS. 3, 5. 1) adj. “röthlichgelb” oder “falb”, als Farbe des

Pferdes insbes.; daher NAIGH. 1, 14 unter den Bezz. für dieses. yuñjanti

bradhnamaruṣaṁ carantaṁ pari tasthuṣaḥ ṚV. 1, 6, 1. jānanti vṛṣṇo

aruṣasya śevamuta bradhnasya śāsane raṇanti 3, 7, 5. bradhnaṁ

māṁścatorvaruṇasya babhrum 7, 44, 3. kṛṣṇaḥ śveto ‘ruṣo yārmo asya

bradhna ṛjra uta śoṇo yaśasvān 10, 20, 9. des Soma, welcher sonst

babhru heisst, SV. I, 5, 2, 3, 2 (= AV. 7, 22, 2). ṚV. 8, 4, 13. 14. 9, 97,

52. des Puroḍāśa TS. 1, 6, 3, 3. TBR. 3, 7, 5, 7. der Sonne, in der

Verbindung bradhnasya viṣṭap (s. u. d. W.). Daher m. “Sonne” AK. 1, 1, 2,

30. 3, 4. 1, 5. TRIK. 1, 1, 99. H. 96. HALĀY. 5, 51. UJJVAL. Unsicher ist

die Stelle niṣkā ime yajamānasya bradhne TBR. 3, 7, 5, 13 schon darum,

weil AV. 7, 99, 1 dafür -sya loke gelesen wird. Nach NAIGH. 3, 3 auch

Bez. fur “gross.” — 2) subst. “Spitze” (oder “ein anderer Theil) des Pfeils”

in dem comp. śatabradhna (SĀY. śatāgra): śatabradhna iṣustava

sahasraparṇa eka it ṚV. 8, 66, 7. — 3) subst. “Blei” BHĀVAPR. in NIGH.

PR. Nach ŚKDR. = gomedaṁ patraṁ mit folgendem Citat aus

DHANVANTARI’S NIGHAṆṬU in BHĀVAPR.: patraṁ dalāhvayaṁ rāmaṁ

gomedaṁ rasanāhvayamiti. — 4) m. “eine best. Krankheit”:

atyabhiṣyandigurvāmasevanānnicayaṁ gataḥ. karoti granthivacchothaṁ

doṣo vaṅkṣaṇasaṁdhiṣu.. jvaraśūlāṅgasādāḍhyaṁ taṁ bradhnamiti

nirdiśet. MĀDHAVAK. im ŚKDR. — 5) m. N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa kuñjādi

zu P. 4, 1, 98. eines Sohnes des Manu Bhautja MĀRK. P. 100, 32; vgl.

brādhnāyana. — Bisweilen fehlerhaft für budhna und budhnya; s. u. d.

Ww.

bradhna 1) “Sonne”: bradhnasya piṣṭapam (vgl. u. viṣṭap) M. 4, 231.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

bradhna bradhna, perhaps vṛdh + na, m.

1. The root of a tree.

2. A son.

3. The body.

4. The sun, Man. 4, 231.

5. Śiva, Brahman.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bradhna a. reddish-yellow; m. the sun.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

bradhna bradh-na, a. ruddy; m. sun; N.; n. lead: -bimba, n. disc of the

sun;

-maṇḍala, n. id.; (a) -loka, m. world of the sun (AV.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bradhna pu° bandha–nak bradhādeśaḥ . 1 sūrye 2 arkavṛkṣe amaraḥ . 3

śive hemaca° . 4 dine 5 aśve nighaṇṭuḥ 6 ṛṣibhede tasya gotrāpatyam

kuñjā° ckañ . brāndhāyana tadgotrāpatye puṁstrī° . 7 bhautyamanoḥ

putrabhede mārkapu° 100 a° . 8 rīgabhede

abhyabhiṣyandigurvāmasevanānnicayaṁ gataḥ . karoti

granthivacchothaṁ doṣo vaṅkṣaṇasandhiṣu . jvaraśūlāṅgasādādyaṁ taṁ

vradhnamiti nirdiśet mādhavani0

light red colour

maṇjiṣṭhāmeha “maṇjiṣṭhā-meha” m. “-hin” mfn. suffering from this

disease

3, 3, 119. RATNAM. 28. KAUŚ. 38 (-ṣṭhī Hdschr.). SUŚR. 1, 38, 9. 55, 7.

145, 21. 2, 25, 1. 150, 16. 151, 2. mañjiṣṭhābha “die Farbe des indischen

Krapps habend” 429, 11. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43, 44. Wird P. 8, 3, 97 in mañji

+ stha zerlegt, ist aber eher als superl. von mañju zu fassen. — Vgl.

māñjiṣṭha.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

mañjiṣṭhā mañjiṣṭhā, properly superl. of mañju, f. Bengal madder, Rubia

manjith Roxb.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

mañjiṣṭhā f. the Indian madder (bright red).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

mañjiṣṭhā mañj-iṣṭhā, f. [spv. very bright], Indian madder: -rāga, m.

colour of Indian madder; attachment charming and durable like the colour

of Indian madder.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

mañjiṣṭhā strī, (atiśayeneyaṁ mañjimatī . mañjimatī + iṣṭhaḥ . matupo

lopaḥ striyāṁ ṭāp .) svanāmakhyātaraktavarṇalatāviśeṣaḥ . majīṭha iti

hindī bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . vikasā 2 jiṅgī 3 samaṅgā 4 kālameṣikā 5

maṇḍūkaparṇī 6 bhaṇḍīrī 7 bhaṇḍī 8 yojanavallī 9 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 4 . 90 ..

kālameṣī 10 kālā 11 jiṅgiḥ 12 bhaṇḍirī 13 bhaṇḍikā 14 bhaṇḍiḥ 15 . iti

śabdaratnāvalī .. hariṇī 16 raktā 17 gaurī 18 yojanavallikā 19 vaprā 20

rohiṇī 21 citralatā 22 citrā 23 citrāṅgī 24 jananī 25 vijayā 26 mañjūṣā 27

raktayaṣṭikā 28 kṣattriṇī 29 rāgāḍhyā 30 kālabhāṇḍikā 31 aruṇā 32

jvarahantrī 33 chatrā 34 nāgakumārikā 35 bhaṇḍīralatikā 36 rāgāṅgī 37

vastrabhūṣaṇā 38 . (paryāyāntaraṁ yathā —

mañjiṣṭhā vikasā jiṅgī kālā yojanaparṇyīpa .

tāmravallī citraparṇī kāntārī raktayaṣṭikā .. iti ratnamālā ..) asyā

guṇāḥ . madhuratvam . kaṣāyatvam . uṣṇatvam . gurutvam .

vraṇamehajvaraśleṣmaviṣanetrāmayanāśitvañca . sā caturvidhā . colaḥ 1

yojanī 2 kauntī 3 siṁhalī ca 4 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ ..

kuṣṭhasvarabhaṅgaśothanāśitvam . varṇāgnikāritvañca . iti rājavallabhaḥ

.. api ca .

mañjiṣṭhā madhurā tiktā kaṣāyā svarṇavarṇakṛt .

gurūṣṇā viṣaśleṣmaghnī śothayonyakṣikarṇaruk .

raktātisārakuṣṭhāsrāvisarpavraṇamehanut .. iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

mañjiṣṭhā strī atiśayena mañjīmatī iṣṭhan matupo lopaḥ .

svanāmakhyātāyāṁ latāyām amaraḥ . mañjiṣṭhā madhurā tiktā kaṣāyā

svarṇavarṇakṛt . gurūṣṇā viṣaśleṣmaghnī śothayonyakṣikarṇaruk .

raktātīsārakuṣṭhāsravisarpavraṇamehanut bhāvapra° . mañjiṣṭhayā

raktam aṇa . māñjiṣṭha tatkvāthena rakte tri° .

māṁjiṣṭa a. (ṣṭhī f.) [maṁjiṣṭhayā raktaṁ aṇ]

(1) Red as madder.

(2) Dyed with madder; māṁjiṣṭheṣu vyajyate na sma sainyaiḥ Śi. 18.

34. –ṣṭhaṁ Red colour.

māṇjiṣṭha n. red, red colour

GṚHY. 1, 19, 11. R. 2, 94, 5 (103, 5 GORR.). Spr. 3359. VARĀH. BṚH. S.

10, 11. 12. 19. 30, 12. 14 (mañjiṣṭhābha wohl vorzuziehen). TATTVAS.

12. KĀŚĪKH. 13, 84 (bei AUFRFCHT, HALĀY. Ind.).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

māñjiṣṭha māñjiṣṭha, i. e. mañjiṣṭhā + a,

I. adj. Of a red colour, Rām. 2, 94. 5.

II. n. Red colour.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

māñjiṣṭha a. red as madder.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

māñjiṣṭha māñjiṣṭha, a. (connected with mañjiṣṭhā), coloured with

madder, red like madder: -ka, i-ka, a. id.;

-ī-kṛ, colour red like madder.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

māñjiṣṭha na° mañjiṣṭhayā raktamaṇe . 1 raktavarṇe 2 tadvati tri0

m. a driver, charioteer

m. the act of checking or curbing, suppression, restraint (with

“vācām”, restraint of words, silence)

m. self-control forbearance, any great moral rule or duty (as opp. to

“niyama”, a minor observance; in ten Yamas are mentioned, sometimes

only five) &c.

yama m. (in Yoga) self-restraint (as the first of the eight Aṅgas or

means of attaining mental concentration) 93

m. any rule or observance

yama m. (“yama”) mf (“ā” or “ī”) n. twin-born, twin, forming a pair &c.

&c.

yama m. a twin, one of a pair or couple, a fellow (du. “the twins” N. of

the Aśvins and of their twin children by Mādrī, called Nakula and Saha-

deva; “yamau mithunau”, twins of different sex)

yama m. a symbolical N. for the number “two”

yama m. N. of the god who presides over the Pitṛis (q.v.) and rules the

spirits of the dead &c. &c. 18; 197, 198 &c. 10; 16; 289 &c. (he is

regarded as the first of men and born from Vivasvat, “the Sun”, and his

wife Saraṇyū; while his brother, the seventh Manu, another form of the

first man, is the son of Vivasvat and Saṁjṇā, the image of Saraṇyū; his

twin-sister is Yamī, with whom he resists sexual alliance, but by whom

he is mourned after his death, so that the gods, to make her forget her

sorrow, create night; in the Veda he is called a king or “saṁgamano

janānām”, “the gatherer of men”, and rules over the departed fathers in

heaven, the road to which is guarded by two broad-nosed, four-eyed,

spotted dogs, the children of śaramā q.v.; in Post-vedic mythology he is

the appointed Judge and “Restrainer” or “Punisher” of the dead, in which

capacity he is also called “dharmarāja” or “dharma” and corresponds to

the Greek Pluto and to Minos; his abode is in some region of the lower

world called Yama-pura; thither a soul when it leaves the body, is said to

repair, and there, after the recorder, Citra-gupta, has read an account of

its actions kept in a book called Agra-saṁdhānā, it receives a just

sentence; in Yama is described as dressed in blood-red garments, with a

glittering form, a crown on his head, glowing eyes and like Varuṇa,

holding a noose, with which he binds the spirit after drawing it from the

body, in size about the measure of a man’s thumb; he is otherwise

represented as grim in aspect, green in colour, clothed in red, riding on a

buffalo, and holding a club in one hind and noose in the other; in the later

mythology he is always represented as a terrible deity inflicting tortures,

called “yātanā”, on departed spirits; he is also one of the 8 guardians of

the world as regent of the South quarter; he is the regent of the

Nakshatra Apa-bharanī or Bharaṇī, the supposed author of ; 14, of a

hymn to Viṣṇu and of a law-book; “yamasyārkaḥ” N. of a Sāman

yama m. N. of the planet Saturn (regarded as the son of Vivasvat and

Chāyā)

yama m. of one of Skanda’s attendants (mentioned together with Ati-

yama)

yama m. a crow (cf. “-dūtaka”)

yama m. a bad horse (whose limbs are either too small or too large)

yama n. a pair, brace, couple

yama n. (in gram.) a twin-letter (the consonant interposed and generally

understood, but not written in practice, between a nasal immediately

preceded by one of the four other consonants in each class) on

yama n. pitch of the voice, tone of utterance, key

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

yama a. [yam-ghañ]

(1) Twin, twinborn.

(2) Coupled. –maḥ

(1) Restraining, controlling, curbing.

(2) Control, restraint.

(3) Self-control.

(4) Any great moral or religious duty or observance (opp. niyama);

taptaṁ yamena niyamena tapo’munaiva N. 13. 16. (yama and niyama are

thus distinguished: śarīrasādhanāpekṣaṁ nityaṁ yatkarma tadyamaḥ .

niyamastu sa yatkarma nityamāgatuṁsādhanaṁ .. Ak.; see Malli. on Śi.

13. 23 and Ki. 10. 10 also. The yamas are usually said to be ten, but their

names are given differently by different writers; e. g. brahmacaryaṁ dayā

kṣāṁtirdānaṁ satyamakalkatā . ahiṁsā’steyamādhurye damaśceti yamāḥ

smṛtāḥ .. Y. 3. 313; or ānṛśaṁsyaṁ dayā satyamahiṁsā kṣāṁtirārjavam .

prītiḥ prasādo mādhuryaṁ mārdavaṁ ca yamā daśa ..; sometimes only

five yamas are mentioned: –ahiṁsā satyavacanaṁ

brahmacayarmakalkatā . asteyamiti paṁcaite yamākhyāni vratāni ca ..).

(5) The first of the eight angas or means of attaining Yoga; the eight

angas are: —

yamaniyamāsanaprāṇāyāmapratyāhāradhāraṇādhyānasamādhayo’ṣṭāvaṁ

gāni.

(6) The god of death, death personified, regarded as a son of the sun;

dattābhaye tvayi yamādapi daṁḍadhāre U. 2. 11.

(7) A twin; dharmātmajaṁ prati yamau ca (i. e. nakulasahadevau)

kathaiva nāsti Ve. 2. 25; yamayoścaiva garbheṣu janmato jyeṣṭhatā matā

Ms. 9. 126.

(8) One of a pair or couple, a fellow.

(9) N. of Saturn. (10) A crow.

(11) A symbolical expression for the number ‘two’.

(12) Ved. A rein, bridle.

(13) Ved. A driver, charioteer. –maṁ

(1) A pair or couple.

(2) (In gram.) The twin letter of any consonant.

(3) Pitch of the voice. –mī N. of the river Yamunā.

— Comp.

–anugaḥ, –anucaraḥ a servant or attendant of Yama.

–aṁtakaḥ an epithet of 1. Śiva. –2. of Yama.

–ariḥ, –ghnaḥ, –ripuḥ &c. N. of Viṣṇu.

–īśaṁ the Nakshatra Bharaṇī.

–kiṁkaraḥ a messenger of death.

–kīṭaḥ 1. a wood-louse. –2. an earth-worm.

–kīlaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

–koṭiḥ –ṭī N. of a mythical town to the east of Laṅkā.

–ja a. twin-born, twin; bhrātarau āvāṁ yamajau U. 6; 4.

–daṁṣṭrā ‘Yama’s tooth’, the jaws of death. (

–ṣṭrāḥ pl.) the last eight days of the month Asvina and the whole

of Kārtika (regarded as a period of general sickness).

–dūtaḥ –dūtakaḥ 1. a messenger of death. –2. a crow.

–dūtikā tamarind.

–devatā the asterism Bharaṇī.

–dvitīyā the second day in the bright half of Kārtika when sisters

entertain their brothers (Mar. bhāūbīja); cf. bhrātṛdvitīyā. –dhānī the

abode of Yama; naraḥ saṁsārāṁte viśati yamadhānījavanikāṁ Bh. 3.

112.

–dhāraḥ a kind of double-edged weapon.

–pāśaḥ the noose of Yama.

–puruṣaḥ Yama’s servant or minister.

–priyaḥ the fig-tree.

–bhaginī N. of the river Yamunā.

–yātanā the tortures inflicted by Yama upon sinners after death,

(the word is sometimes used to denote ‘horrible tortures’, ‘extreme

pain’).

–rāja m. Yama, the god of death.

–vāhanaḥ, –rathaḥ a buffalo.

–sabhā the tribunal of Yama.

–sūryaṁ a building with two halls, one facing the west and the

other facing the north.

–svasṛ f. 1. N. of the river Yamunā. –2. N. of Durgā.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

yama (von yam) m. VOP. 26, 170. 1) “Zügel”: pṛṣṭhe sado nasoryamaḥ

ṚV. 5, 61, 2. — 2) “Lenker”: rathānām ṚV. 8, 92, 10. — 3) “das Hemmen,

Unterdrücken”: vācām “Schweigsamkeit” BHĀG. P. 5, 5, 12. = saṁyama

AK. 3, 3, 18. TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. an. 2, 332. fg. MED. m. 23. = yamana H.

an. — 4) in der Phil. “Selbstbezwingung, das Verbot der Beschädigung

Anderer durch Wort oder That und der Ueppigkeit, ein allgemeines

Sittengesetz” AK. 2, 7, 48. MED. JOGAS. 2, 29.

ahiṁsāsatyāsteyabrahmacaryāparigrahā yamaḥ 30. NĪLAK. 28. TATTVAS.

19. SARVADARŚANAS. 155, 10. 161, 2. 173, 16. fgg. MADHUS. in Ind. St.

1, 22, 22. VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 128. VP. 288. 653. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 36.

4, 22, 24. H. 81. H. an. yamānseveta satataṁ na nityaṁ niyamānbudhaḥ

M. 4, 204. MBH. 12, 8913. rājño vivekasya balavato yamādīnamātyān

PRAB. 8, 9. fg. yamaśca daśadhā proktaḥ Verz. d. Oxf. H. 233,b,6.

brahmacaryaṁ dayā kṣāntirdānaṁ (st. dessen fälschlich dhyānaṁ

GĀRUḌA-P. 105 im ŚKDR.) satyamakalkatā.

ahiṁsāsteyamādhuryadamāśceti yamāḥ smṛtāḥ.. YĀJÑ. 3, 313.

ānṛśaṁsyaṁ kṣamā satyamahiṁsā dama ārjavam. prītiḥ prasādo

mādhuryaṁ mārdavaṁ ca yamā daśa.. Spr. 350. “Observanz” überh.

PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 7. — 5) “festgesetzte Ordnung”, s. yāma-. — Vgl. prāṇa-,

vācaṁ-, su-.

yama 1) adj. (f. ā und ī) “geminus, von Geburt doppelt, gepaart”; m.

“Zwilling” TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. 1424. H. an. 2, 232. fg. MED. m. 23. HALĀY.

4, 15. saptathamāhurekajaṁ ṣaLidyamāḥ ṚV. 1, 164, 15 (vgl. AV. 10, 8,

5). 2, 39, 2. yamā cidatra yamasūrasūta 3, 39, 3. yamā iva susadṛśaḥ 5,

57, 4. 6, 59, 2. 10, 117, 9. 1, 66, 4. yame iva yatamāne yadaitam 10, 13,

2. yasya bhāryā gaurvā yamau janayet AIT. BR. 7, 9. agnirvāva yama

iyaṁ yamī TS. 3, 3, 8, 3. yamī vaśā 2, 1, 9, 5. aṣṭau yamā ādityāḥ

NIDĀNA 10, 2. yamau mithunau “Zwillinge verschiedenen Geschlechts”

KĀṬH. 13, 4. NIR. 12, 10. – PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 4, 10. KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 4, 35.

yamāṁ dviguṇāmiva śriyamicchantaḥ ĀŚV. ŚR. 11, 5, 4. ŚAUNAKA in Z. f.

vgl. Spr. 1, 442. putrau prasuṣuve yamau BHĀG. P. 3, 17, 2. 9, 11, 11.

yamau “Zwillinge” M. 9, 126. MBH. 1, 124. 3818. 15694. 7, 68. SUŚR. 1,

318, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 78, 24. KATHĀS. 21, 49. BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 9. 3, 16,

35. yamābhyāṁ supravṛddhābhyāmarjunābhyām HARIV. 3451 (nach der

Lesart der neueren Ausg.). BHĀG. P. 10, 10, 26. n. “Paar” VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 77, 33. yamau heissen die Aśvin H. 182. uṣa uṣo hi vaso agrameṣi

tvaṁ yamayorabhavo vibhāvā “du” Agni “gehst voran jeder Morgenröthe,

du strahltest für die Zwillinge” (nämlich, wenn sie zum Frühopfer

kommen) ṚV. 10, 8, 4. “thou wast the divider of the two twins i. e. of day

and night” M. MÜLLER, Lect. II, 511. yama als Bez. “der Zahl zwei”

SŪRYAS. 1, 32. fg. 2, 19. — 2) m. N. des Gottes, der im Himmel über die

Seligen (pitaraḥ) herrscht, deshalb auch König heisst, ein Sohn

Vivasvant’s. Die nachvedische Zeit sieht in ihm den Beherrscher der

Todten in der Unterwelt und fasst seinen Namen als “Bändiger” (schon

ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 1, 10. auch von yu abgeleitet TS. 2, 1, 4, 3). Die wirkliche

Bed. ist “Zwilling”: Jama und Yamī sind das erste Menschenpaar. Wie

diese nach der Legende NIR. 12, 10 von Vivasvant mit der Saraṇyū

erzeugt sind, so zeugt derselbe mit dem Abbilde der Saraṇyū den Manu,

eine andere Form des Erstlings der Menschheit. Ueber den ganzen

Mythus vgl. ROTH in ZdmG.4, 425. fgg. und J. MUIR in Journ. R. As. S.

new ser. I, 287. – AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 7, 33. TRIK. 1, 1, 71. 3, 3, 302. H.

169. 184. H. an. MED. HĀR. 57. HALĀY. 1, 72. 100. 5, 70. 83. ṚV. 10, 14,

1. fgg. 15, 8. 18, 13. yatte yamaṁ vaivasvataṁ mano jagāma dūrakam

57, 7. 60, 10. yasminvṛkṣe supalāśe devaiḥ saṁpibate yamaḥ 135, 1.

tasmai yamāya namo astu mṛtyave 165, 4. āste yama upa yāti devān AV.

4, 34, 3. 4. yamasya jātamamṛtaṁ yajāmahe ṚV. 1, 83, 5. yo mamāra

prathamo martyānāṁ yaḥ preyāya prathamo lokametam. vaivasvataṁ

saṁgamanaṁ janānāṁ yamaṁ rājānaṁ haviṣā saparyata.. AV. 18, 3, 13.

6, 28, 3. yamasya bhavanam ṚV. 1, 35, 6. paḍvīśam 10, 97, 16. yoniḥ

123, 6. lokaḥ AV. 6, 118, 2. 19, 56, 1. sādanam 2, 12, 7. 18, 2, 56. 3, 70.

gṛham 6, 29, 3. rājyam 18, 4, 31. fg Ross 5, 5, 8. Boten 30, 6. śvānau 8,

1, 9. Mutter ṚV. 10, 17, 1. König Jama AV. 8, 10, 23. 15, 14, 7. 18, 3, 69.

1, 14, 2. AIT. BR. 8, 7. ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 2, 1. KAUṢ. UP. 4, 15. yāvanto vai

mṛtyubandhavasteṣāṁ yama ādhipatyaṁ parīyāya TS. 5, 1, 8, 2. — Jama

und Yamī (Yamunā) HARIV. 552. VP. 266. BHĀG. P.6,6,38.8,13,9. MĀRK.

P. 77,7. 106,4. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 82,b,41. fg. ein jüngerer Bruder Manu’s

MBH. 1, 3136. fg HARIV. 552. MĀRK. P. 108, 15. fgg.

māṇḍavyaśāpādbhagavānprajāsaṁyamano yamaḥ. bhrātuḥ kṣetre

bhujiṣyāyāṁ jātaḥ satyavatīsutāt.. BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 20. yamaḥ

saṁyamatāmaham sagt Kṛṣṇa BHAG. 10,29. pitṝṇāmadhipaḥ MBH.

14,1176. HARIV. 260. VP. 153. – 207. 286. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 61,a,1. fgg.

einer der 8 Welthüter M. 5, 96. im Süden MBH. 8, 2102. R. 4, 51, 32.

yathā yamaḥ priyadveṣyau prāpte kāle niyacchati Spr. 2321. śarīrāntakaro

nṝṇām MBH. 3, 2138. yamo vaivaśvato devo yastavaiṣa hṛdi sthitaḥ Spr.

2406. samatayā – anuyayau yamam RAGH. 9, 6. yamastvannarasaṁ

prādāddharme ca paramāṁ sthitim MBH. 3, 2228. raktākṣaṁ

yamaprabhaṁ vyādham ŚUK. in LA. (III) 34, 17. sarujapada Spr. 803; vgl.

HARIV. 565. fgg. und śīrṇapādayamāya nī BHĀG. P. 9, 6, 17. yamasya

sadanam DAŚ. 2, 35. daṇḍī yamo mahiṣagaḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 58, 57. –

matanibarhaṇa Verz. d. Oxf. H. 250,b,37. als Gottheit (Beherrscher) des

Nakshatra Apabharaṇi (Bharaṇi) WEBER JYOT. 94. fg. Nax. 2, 300. 376.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 4. der 4ten Tithi 99, 1 eines Karaṇa 4. Liedverfasser

von ṚV. 10, 10. 14. Verfasser einer Hymne auf Viṣṇu Verz. d. Oxf. H.

82,b,39. eines Gesetzbuchs YĀJÑ. 1, 4. Verz. d. B. H. No. 140. 322. 1017.

1166. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 14, “a”, N. l. 266, “a”, 41. 268, “a”, 6. 12. 270, “b”,

32. 279, “a”, 22. MADHUS. in Ind. St. 1, 20, 21. -saṁhitā GILD. Bibl. 450.

Vgl. kālāntaka-, bṛhadyama, mahā-, laghu-, svalpa-. — 3) m. “der Planet

Saturn” H. ś. 14. MED. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 21. 20, 7. 28, 21. 98, 13. Ind.

St. 2, 278. fg. 283. Verz. d. B. H. No. 1249. auch Saturn gilt für einen Sohn

Vivasvant’s, aber von der ChāyāH vgl. HARIV. 564. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 10. —

4) m. N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s (neben Atijama) MBH. 9,

2547. — 5) m. pl. N. pr. einer Klasse von Göttern bei den Buddhisten

LALIT. ed. Calc. 58, 4. fehlerhaft für yāma. — 6) m. “Krähe” H. an. MED.

Vgl. yamadūtaka. — 7) n. in der Gramm. a) “Zwillingslaut”; so heissen

gewisse von den Grammatikern angenommene “nasale Zwischenlaute

zwischen Mutis und folgenden Nasalen”; vgl. WHITNEY in AV. PRĀT. S.

63. WEBER in Ind. St. 4, 123. ṚV. PRĀT. 1, 10. 49. 6, 8. fgg. 14, 10. 22.

VS. PRĀT. 1, 41. 74. 82. 103. 4. 111. 161. 8, 29. AV. PRĀT. 1, 99. TS.

PRĀT. 21, 8. 22, 12. PAT. zu P. 1, 1, 8. — b) “Tonlage”: samāna- AV.

PRĀT. 1, 14. eka- (= ekaśruti Comm.) TS. PRĀT. 15, 9. dvi- (= svarita

Comm.) 19, 3. 23, 16. caturyama 18. sapta ṚV. PRĀT. 13, 17. — 8) f.

yamī N. pr. der Zwillingsschwester Jama’s. die in der nachvedischen Zeit

der Yamunā gleichgesetzt wird, NAIGH. 5, 5. NIR. 11, 33. TRIK. 1, 2, 31.

H. 1083. ṚV. 10, 10, 7. 9. ŚAT. BR. 7, 2. 1, 10. VS. 12, 63. KĀṬH. 7, 10.

PAÑCAV. BR. 11, 10, 23. ŚAUNAKA in Z. f. vgl. Spr.1,442. HARIV. 609. fg.

VP. 266. BHĀG. P.6,6,38.8,13,9. MĀRK. P. 106,4. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 82,b,41.

fg.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

yama Kāla. (For more details see under Kāla).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

yama yam + a,

I. adj. sbst. Twin, one of a pair. du. The twins, Draup. 6, 29.

II. m.

1. Restraining.

2. Taming of passion, Vedāntas. in Chr. 217, 14.

3. Moral duty, Man. 4, 204.

4. Penance.

5. A festival.

6. Yama, the judge of the deceased ones, ruler of the infernal regions,

Rām. 2, 54, 28; god of death, Pañc. 247, 8.

7. A crow.

8. A name of the planet Saturn.

III. f. mī, The Yamunā.

IV. n. A pair.

— Comp. kāla-anta + ka-, m. Yama, as all-destroying time, Rām. 3, 32, 5.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

yama [1] m. holder, i.e. bridle or driver; restraint, self-control, any

paramount moral duty or observance (ph.).

yama (f. ā2 & ī) paired, twin; m. a twin (du. twins), N. of a god, either

the Twin (with his sister yamī f.) or the Restrainer, the god of death. n.

pair, twin letter (g.)

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

yama 1. yam-a, m. (restrainer), rein (RV.1); driver (RV.1); suppression,

restraint; self-restraint; general law of morality, paramount duty (opp.

niyama, minor duty); observance, rule.

yama 2. yam-a, a. (ā, ī) forming a pair; m. twin (du. twins; designation of

the Aśvins); N. of the male Twin of Yamī, the first man, son of Vivasvat

(RV.); in the Veda Yama is the god who rules over the departed fathers

in heaven; in C. he is regarded as the god of death, presiding in the lower

regions (his name being supposed to mean subduer or punisher), younger

brother of Manu (the first man), regent of the south, and reputed author

of hymns and of a law-book; planet Saturn; n. pair.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

yama au u viratau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-aka°-aniṭ .

ktvāveṭ .) au, yantā . u, yamitvā yantvā . viratirnivṛttiḥ . yacchati pāpāt

sādhuḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

yama ka mi pariveṣaṇe . tadabhāve . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°-para°-

saka°-seṭ .) ka mi, yamayati yāmayati . pariveṣaṇaṁ annāderarpaṇam .

veṣṭanamityeke . viṣatyavyāptāvityasya rūpamiti ramānāthaḥ . kecittu

pariveṣaṇa evāyaṁ mānubandhaḥ . yamayatyannaṁ dbijāya gṛhī .

anyatra niyāmayati saṁyāmayati ityāhuḥ . anye tu apariveṣaṇa evāyaṁ

mānubandhaḥ . niyamayati vimārgaprasthitānāntu daṇḍam . iti śākuntale

. pariveṣaṇe tu yāmayatyannaṁ dvijāya gṛhī ityāhuḥ . tena ubhayasya

prāmāṇikatvādubhayatra vikalpajñāpanārthañcānubandhaḥ kṛtaḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

yama uparatau bhvā° para° saka° aniṭ yacchati ayaṁsīt udit ktvā veṭ .

yamitvā yatvā yattaḥ . ā + dīrghīkaraṇe ātma° . upa + vivāhe ātma° .

yama pariveṣaṇe cu° u° saka° seṭ vā ghaṭā° . yamayati yāmavati

ayīyamat ta ayayāmat ta .

yama pu yama–ghañ . ahiṁsā satyavacanaṁ brahmacaryamakalkatā .

asteyamiti pañcaite yamākhyāni vratāni ca ityukte 1 ahiṁsādau tacca

dehamātrasādhyam āvaśyakamavaśyakāryaṁ nityaṁ kāryamiti amaraḥ

indriyādīnāṁ 2 saṁyamane ca . yamayati ac . prāṇināṁ

śubhāśubhakarmānusāreṇa daṇḍavidhāyaka īśvaraniyukte dakṣiṇasthe 3

devabhede pu° amaraḥ . tatsvāmikatvāt 4 kāke ca . bhrātṛtvena

yamasambandhini 5 śanau 6 ekagarbhajāyamāne yamaje tri° medi° . 7

dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 8 yamadevatāke bharaṇonakṣatre jyo° .

dikpālayamabhedāḥ caturdaśa bhaviṣyapu° uktā yathā yamāya

dharmarājāya mṛtyave cāntakāya ca . vaivakhatāya kālāya

sarvabhūtakṣayāya ca . auḍambarāya daghnāya nīlāya parameṣṭhine .

vṛkodarāya citrāya citraguptāya vai namaḥ . thogāṅgayamākṣa pāta° sū°

bhā° uktā yathā

yamaniyamāsanaprāṇāyāmapratyāhāradhāraṇādhyānasamādhayo’ṣṭāvaṅ

gāni mū° . yathākramaṁ eteṣām anuṣṭhānaṁ svarūpañca vakṣyāmaḥ

bhā° . tatra ahiṁsāsatyāsteyabrahmacaryāparigrahāyamāḥ mū° .

tatrāhiṁsā sarvatho sarvadā sarvabhūtānāmanatidrohaḥ . uttare ca

yamaniyamāstanmūlāstatsiddhiparatayā tatpratipadānāya pratipādyante

tadavadātakaraṇāyaivopādīyante . tathācoktaṁ sa khalvayaṁ brāhmaṇo

yathā yathā vratāni bahūni samāditsate tathā tathā pramādakṛtebhyo

hiṁsānidānebhyo nivartamānastāmevāvadātarūpāmahiṁsāṁ karoti .

satyaṁ yathārthe vāṅmanuse yathādṛṣṭaṁ yathānumitaṁ yathāśrutaṁ

tathā vāṅmanaśceti svabodhasaṁkrāntaye vāguktā sā yadi na vañcitā

bhrāntā vā pratipattibandhyā vā bhavet ityeṣā sarvabhūtopa kārārthaṁ

pravṛttā na bhūtopaghātāya yadi caivamapyamidhīya mānā

mūtopaghātaparaiva syānna satyaṁ bhavet pāpameva bhavet tena

puṇyābhāsena puṇyapratirūpakena kaṣṭaṁ tamaḥ prāpnuyāt tasmāt

parīkṣya sarvabhūtahitaṁ satyaṁ brūyāt . steyamaśāstra pūrvakaṁ

dravyāṇāṁ parataḥ svīkaraṇaṁ tatpratiṣedhaḥ

punaraspṛhārūpamasteyamiti . brahmacaryaṁ guptendriyasyopasthasya

saṁyamaḥ . viṣayāṇāmarjanarakṣaṇakṣayasaṅgahiṁsādoṣadarśanā

dasvīkaraṇamaparigraha ityete yamāḥ bhā° . gāruḍe tu tasya

daśavidhatvamuktaṁ yathā brahmacarye dayākṣāntirdhyānaṁ

satyamakalkatā . ahiṁsā’steya mādhuryaṁ damaścaite yamāḥ smṛtāḥ

105 a° .

raṁgaḥ [raṁj-bhāve ghañ]

(1) Colour, hue, dye, paint.

(2) A stage, theatre, play house, an arena, any place of public

amusement, as in raṁgavighnopaśāṁtaye S. D. 281.

(3) A place of assembly.

(4) The members of an assembly, the audience; aho

rāgabaddhacittavṛttirālikhita iva sarvato raṁgaḥ S. 1; raṁgasya

darśayitvā nivartate nartakī yathā nṛtyāt . puruṣasya tathātmānaṁ

prakāśya vinivartate prakṛtiḥ .. Sarva. S.

(5) A field of battle.

(6) Dancing, singing, acting.

(7) Mirth, diversion.

(8) The nsaal modification of a vowel; saraṁgaṁ kaṁpayetkaṁpaṁ

rathīveti nidarśanaṁ Śik. 30; see 26, 27, 28 also. (10) An extract of

Khadira. –gaḥ, –gaṁ Tin.

— Comp.

–aṁganaṁ –ṇaṁ an arena, an amphitheatre.

–avataraṇaṁ 1. entrace on the stage. –2. an actor’s profession.

–avatārakaḥ, –avatārin m. an actor.

–ājīvaḥ 1. an actor. –2. a painter; so,

–upajīvin m.

–kāraḥ, –jīvikaḥ a painter.

–caraḥ 1. an actor, a player. –2. a gladiator.

–jaṁ red lead.

–jīvakaḥ 1. an actor. –2. a dyer, colourist.

–daḥ 1. borax. –2. an extract of Khadira.

–devatā the goddess supposed to preside over sports and public

diversions generally.

–dvāraṁ 1. a stage-door. –2. the prologue of a play.

–patrī –puṣpī the indigo plant.

–pīṭhaṁ a place for dancing.

–vī(vī)jaṁ silver.

–bhūtiḥ f. 1. the night of full moon in the month of Asvina.

–bhūmiḥ f. 1. a stage, theatre. –2. an arena, battle-field.

–maṁḍapaḥ a theatre.

–mallī a lute.

–mātṛ f. 1. lac, red-dye; or the insect which produces it –2. a

bawd, procuress.

–vastu n. a paint.

–vāṭaḥ an arena, a place enclosed for plays, dancing &c.

–vidyā the art of dancing and acting, theatrical profession.

–śālā a dancing-hall, theatre, play-house.

raktavarṇa “rakta-varṇa” mfn. red-coloured

m. the cochineal insect

raktavarṇa “rakta-varṇa” n. gold

raktavarṇa “rakta-varṇa” n. “-ṇaka” mfn. red-coloured

raktavarṇa “rakta-varṇa” m. (scil. “varga”) = “rakta-varga”

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

raktavarṇa m. “die rothe Farbe” oder “die Farbe des Blutes” Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 98,a,6.

raktavarṇa 1) adj. “rothfarbig” SUŚR. 1, 199, 7. -maṇi AMṚTAN. UP. in

Ind. St. 9, 37. — 2) m. “Coccinelle” (indragopa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 3) n.

“Gold” H. ś. 162.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

raktavarṇa [1] m. red colour.

raktavarṇa [2] a. red-coloured.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

raktavarṇa pu° rakto varṇā’sya . 1 indragopakīṭabhede rājani° . karma° .

2 rohitarūpe pu° 3 tadvati tri° .

raṅga m. colour, paint, dye, hue

m. the nasal modification of a vowel

m. a place for public amusement or for dramatic exhibition, theatre,

play-house, stage, arena, any place of assembly &c.

m. the members of an assembly, audience

m. a dancing-place

m. a field of battle

m. diversion, mirth

m. love

raṅga m. (in music) a kind of measure

m. borax

m. an extract obtained from Acacia Catechu

m. N. of a man

m. of various authors (also with “bhaṭṭa” and “jyotir-vid”)

raṅga n. (m.) tin (= “vaṅga”)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

raṅga (von rañj) 1) m. a) “Farbe” TRIK. 3, 3, 67. H. an. 2, 45. fg. MED. g.

19. na bhāti vāsasi kliṣṭe raṅgayoga ivāhitaḥ SUŚR. 2, 157, 8. vāso yathā

raṅgavaśaṁ prayāti MBH. 5, 1269. — b) “nasale Färbung eines Vocals”

ŚIKṢĀ 26. 30; vgl. Ind. St. 4, 269. 362 und rakta. — c) “Theater,

Schaubühne, Schauplatz, Arena” P. 6, 4, 27, Sch. H. 282. HALĀY. 1, 97. =

nṛtyayudbhuvoḥ (ist wohl nṛtyabhū und yudbhū) H. an. = nṛtye raṇakṣitau

MED. = nṛtya, raṇa, khala TRIK. – MBH. 1, 152. 4415. 4417. 5347. 3,

2193. 2198. 4, 341. 345. 6, 3528. 7, 3932. HARIV. 4211. 4532.

yathācāryopadeśena raṅgaśobhī bhavennaṭaḥ BHAR. NĀṬYAŚ. 34, 82.

raṅgādbahistu nepathyam BHAR. beim Schol. zu ŚĀK. 3, 6. -praveśa

MṚCCH. 17, 11. 82, 23. KATHĀS. 49, 14. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 223.

raṅgavighnopaśānti SĀH. D. 281. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,b,22. 41. malla-

BHĀG. P. 10, 36, 24. 42, 33. -pīṭha DAŚAK. 77, 11. śailūṣasyeva me

rājyaraṅge ‘sminvalgataściram RĀJA-TAR. 2, 156. tāruṇyahelārati- ŚRUT.

34. “Theater” so v. a. “die Zuschauer” SĀṁKHYAK. 59. aho

rāgabaddhacittavṛttirālikhita iva sarvato raṅgaḥ ŚĀK. 4, 12. fg. raṅgaṁ

prasādya madhuraiḥ ślokaiḥ DAŚAR. 3, 4 = SĀH. D. 284. -prasādana (-

prasādhana gedr.) PRATĀPAR. 25,a,9. — d) “Borax.” — e) “der aus der

Acacia Catechu gewonnene Catechu-Extract” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) N.

pr. eines Mannes RĀJA-TAR. 5, 353. 396. fgg. — 2) n. (m. n. MED.) =

vaṅga “Zinn” AK. 2, 9, 106. TRIK. 2, 9, 34. 3, 3, 61. 67. H. 1042. H. an.

MED. — Vgl. anaṅga-, keli-, dīrgharaṅgā, dṛḍharaṅgā, naṭaraṅga, nī-,

paṭṭa-, patta-, pūrva-, matsya- (unter -raṅka), yuddha-, raṇa-, rāja-, śrī-,

sa-, su-.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

raṅga raṅga, i. e. rañj + a,

I. m.

1. Colour, paint.

2. The place where dancing or acting is exhibited, a stage, Śāk. 4, 12;

Daśak. in Chr. 190, 10; a place for an assembly, Nal. 5, 3; 8.

3. A field of battle, Pañc. 35, 3.

4. Dancing, acting, Cṛṅgārat. 17.

5. A proper name, Rājat. 5, 353.

II. n. Tin.

— Comp. keli-, m. a pleasure-ground, Lass. 87, 16. pūrva-, m. the prelude

to a drama Śiś. 2, 8. rāja(n)-, n. silver. su-,

I. m. 1. bright colour. 2. the orange.

II. f. gā, crystal.

III. n. 1. red sanders. 2. vermilion.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

raṅga m. colour, hue; theatre, play-house, stage, arena.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

raṅga raṅg-a, m. [rañj] colour; nasal colouring of a vowel (gr.); [bright

scene], theatre, stage, scene, arena; theatrical audience; N.: -kāra, m.

dyer;

-cara, m. actor; gladiator;

-dvār, f. stage-door;

-dvāra, n. prologue in a play;

-nātha, m. N.;

-patākā, f. N.;

-bhū-mi, f. battle-field;

-maṅgala, n. festival on the stage;

-maṇḍapa, play-house, theatre;

-vat-ī, f. N.;

-vastu, n. colouring matter;

-vāra+aṅ-ganā, f. stage-dancer;

-aṅgaṇa, n. arena;

-avataraṇa, n. entrance on the stage; histrionic profession;

-avataraka, -avatārin, m. stage-player, actor.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

raṅga puṁna° ragi–ac . 1 dhātubhede (rāṅa) rājani° . ranja–bhāve ghañ

. 2 rāge . ādhāre ghañ . 3 raṇabhūmau 5 nāṭyasthāne ca amaraḥ . karaṇe

ghañ . 4 nṛtye medi° . 6 ṭaṅkaṇe (sohāgā) 7 khādirasāre ca rājani° .

raṅgadhātoḥ śo dhanaprakāro bhāvapra° ukto yathā ra(va)ṅganāgau

prataptau ca galitau tau niṣecayet . tridhā tridhā viśuddhiḥ syādravi

dugdhe’pi ca tridhā . tailatakrakāñjikagomūtrakulatthakvātheṣu

pratyekaṁ tridhā tridhā . atha raṅgasya māraṇavidhiḥ . mṛtpātre drāvite

ra(va)ṅge ciñcāśvatthatvacorajaḥ . kṣiptvā ra

(va)ṅgacaturthāṁśamayodarvyā pracālayet . ciñcā(amilī) rajaścūrṇam .

ayodarvī (karachulī) . tatodviyāmamātreṇa ra(va)ṅgaṁ bhasma prajāyate

. atha bhasmasamaṁ tālaṁ kṣiptvāmlena vivardhayet . tato gajapuṭe

paktvā punaramlena mardayet . tālena daśamāṁśena yāmamekaṁ tataḥ

puṭet . evaṁ daśapuṭaiḥ pakvaṁ ra(va)ṅgaṁ bhavati māritam . evaṁ

māritasya ra(va)ṅgasya guṇāḥ . raṅgaṁ laghu saraṁ rūkṣaṁ

kuṣṭhamehakaphakramīn . nihanti pāṇḍuṁ saśvāsaṁ

netramīṣattupittalam . siṁhogajaughantu yathā nihanti tathaiva ra

(va)ṅgo’khila hemavargam . dehasya saukhyaṁ prabalendriyatvaṁ

narasya puṣṭiṁ vidadhāti nūnam . tasyāśuddhasya doṣamāha

raṅgovidhatte khaluśuddhihīnastathā hyapakvaśca kilāsagulmau .

kuṣṭhāniśūlaṁ kila vātaśothaṁ pāṇḍuṁ pramehañca bhagandarañca .

viṣopamaṁ raktavikāravṛndaṁ kṣamañca kṛcchrāṇi kaphajvarañca .

mehāśmarīvidradhimukhyarogānnāgopi kuryāt kathitān vikārān tadbhedo

yathā . śvetaṁ mṛdu laghu svacchaṁ snigdhamuṣṇasahaṁ himam .

sūtrapattrakaraṁ kāntaṁ trapu śreṣṭhamudāhṛtam . kṣurakaṁ

miśrakañcāpi dvibidhaṁ ra(va)ṅgamucyate . uttamaṁ kṣurakaṁ tatra

miśrakaṁ tvahitaṁ matam . rājani° .

113. a) “färbend”: -dravya MALLIN. zu KUMĀRAS. 1, 32. -tva n. nom.

abstr. SARVADARŚANAS. 152, 5. — b) “angenehm erregend, entzückend,

erfreuend”: hṛdaya- GĪT. 10,7. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,b,21. 200,a,5 v. u.

jana- 199,b, No. 472. GĪT.1,19. janarañjanī f. Bez. einer best.

Gebetsformel PAÑCAR. 3, 15, 32. — 2) m. “Saccharum Munja” (muñja)

“Roxb.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 3) f. ī a) wohl so v. a. “freundliche

Begrüssung” BURN. Intr. 402, N. 2. — b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen:

“die Indigopflanze” AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. “Nyctanthes arbor tristis” ŚABDAC. im

ŚKDR. “Gelbwurz” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. “ein best. wohlriechender Stoff”

ebend. ŚKDR. und WILSON lassen das Wort nach MED. noch andere

Pflanzen bezeichnen, die aber in der gedr. MED. unter rañjinī, in H. an.

unter rājinī verzeichnet werden. — 4) n. a) “das Färben” VĀGBH. 12, 13.

keśa- Verz. d. Oxf. H. 122,b,24. “Farbe”: nānārañjanaraktāḥ MBH. 12,

3689. haridrārasarañjanasya saundaryam Spr. 5036. — b) “das

Nasaliren”: upadhā- Śit. beim Schol. zu VS. PRĀT. 3, 135. — c) “das

Entzücken, Erfreuen, Beglücken, Zufriedenstellen” MBH. 12,1998. 2057.

HARIV. 3069. R.1,3,37 (33 GORR.). Spr. 1215. RAGH.4,12.6,21. RĀJA-

TAR.3,102.5,436. MALLIN. zu KUMĀRAS.4,9. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 138,b, No.

273. MĀRK. P. 27,4. — d) “rother Sandel” AK. 2, 6, 3, 33. H. 642. H. an.

MED. — Vgl. keśa- (s. auch oben u. 4) “a”), nakharañjanī, netrarañjana,

pāka-, mano-, yoni-, rasikarañjanī, strīrañjana.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

rañjana rañj + ana,

I. m. (?), n.

1. Dyeing, colouring, Rājat. 5, 381.

2. Conciliating, befriending, Rājat. 5, 436 (at the end of a comp. adj.).

3. Exciting passion, delighting.

II. n. Red sandal.

III. f. nī, The indigo, and several other plants.

— Comp. loka-, n. gaining public confidence. strī-, n. pan eaten with the

betel-nut.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

rañjana a. (f. ī) & n. = prec.; n. also colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

rañjana na° rajyate’nena ranja–karaṇe lyuṭ . 1 raktacandane 2 hiṅgule 3

muñjatṛṇe rājani° 4 mañciṣṭhāyāṁ 5 nīlyāṁ 6 guṇḍarocanikāyāṁ

(kamalāguḍi) strī medi° ṅīp . 6 śephālikāyāṁ śabdaca° . 7 haridrāyāṁ 8

parpaṭyāñca strī rājani° ṅīp . bhāve lyuṭ . 9 rāge . ṇic kartarilyu . 10

rāgajanake tri° . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . 11 kaṭa phale pu° rājani0

colour”, red coloured, red, Kāvyad.

mf (“ī”) n. dear, beloved

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

rāgamaya , rāgavat a.

(1) Red, coloured.

(2) Dear, beloved.

(3) Impassioned.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

rāgamaya (von rāga) adj. “roth” und zugleich “verliebt” KĀVYĀD. 2, 75.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

rāgamaya a. red or enamoured.

rūpam [rūp-ka bhāve ac vā]

(1) Form, figure, appearance; virūpaṁ rūpavaṁtaṁ vā pumānityeva

bhuṁjate Pt. 1. 143; so surūpa, kurūpa.

(2) Form or the quality of colour (one of the 24 guṇas of the

Vaiśeṣikas); cakṣurtātragrāhyajātimān guṇo rūpaṁ Tarka K; (it is of six

kinds: –śukla, kṛṣṇa, pīta, rakta, harita, kapila, or of seven, if citra be

added).

(3) Any visible object or thing.

(4) A handsome form or figure, beautiful form, beauty, elegance,

grace; mānupīṣu kathaṁ vā syādasya rūpasya saṁbhavaḥ S. 1. 26; vidyā

nāma narasya rūpamadhikaṁ Bh. 2. 20; rūpaṁ jarā haṁti &c.

(5) Natural state or condition, nature, property, characteristic,

essence.

(6) Mode, manner.

(7) A sign, feature.

(8) Kind, sort, species

(9) An image, a reflected image. (10) Similitude, resemblance.

(11) Specimen, type, pattern.

(12) An inflected form, the form of a noun or a verb derived from

inflection (declension or conjugation).

(13) The number one, an arithmetical unit.

(14) An integer.

(15) A drama, play, see rūpaka.

(16) Acquiring familiarity with any book by learning it by heart or by

frequent recitation.

(17) Cattle.

(18) A sound, a word.

(19) A known quantity. (20) A beast.

(21) A verse.

(22) A name.

(23) The white colour. (rūpa is frequently used at the end of comp. in

the sense of ‘formed or composed of,’ ‘consisting of,’ ‘in the form of,’

‘namely;’ ‘having the appearance or colour of,’ taporūpaṁ dhanaṁ;

dharmarūpaḥ sakhā &c.).

— Comp.

–adhibodhaḥ the perception of form or colour of any object by the

senses.

–abhigrāhita a. caught in the act, caught red-handed.

–asraḥ Cupid.

–ājīvā a harlot, prostitute, courtezan.

–āśrayaḥ an exceedingly beautiful person.

–iṁdriyaṁ the organ which perceives form and colour, the eye.

–uccayaḥ a collection of lovely forms; S. 2. 9.

–kāraḥ, –kṛt m. a sculptor.

–grahaḥ the eye.

–jña a. perceiving forms, distinguishing visible objects.

–tattvaṁ inherent property, essence.

–dhara a. of the form of, disguised as; jugopa

gorūpadharāmivormīm R. 2. 3.

–dhārin a. 1. having a form or shape. –2. possessed of beauty,

lovely. (–m.) an actor.

–nāśanaḥ an owl.

–bhāgānubaṁdhaḥ the addition of a fraction to a unit.

–lāvaṇyaṁ exquisiteness of form, elegance.

–viparyayaḥ disfigurement, morbid change of bodily form.

–śālin a. beautiful.

–saṁpad, –saṁpattiḥ f. perfection or excellence of form, richness

of beauty, superb beauty; udapādi cāsyā rūpasaṁpadā

āvirbhūtavismayasya tasya manasi K.

rohiṇī f. (f. of “rohita”, “red”, below; also f. of “rohin” above ) a red cow

or [later] any cow (represented as a daughter of Surabhi and mother of

cattle, esp. of Kāma-dhenu, “cow of plenty”; in the Veda, Rohiṇī may

perhaps also mean “a red mare”) &c. &c.

f. N. of the ninth Nakshatra or lunar asterism and of the lunar day

belonging to it (in this sense it may optionally have the accent on the last

syllable; it is personified as a daughter of Daksha, and as the favourite

wife of the Moon, called “the Red one” from the colour of the star

Aldebaran or principal star in the constellation which contains 5 stars,

prob. [characters] Tauri, and is figured by a wheeled vehicle or

sometimes by a temple or fish; it is exceptionally pl., and in and there

are 2 Nakshatras of this name; it may also be used as an adj. and mean

“born under the Nakshatra Rohiṇī” 1)

f. lightning

f. a young girl (in whom menstruation has just commenced; others “a

girl nine years of age”)

f. N. of various plants (= Helleborus Niger; Acacia Arabica; Gmelina

Arborea &c.

f. inflammation of the throat (of various kinds)

rohiṇī f. (in music) a partic. śruti

f. a partic. Mūrchanā

f. a kind of steel

f. N. of two wives of Vasudeva and the mother of Bala-rāma

f. of a wife of Kṛiṣṇa

f. of the wife of Mahā-deva

f. of a daughter of Hiraṇya-kaśipu

f. of one of the 16 Vidyā-devīs

f. of a river

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

rohiṇī

(1) A red cow.

(2) A cow in general; Śi. 12. 40.

(3) N. of the fourth lunar mansion (containing five stars) figured by a

cart; she was one of the several daughters of Daksha and is regarded as

the most favourite consort of the moon; uparāgāṁte śaśinaḥ samupagatā

rohiṇī yogaṁ S. 7. 22.

(4) N. of wife of Vasudeva and mother of Balarāma.

(5) A young girl in whom menstruation has just commenced;

navavarṣā ca rohiṇī.

(6) Lightning.

(7) Inflammation of the throat.

— Comp.

–aṣṭamī the eighth day in the month of Bhādrapada (when the

moon is in conjunction with Rohiṇī.)

–patiḥ, –priyaḥ, –vallabhaḥ the moon.

–ramaṇaḥ 1. a bull. –2. the moon.

–śakaṭaḥ the constellation Rohiṇī figured by a cart;

rohiṇīśakaṭamarkanaṁdanaścedbhinatti rudhiro’thavā śaśī Pt. 1. 213

(=Bṛ. S. 47. 14.).

–sutaḥ, –bhavaḥ Mercury.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

rohiṇī s. u. rohita und rohin.

rohiṇī f. “eine Art Stahl” ŚKDR. u. vajra.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

rohiṇī 1 I The mother of all the cows. The following is a story about the

origin of Rohiṇī, given in Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Araṇya Kāṇḍa, Sarga 14.

rohiṇī 2 II

rohiṇī 3 III The mother of Balabhadrarāma.

rohiṇī 4 IV Niśā the third wife of the Agni (fire) called Manu or Bhānu

gave birth to a daughter named Rohiṇī. Because she had done some

misdeeds, she became the wife of Hiraṇyakaśipu. (M.B. Vana Parva,

Chapter 221).

rohiṇī 5 V The mother of Utatthya, a famous hermit. (For details see

under Satyatapas).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

rohiṇī -> rohita.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

rohiṇī rohiṇ-ī, a. f. of roh-in, and rohita; f. (roh-) red cow; (roh- or -iṇī), N.

of a lunar mansion (consisting of five stars and variously regarded as

resembling a cart, a temple, or a fish; personified as a daughter of Dakṣa

and favourite wife of the moon); lunar day connected with Rohiṇī; young

girl in whom menstruation has just commenced; cow (C.); N. of the wife

of Vasudeva and mother of Balarāma: -kānta, m. moon;

-tanaya, m. met. of Balarāma;

-taru, m. a certain tree;

-pati, -priya, m. moon;

-yoga, m. conjunction of the moon with the asterism Rohiṇī;

-ramaṇa, m. moon;

-īśa, m. id.;

-śakaṭa, m. cart of Rohiṇī (the asterism).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

rohiṇī strī, (ruh + inan . gaurāditvāt ṅīṣ .) strīgavī . ityamaraḥ .. (yathā,

māghe . 12 . 40 .

prītyā niyuktāllihatīḥ stanandhayānnigṛhya pārīmubhayena jānunoḥ .

vardhiṣṇudhārādhvani rohiṇīḥ payaściruṁ nidadhyau duhataḥ sa

goduhaḥ ..) taḍit . kaṭumbharā . (yathāsyāḥ paryāyaḥ .

kaṭvī tu kaṭukā tiktā kṛṣṇabhedā kaṭumbharā .

aśokā mandyaśakalā cakrāṅgī śakulādanī .. iti bhāvaprakāśaśya

pūrbakhaṇḍe prathame bhāge ..) somavalkaḥ . (yathāsyāḥ paryāyo

ratnamālāyām .

kaṭphalaḥ somavalkākhyaḥ somavṛkṣaśca rohiṇī .. mahāśvetā .

tatparyāyo yathā —

kaṭabhī kinihī śvetā mahāśvetā ca rohiṇī .. iti vaidyakaratnamālāyām

..) lohitā . iti medinī . ṇe, 37 .. jinānāṁ vidyādevīviśeṣaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ

.. kāśmarī . harītakī . mañjiṣṭhā . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. kapilavarṇā

vartulākārā virecane praśastā harītakī . iti rājavallabhaḥ .. * ..

baladevamātā .. sā vasudevabhāryā kaśyapapatnīsurabhyaṁśajātā .

yathā —

devakī rohiṇī ceme vasudevasya dhīmataḥ .

rohiṇī surabhirdevī aditirdevakī hyabhūt .. iti mahābhārate harivaṁśaḥ

.. * .. surabhikanyā . yathā — śrīmārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

dakṣasya tanayā yābhūt surabhirnāma nāmataḥ .

gavāṁ mātā mahābhāgāgā sarvalokopakāriṇī ..

tasyāntu tanayā jajñe kaśyapāttu prajāpateḥ .

nāmnā sā rohiṇī śubhrā sarvakāmadughā nṛṇām ..

tasyāṁ yajñe śūrasenādbasoriti tapojjalāt .

kāmadhenuriti khyātā sarvalakṣaṇasaṁyutā .. iti kālikāpurāṇe

śeṣādhyāyaḥ .. * .. navavarṣīyā kanyā . yathā —

aṣṭavarṣā bhavedgaurī navavarṣā tu rohiṇī .

daśame kanyakā proktā ata ūrdhvaṁ rajasvalā .. ityudvāhatattvam .. *

.. (pañcavarṣā kumārī . yathā, devībhāgavate . 3 . 26 . 42 .

rohiṇī pañcavarṣā ca ṣaḍvarṣā kālikā smṛtā .. roganāśāyaivāsyāḥ pūjā

kartavyā . yathā, tatraiva . 3 . 26 . 48 .

rohiṇīṁ roganāśāya pūjayedbidhivannaraḥ .. asyāḥ pūjāmantro yathā,

tatraiva . 3 . 26 . 56 .

rohayantī ca bījāni prāgjanmasañcitāni vai .

yā devī sarvabhūtānāṁ rohiṇoṁ pūjayāmyaham .. hiraṇyakaśipukanyā

. yathā, mahābhārate . 3 . 220 . 18 .

kanyā sā rohiṇī nāma hiraṇyakaśipoḥ sutā .. * .. rohiṇi + pakṣe ṅīṣ .)

aśvinyādisaptaviṁśatinakṣatrāntargatacaturthanakṣatram . tatparyāyaḥ .

rohiṇiḥ 2 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. brāhmī 3 . iti hemacandraḥ .. (yathā,

mahābhārate . 1 . 146 . 33 .

aṣṭame’hani rīhiṇyāṁ prayātāḥ phālaguṇasya te .

vāraṇāvatamāsādya dadṛśurnāgaraṁ janam ..) tatta śakulākṛti

pañcatārātmakam . tasyādhiṣṭhātrī devatā brahmā . gaganamadhye udite

sati siṁhalagnasya aṣṭatriṁśatpalādhikadaṇḍatritayaṁ gataṁ bhavati .

yathā —

kambukaṇṭhi ! śakulākṛtau nabhomadhyamāgatavati prajāpatau .

pañcabhe gajakupakṣaliptikā niḥsṛtāḥ sumukhi ! siṁhalagnataḥ .. iti

kālidāsakṛtarātrilagnanirūpaṇam .. * .. tatra jātaphalaṁ yathā —

syāddharmakārye kuśalaḥ kulīnaḥ sucārudeho vilasatkalevaraḥ .

smarāgninākulitākhilāśayo yo rohiṇījaḥ sa dhanī sa mānī .. iti

koṣṭhīpradīpaḥ .. * .. galarogaviśeṣaḥ . yathā . rohiṇīnāmakagalarogāṇāṁ

nāmāni saṁkhyāñcāha .

rohiṇī pañcadhā proktā kaṇṭhaśālūka eva ca .

adhijihvaśca valayo’lāsanāmairavṛndakaḥ ..

tato vṛndaḥ śataghnī ca gilāyuḥ kaṇṭhavidradhiḥ .

galaughaḥ prasvaraghnaśca māṁsatālastathaiva ca .

vidāhī kaṇṭhadeśe tu rogā aṣṭādaśa sbhṛtāḥ .. tatra pañcānāmapi

rohinīnāṁ sāmānyasaṁprāptimāha .

gale’nilaḥ pittakaphau ca mūrchitau pradūṣya māṁsañca tathaiva

śoṇitam .

galopasaṁrodhakaraistathāṅkurairnihantyasūn vyādhiriyaṁ hi rohiṇī ..

anilaḥ mūrchitaḥ pravṛddhaḥ kaphapittau ca mūrchitau pittaṁ vā

mūrchitaṁ kapho vā mūrchitaḥ . nanu trayo’pi mūrchitāḥ pṛthagdoṣajāyā

avivakṣamāṇatvāt .. tasyā vātajāyā lakṣaṇamāha .

jihvāsamantādbhṛśavedanāstu māṁsāṅkurāḥ kaṇṭhavirodhanāḥ syuḥ .

sā rohiṇī vātakṛtā pradiṣṭā vātātmakopadravagāḍhajuṣṭā ..

jihvāsamantāt jihvāyāḥ sarvataḥ . vātātmakopadravagāḍhajuṣṭā

stambhādibhiratiśayena yuktā .. pittajāmāha .

kṣiprodgamā kṣipravidāhapākā tīvrajvarā pittanimittajātā ..

śleṣmajāmāha .

srotonirodhinyapi mandapākā gurvī sthirā sā kaphasambhavā tu ..

sroto’tra kaṇṭhasrotaḥ .. * .. sannipātajāmāha .

gambhīrapākinyanivāryavīryā tridoṣaliṅgā tribhavā bhavet sā ..

raktajāmāha .

sphoṭaiścitā pittasamānaliṅgā sādhyā pradiṣṭā rudhirātmikā tu ..

raktajetarāsaṁhārakatvāvadhimāha .

sadyastridoṣajā hanti tryahāt kaphasamudbhavā .

pañcāhāt pittasambhūtā saptāhāt pavanotthitā .. kaṇṭhaśālūkamāha .

kolāsthimātraḥ kaphasambhavo yo granthirgale kaṇṭakaśūkabhūtaḥ .

kharaḥ sthiraḥ śastranipātasādhyastaṁ kaṇṭhaśālūkamiti bruvanti ..

kaṇṭakaśūkabhūtaḥ kaṇṭakavacchūkavadvedanājanakaḥ .. adhijihvāmāha .

jihvāgrarūpaḥ śvayathuḥ kaphāttu jihvopariṣṭādasṛjaiva miśrāt .

jñeyo’dhijihvaḥ khalu roga eṣa vivarjayedāgatapākamenam .. asṛjā

miśrādevetyanvayaḥ .. * .. balayamāha .

valāśa evāyatamunnatañca śothaṁ karotyannagatiṁ nivārya .

taṁ sarvathaivāprativāryavīryaṁ vivarjanīyaṁ valayaṁ vadanti ..

alāsamāha .

gale tu śothaṁ kurutaḥ pravṛddhau śleṣmānilau śvāsarujopapannam .

marmacchidaṁ dustaramenamāhuralāsasaṁjñaṁ bhiṣajo vikāram ..

marmacchidaṁ hṛdayamarmaṇi chedeneva vedanājanakam ..

ekavṛndamāha .

vṛttonnato’ntaḥ śvayathuḥ sadāhaḥ sakaṇḍuro’pākyamṛdurguruśca .

nāmnaikavṛndaḥ parikīrtyate’sau vyādhirbalāśaḥ kṣatajaprasūtaḥ ..

antaḥ galamadhye . apākī īṣat pākī . amṛduḥ īṣanmṛduḥ .. * .. vṛndamāha

.

samunnataṁ vṛttamamandadāhaṁ tīvrajvaraṁ vṛndamudāharanti .

taccāpi pittakṣatajaprakopādvidyāt satodaṁ pavanātmakantu .. * ..

śataghnīmāha .

vartirghanā kaṇṭhanirodhinī tu citātimātraṁ piśitaprarohaiḥ .

anekaruk prāṇaharī tridoṣā jñeyā śataghnīsadṛśī śataghnī .. ghanā

kaṭhinā . anekaruk vātapittakaphajatodadāhakaṇḍvādiyuktā .

śataghnīsadṛśī lohakaṇṭakasaṁchannā śataghnī mahatī śilā . tattulyā

yataḥ prāṇaharī .. * .. gilāyumāha .

granthirgale tvāmalakāsthimātraḥ sthiro’lparuk syāt kapharaktamūrtiḥ

.

saṁlakṣyate śaktamivāsitañca sa śastrasādhyastu gilāyusaṁjñaḥ ..

galavidradhimāha .

sarvaṁ galaṁ vyāpya samutthito yaḥ śopho rujaḥ santi ca yatra

sarvāḥ .

sa sarvadoṣairgalavidradhistu tasyaiva tulyaḥ khalu sarvajasya .. * ..

galaughamāha .

śotho mahān yastu galāvarodhī tīvrajvaro vāyugaternihantā .

kaphena jāto rudhirānvitena gale galaughaḥ parikīrtyate’sau ..

vāyugaternihantā udānavāyugatirodhakaḥ .. * .. svaraghnamāha .

yastāmyamānaḥ śvasiti prasaktaṁ bhinnasvaraḥ śuṣkavimuktakaṇṭhaḥ

.

kaphopaduṣṭeṣvanilāyaneṣu jñeyaḥ sa rogah śvasanāt svaraghnaḥ ..

tāmyamānaḥ tamaḥ paśyan . śuṣkavimuktakaṇṭhaḥ śuṣko

vimukto’svādhīnaḥ kaṇṭho yasya saḥ . asvādhīnatā bhuktaṁ gilituṁ

aśakyatvāt . anilāyaneṣu vāyuvartmasu . śvasanādvātāt .. * ..

māṁsatānamāha .

pratānavān yaḥ śvayathuḥ sukaṣṭo galoparodhaṁ kurute krameṇa .

sa māṁsatānaḥ kathito’valambī prāṇapraṇut sarvakṛto vikāraḥ ..

pratānavān vistāravān . sukaṣṭaḥ atiśayitaṁ kaṣṭaṁ yatra saḥ .. * ..

vidārīmāha .

sadāhatodaṁ śvayathuṁ sutāmramantargale pūtiviśīrṇamāṁsam .

pittena vidyādbadane vidārīṁ pārśve viśeṣāt sa tu yena śete .. śārśve

viśeṣāt sa tu yena śete sa puruṣo yena pārśvena viśeṣādbāhulyena śete

tasmin pārśve sā vidārī bhavati ityarthaḥ .. * .. atha galarogāṇāṁ cikitsā .

rohiṇīnāntu sādhyānāṁ hitaṁ śoṇitamokṣaṇam . vamanaṁ

dhūmapānañca gaṇḍūṣo nasyakarma ca .. vātajāntu hṛte rakte lavaṇaiḥ

pratisārayet . sukhoṣṇān snehagaṇḍūṣān dhārayeccāpyabhīkṣṇaśaḥ ..

visrāvya pittasaṁbhūtāṁ sitākṣaudrapriyaṅgubhiḥ . gharṣayet kavalo

drākṣāparūṣaiḥ kathito hitaḥ .. āgāradhūmakaṭukaiḥ kaphajāṁ

pratisārayet . āgāradhūmaḥ jhūla iti loke . kaṭukāni śuṇṭhīpippalīmaricāni .

śvetāviḍaṅgadantīṣu tailaṁ siddhaṁ sasaindhavam .

nasyakarmaṇi dātavyaṁ kavalañca kaphocchraye .. śvetā aparājitā .

pittavat sādhayedbaidyo rohiṇīṁ raktasambhavām .

visrāvya kaṇṭhaśālūkaṁ sādhayettuṇḍikerivat ..

ekakālaṁ yavānnañca bhuñjīta snigdhamalpaśaḥ .

upajihvakavaccāpi sādhayedadhijihvakam ..

ekavṛndantu visrāvya vidhiṁ śodhanamācaret .

ekavṛndamiva prāyo vṛndañca samupācaret ..

gilāyuścāpi yo vyādhistañca śastreṇa sādhayet .

amarmasthaṁ susaṁpakvaṁ chedayedgalavidradhim .. iti

bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. (sthūle, tri . yathā, mahābhārate . 2 . 61 . 33 .

naiva hnasvā na mahatī na kṛśā nāpi rohiṇī .

nīlakuñcitakeśī ca tayā dīvyāmyahaṁ tvayā ..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

rohiṇī strī ruha–inan gaurā° ṅīṣ . 1 strīgavyām amaraḥ aśvinyavadhike

caturthe 2 nakṣatre jyo° 3 vasudevapatnyāṁbalabhadramātari, 4 vidyuti,

5 kaṭutumbvyāṁ, 6 sopravalake ca medi° . rohita + striyāṁ ṅīp tasya

natve ṇatvam . 7 raktavarṇayatyāṁ striyām . sā ca 8 haritakyām, 9

kāśmaryām, 10 mañjiṣṭhāyāśca rājani° . 11 surabhikanyāyāṁ kālisāpu°

aṣṭavarṣā bhavet gaurī navavarṣā ca rohiṇī smṛtyuktāyāṁ navavarṣāyāṁ

12 kanyāyāṁ 13 galarogabhede bhāvapra° rohiṇīnāmakagalarogāṇāṁ

nāmāni saṁkhyāñcāha rohiṇī pañcaṣā proktā kaṇṭhaśālūka eva ca .

adhijihvaśca valayo’lāsanāmaikavṛndakaḥ . tato vṛndaḥ śataghnī ca

gilāyuḥ kaṇṭhaviḍhradhiḥ . galaughaḥ prasvaraghnaśca

māṁsatālastaṣaiva ca . vidāhī kaṇṭhadeśe tu rogā hyāṣṭhāviti smṛtāḥ .

tatra pañcānāmapi rohiṇīnāṁ sāmānyasaṁprāptimāha gale’nilaḥ

pittakaphau ca mūrchitau pradūṣya māṁsañca tathaiva śoṇitam .

galopasaṁrodhakaraistadhāṅkurairnihantya sūn vyādhiriyaṁ hi rohiṇī .

anilaḥ mūrchitaḥ pavṛddhaḥ kaphapittau ca mūrchitau vittaṁ vā

mūrchitaṁ kapho vā mūrchitaḥ na tu trayo’pi mūrchitāḥ pṛthagdoṣajāyā

avivakṣyamāṇatvāt . tasyā vātajāyālakṣaṇamāha

kihvāsamantādbhṛśavedanāstu māṁsāṅgurāḥ kaṇṭhavirodhanāḥ syuḥ . sā

rohiṇī vātakṛtā pradiṣṭhā vātātyakopadrava gāḍhayuktā . jihvāsamantāt

jihvāyāḥ sarvataḥ . vātātmakopadravagāḍhayuktā stambhādibhiratiśayena

yuktā . pittajāmāha kṣiprodgamā kṣiprayidāhapākā tīvrajvarā

pittanimittajātā . śleṣmajāmāha srotonirodhinyapi mandapākā gurvī sthirā

sā kaphasambhavā tu . sroto’tra kaṇṭhasrotaḥ . sannipātajāmāha

gambhīrapākimyanivārthyavīryā tridoṣaliṅgā tribhavā bhavet sā .

raktajāmāha sphoṭaiścitā pittasamānaliṅgā sādhyā pradiṣṭā rudhirātmikā

tu . raktajetarāsaṁhārakatvāvadhimāha sadyastridoṣajā hanti tryahāt

kaphasamuddhavā . pañcāhāt pittasambhūtā saptāhāt pavanotthitā .

infusion prepared from its bark is used to fix colour in dyeing)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

lākṣāprasādana m. “eine Art” Lodhra AK. 2, 4, 2, 21.

arithm. said of the 5th unknown quantity

lohitaka m. n. a ruby

lohitaka m. a sort of rice

lohitaka m. the planet Mars

lohitaka m. N. of a Stūpa

lohitaka m. (“-tikā”) f. a partic. vein or artery

lohitaka m. a species of plant

lohitaka n. bell-metal or calx of brass

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

lohitaka a. (tikā f.) Red. –kaḥ

(1) A ruby; Śi. 13. 52.

(2) The planet Mars.

(3) A kind of rice. –kaṁ

(1) Bell-metal.

(2) Calx of brass.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

lohitaka (von lohita) 1) adj. (f. lohitikā und lohinikā P. 5, 4, 30, Vārtt.). 1)

“röthlich, roth” P. 5, 4, 31. fg. (“vorübergehend roth” und “roth gefärbt).”

MBH. 2, 355 (= HARIV. 12658). -dhvaja 5, 2240. 7, 1105. HARIV. 11817.

R. 5, 55, 15. SUŚR. 1, 114, 14 (lohitikā). kopena P. 5, 4, 31, Sch. paṭa,

śāṭī 32, Sch. — 2) m. a) “Rubin” P. 5, 4, 30. AK. 2, 9, 93. H. 1064. — b)

“eine Reisart” SUŚR. 1, 195, 5. 11. — c) “der Planet Mars” ŚABDAM.

imŚKDR. — d) N. eines Stūpa HIOUEN-THSANG I, 140. — 3) f. lohitikā a)

“ein best. Blutgefäss” SUŚR. 1, 55, 1. 3. — b) “eine best. Pflanze” SUŚR.

2, 78, 18. — 4) n. “Glockengut” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

lohitaka lohita + ka,

I. adj. Red.

II. m.

1. A ruby.

2. The planet Mars.

III. n. Calx of brass.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

lohitaka lohita-ka, a. reddish, red; m. (?) ruby;

-kṣaya, m. loss of blood;

-tva, n. redness ;

-darśana, n. (appearance =) flow of blood;

-pāṁsu, a. having red earth;

-pā-tra, a. holding a red vessel in the hand;

-maya, a. blood-red;

-akkṣa, a. (ī) red-eyed;

-aṅga, m. (red-bodied), planet Mars.

m. patron. (also pl.) (cf. g. “gargādi”)

m. N. of a river, the Brahma-putra

m. of a sea

m. of a mountain

lauhitya m. (prob. n.) of a Tīrtha

lauhitya n. red colour, redness

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

lauhitya (von lohita) 1) m. a) patron. gaṇa gargādi zu P. 4, 1, 105.

lauhityāḥ HARIV. 1771 (st. dessen lohitāḥ 1465). — b) N. pr. eines

Flusses (der Brahmaputra) MED. j. 101. MBH. 2, 374. HARIV. 12830. R.

4, 40, 26. RAGH. 4, 81. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 6. 16, 16. MĀRK. P. 58, 13. —

c) N. pr. eines Meeres MBH. 1, 630. 2, 1100. 17, 33. HARIV. 12833. =

sāgara ŚABDAM. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 2, 1864 (nach

NĪLAK.). ŚATR. 1, 352. — e) N. pr. eines Tīrtha MBH. 3, 8144. 13, 1732.

einer Oertlichkeit Verz. d. Oxf. H. 339,a,44. In dieser Bed. eher n. — 3) n.

“Röthe” MED. vigatalauhitye savitari (vgl. u. lohitāy) SUŚR. 2, 160, 11.

SĀH. D. 215, 16. fg. 297, 2. Schol. zu KAP. 1, 59. — Vgl. lohitya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

lauhitya 1 I A country of Purāṇic fame. This country of out-castes was

conquered by Bhīma and he took from there different kinds of diamonds.

(Śloka 26, Chapter 30, Sabhā Parva).

lauhitya 2 II A sacred place constructed by the powers of Śrī Rāma. If

one bathes in a pond there one would become golden in colour. (Śloka 2,

Chapter 85, Vana Parva and Chapter 25, Anuśāsana Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

lauhitya lauhitya, i. e. lohita + ya, n. Redness.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

lauhitya m. a kind of rice, N. of a river etc.; n. redness.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

lauhitya lauhit-ya, m. pat. (fr. lohita), N. of a river, Brahmaputra; n.

redness.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

lauhitya na° lohitasya bhāvaḥ ṣyañ svārthe ṣyañ vā . 1 raktavarṇe 2

raktatve lohitāt saraso jāto lohityastu tato ‘bhavat ukte 3

brahmaputranadabhede . tīrṇalauhitye raghuḥ .

varṇaka m. a strolling player or singer

varṇaka m. a species of plant

varṇaka m. fragrant ointment

varṇaka m. N. of a man (pl. his descendants) g. “upakādi”

varṇaka m. or n. a model or specimen

varṇaka m. n. and (“ikā”) f. colour for painting, paint, pigment, unguent,

anything for smearing on the body &c. (ifc. f. “akā”)

varṇaka m. sandal

varṇaka mf (“ikā”) n. (“akā”) f. woven cloth

varṇaka mf (“ikā”) n. (“ikā”) f. a mask, dress of an actor &c. (“-

parigraha” m. the assumption of a mask or part)

varṇaka m. a pencil or brush for painting or writing

varṇaka m. kind, description

varṇaka m. a woman’s fragrant ointment

varṇaka m. (“akā” or “ikā”) f. fine gold, purity of gold

varṇaka n. a chapter, section of a book

varṇaka n. a circle, orb

varṇaka n. orpiment

varṇaka n. the red colouring or paint with which bride and bridegroom

are marked at weddings, the painting of the bride by the bridegroom and

of the bridegroom by the bride

varṇaka n. (ifc.) a letter or syllable

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

varṇaka (von varṇa) m. f. AK. 3, 6, 5, 38. 1) “Maske, Anzug eines

Schauspielers”: varṇakaiśchāditaḥ (könnte auch “Schminke” bedeuten;

vgl. Spr. 4796) BHAR. NĀṬYAŚ. 34, 78. 80. varṇikā f. dass.: -parigraha

MĀLATĪM.4,11. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 145,a,32. -parigrahaṇa PRAB. 3, 17.

varṇakā = tāntava (= prāvaraṇabhade “eine Art Ueberwurf, Mantel”

Comm.) P. 7, 3, 45, Vārtt. 8. kṛpaṇavarṇaka adj. DĀŚAK. 67, 8

(“Gesichtsfarbe” BENFEY). — 2) m. f. n. (das n. nicht zu belegen) “Farbe

zum Malen, – Bestreichen des Körpers”; = vilepana AK. 2, 6, 3, 35 (n.). H.

an. 3, 95. MED. k. 152 (f.). m. f. = nīlyādi MED. varṇaka ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY.

4, 15. MBH. 3, 14679. 4, 635. 13, 5039. 5237. 5506. SUŚR. 2, 152, 18.

392, 11. MṚCCH. 91, 10. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 27. KATHĀS. 20, 51.

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 273. MĀRK. P. 15, 29. DAŚAK. 131, 10. BHAṬṬ. 19, 11.

varṇikā WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 273. ŚĀK. 142, v. l. varṇakā ebend.

mṛditavarṇakā adj. f. R. 5, 16, 21. varṇikā “Dinte” TRIK. 1, 1, 127.

varṇaka n. “Auripigment” RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — 3) varṇikā f.

“Schreibstift, Schreibpinsel” HĀR. 269. — 4) etwa “Probestück”: vedhasaḥ

sarvasaundaryasargavarṇakasaṁnibhā von einem schönen Mädchen

gesagt KATHĀS. 28, 3. sarvasundaranirmāṇavarṇakāyeva yadvapuḥ 106,

10. sarovaram – samudranirmāṇe vidhāturiva varṇakam 46, 87. vyathāṁ

bhāvinirayakleśavarṇikām RĀJA-TAR. 4, 654. — 5) m. “eine best. Pflanze”

(nicht candana) SUŚR. 2, 324, 9. “Sandel”, m. H. an. f. MED. n. ŚABDAR.

im ŚKDR. — 6) am Ende eines adj. comp. “Silbe” ŚRUT. 34. — 7) n. so v.

a. “Kapitel, Abschnitt” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 221,b, No. 538. Verz. d. B. H. No.

612. — 8) m = cāraṇa “ein umherziehender Schauspieler, – Sänger” H. an.

MED. — 9) n. “Kreis” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 10) m. N. pr. eines Mannes,

pl. “seine Nachkommen” gaṇa upakādi zu P. 2, 4, 69. — 11) f.

“vorzügliches –, gereinigtes Gold” (kāñcanasyotkarṣaḥ) MED. — Vgl.

pānīyavarṇikā, vārivarṇaka.

varṇaka 1) Z. 6 kṛpaṇa- u. s. w. zu streichen, da an der angeführten

Stelle mit den Calc. Ausgg. kṛpaṇavarṇaṁ kamapi zu lesen ist; die Bed.

ist “Gesichtsfarbe.” — adj. (f. varṇikā) “schildernd” (mit gen.) PAT. a. a.

O.7,116,a.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

varṇaka varṇa + ka,

I. A substitute for varṇa, at the end of comp. adj., Daśak. in Chr. 184, 8

(kṛpaṇa-, Of a miserable complexion).

II. m., and f. kā, A paint, as indigo, orpiment, etc., Bhaṭṭ. 19, 16.

III. m. and n.

1. Perfume for the person.

2. Sandal.

IV. m.

1. A panegyrist.

2. A circle.

V. f. kā, Touch or purity of gold.

— Comp. tri-, n. the three myrobalans, Suśr. 1, 161, 5.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

varṇaka f. varṇikā painting, representing; s. specimen, pattern; f. varṇikā

paint, ointment (also m.), mask, dress of an actor.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

varṇaka varṇa-ka, a. (ikā) describing; m. n. specimen, model; m.

pigment, unguent, paint; n. section, chapter (rare);

-krama, m. order of the castes;

-guru, m. king;

-grathanā, f. artificial method of writing verses;

-caura, m. thief of the colour of = resembling (g.) in hue;

-jyāyas, cpv. superior by caste;

-jye-ṣṭha, spv. higher or highest by caste.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

varṇaka na° varṇayati varṇa–ṇvul . 1 haritāle ratnamā° 2 anu

lepanayogye amaraḥ 3 piṣṭe 4 ghṛṣṭe vā candanādau dravye ca . 5

hiṅgalādau puṁstrī° bharataḥ 6 maṇḍane śabdara° . ekasyaiva sūtrādeḥ

pakṣāntaravyākhyānarūpe 5 granthabhede na° lipsāsūtre tṛtīyavarṇake

mitā° . 8 cāraṇe pu° medi° .

vilohita “vi-lohita” (“vi-“) mfn. deep-red &c.; m. N. of śiva ; of Rudra and

Fire (is identified with Rudra) ; a kind of onion ; N. of a hell ; (“ā”) f. N. of

one of the 7 tongues of fire (v.l. “su-lohitā”)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

vilohita a.

(1) Of a purple colour.

(2) Reddish, red; dhanurdharaḥ kopavilohitākṣaḥ R. 16. 77. –taḥ N. of

Rudra. –tā One of the tongues of fire.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vilohita (2. vi + lo-) m. “eine best. Krankheit” AV. 9, 8, 1. 12, 4, 4.

vilohita (wie eben) 1) adj. “hochroth” (nach MAHĪDH.) VS. 16, 7. 52.

krodhavilohitākṣa HARIV. 13164. RAGH. 16, 77. pāṁsuvilohitarūpa (rāhu)

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 59. vigraha der Sonne MĀRK. P. 107, 7. Beiw. Śiva’s

MBH. 7, 2877. 8, 1447. 10, 256. 12, 10359. 14, 202. — 2) f. ā N. einer der

sieben Flammenzungen MUṆḌ. UP. bei MAHĪDH. zu VS. 17, 79. sulohitā

die gedr. Ausg. 1, 2, 4.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

vilohita A Rākṣasa (giant) who was the son of Kaśyapa. It is mentioned

in Vāyu Purāṇa, Chapter 69, that Vilohita had three heads, three legs and

three hands.

vilohita(m) A hell. (See the section Naraka under Kāla).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vorukhāna m. “ein Pferd von blassrother Farbe” H. 1240. wohl nach einem

Lande, vielleicht Hyrkanien, benannt.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

vorukhāna vorukhāna, m. A horse described as of red and white colour.

śikhara mfn. pointed, spiked, crested

śikhara m. n. a point, peak (of a mountain), top or summit (of a tree),

edge or point (of a sword), end, pinnacle, turret, spire &c.

śikhara m. erection of the hair of the body

śikhara m. the arm-pit

śikhara m. a ruby-like gem (of a bright red colour said to resemble ripe

pomegranate seed)

śikhara m. (?) the bud of the Arabian jasmine (cf. “-daśanā”)

śikhara m. N. of a mythical weapon (“astra”)

śikhara m. a partic. position of the fingers of the hand

śikhara m. N. of a man

śikhara m. N. of a partic. mythical club (“gadā”)

śikhara m. = “karkaṭa-śṛṅgī”

śikhara n. cloves

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śikhara (von śikhā) gaṇa aśmādi zu P. 4, 2, 80. 1) adj. “spitzig, zackig”:

keśairarālairdaśanaiḥ śikharaiḥ KATHĀS. 45, 235. -daśanā MEGH. 80

(nach einem Schol. “Zähne wie Jasminknospen habend”).

śikharamutpalam = karkaṭaśṛṅgī AUSH. 95. Vgl. śikharin. — 2) m. n. gaṇa

ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. TRIK. 3, 5, 10. a) “Spitze” eines Berges AK. 2,

3, 4. TRIK. 3, 3, 374. H. 1032. H. an. 3, 610. fg. MED. r. 227. fg. HALĀY.

2, 11. giri- ŚĀÑKH. BR. 26, 1. uttama Ind. St. 2, 194. MBH. 1, 1185. 3,

2441. HARIV. 6937. R. 2, 33, 26. 56, 10. 69, 8. 94, 4. 3, 61, 8. 68, 13. 4,

1, 9. 8, 5. 5, 87, 8 (masc.). 6, 83, 42 (masc.). KUMĀRAS. 5, 7. MEGH. 18.

75. ŚĀK. 167. VIKR. 10, 6. Spr. (II) 1193. 4564. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 12, 1.

16, 35. 24, 2. KATHĀS. 18, 395. 22, 224. 31, 25. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 166. Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 52, “b”, 11. fg. BHĀG. P. 5, 16, 17. ŚUK. in LA. (III) 32, 17.

PAÑCAT. 120, 9. valmīka- 9, 7. eines Baumes AK. 2, 4, 1, 12. TRIK. 2, 3,

2. 3, 3, 374. H. 1121. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 26. HARIV. 6956. R. 3, 79,

2. 22. Spr. (II) 1312. 4929. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 8. “Giebel, Zinne” oder

“Thurm” (eines Palastes, eines Tempels u.s.w.) R. 2, 33, 3. R. GORR. 1,

5, 13. 2, 57, 18. 6, 104, 10. Spr. (II) 2161. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 56, 21. 27.

KATHĀS. 114, 19. PRAB. 79, 12. BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 16. 3, 23, 18. 4, 9, 56.

pṛṣṭha- “ein berghoher Rücken” (eines Elephanten) Spr. (II) 1324.

puccha- “äusserste Spitze des Schwanzes” (beim Fisch) Verz. d. Oxf. H.

129, “a”, No. 232. daśana- “Zahnspitze” GĪT. 1, 7. dhvajasya RĀJA-TAR.

3, 77. abhra- MBH. 1, 1112. 13, 836. vīci- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 27, 1. jvalana-

2. “ein spitzer Gegenstand” z. B. ein Nagel ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 22, 9. — b)

“das Sträuben der Härchen am Körper” (s. pulaka) TRIK. 3, 3, 374. H. an.

MED. — c) “ein Rubinstückchen von der Farbe eines reifen Granatkerns”

(pakvadāḍimabījābhamāṇikyaśakala) diess. — d) “Achselgrube” TRIK.

MED. wohl eher “Achsel”; vgl. bāhu-, bhuja-. — 3) m. “eine best. Stellung

der Hand” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 86,a,27. 202,a,6. — 4) n. “Gewürznelke” AUSH.

77. — 5) n. Bez. “eines best. mythischen Geschosses” (astra) R. 1, 29,

11. — 6) m. N. pr. eines Mannes KATHĀS. 67, 48. — 7) f. ā a) “Sanseviera

Roxburghiana Schult.” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N. “einer best.

mythischen Keule” (gadā) R. 1, 29, 8. — Vgl. tri-, bāhu- (HARIV. 4205),

bhuja-, vahni-, vaiḍūrya-, śekhara.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śikhara śikhara (cf. śikhā), m. and n.

1. Summit, Pañc. 9, 7; end.

2. The summit of a mountain, Bhartṛ. 2, 91; Vikr. 10, 6.

3. The top of a tree.

4. The edge or a point of a sword.

5. Horripilation.

6. The armpit.

7. A gem of a bright red colour; the bud of the Arabian jasmine, Megh.

80 (Sch.).

— Comp. tri-, adj. having three summits, the name of a mountain, Rām.

4, 44, 50.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śikhara a. peaked; m. n. peak, top, summit.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śikhara śikha-ra, a. pointed; m. n. peak, summit (of a mountain); tree-

top; pinnacle, turret; top; point (of a tooth); mountain of a (back of an

elephant, -°); N..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śikhara na° śikhā astyasya arac ālopaḥ . 1 parvatāgre 2 antamātre ca . 3

vṛkṣāgre pu° na° amaraḥ . 4 pulake 5 śuṣkatṛṇādau pakvadāḍimavīkṣābhe

6 ratnabhede 7 sakalāgre medi° . 8 koṭau trikā° . 9 mūrvāyāṁ strī

śabdaca° .

m. yellow ochre

m. red chalk

m. a white fossil substance

m. an aluminous earth of a white or yellowish colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śilādhātu m. “weisse Kreide” TRIK. 2, 3, 6. “eine best. gelbe mineralische

Substanz” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. – R. 2, 96, 2 (105, 2 GORR.). 5, 32, 37.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śilādhātu pu° śilāyā dhātuścaramadhāturiva śubhratvāt . 1 śvetopale

(khaḍī) trikā° . 2 pītavarṇe gairikabhede ca rājani° .

love (as “the horned” or “the strong one” ?), sexual passion or desire or

enjoyment &c.

śṛṅgāra m. (in rhet.) the erotic sentiment (one of the 8 or 10 Rasas q.v.;

it has Viṣṇu for its tutelary deity and black for its colour; accord. to most

authorities it is of two kinds, viz. “sambhoga”, “mutual enjoyment”, and

“vipralambha”, “deception, disappointment”, to which by some is added

as third “a-yoga”, “separation”) &c.

m. a dress suitable for amorous purposes, elegant dress, line

garments, finery &c.

m. the ornaments on an elephant (esp. red marks on its head and

trunk) (cf. “-dhārin”)

m. any mark

śṛṅgāra m. (also with “bhaṭṭa”) N. of various persons (esp. of a poet)

śṛṅgāra n. (only gold

śṛṅgāra n. red-lead

śṛṅgāra n. fragrant powder for the dress or person

śṛṅgāra n. cloves

śṛṅgāra n. undried ginger

śṛṅgāra n. black aloe-wood

śṛṅgāra mfn. handsome, pretty, dainty, fine

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śṛṅgāra (von śṛṅga wie vṛndāra von vṛnda) UṆĀDIS. 3, 136. m. n. SIDDH.

K. 249, “b”, 4. 1) adj. “schmuck”: vaktra R. 6, 95, 24. śṛṅgāraiḥ

suprahāraiśca kailāso madanāyate HARIV. 12007. -veṣābharaṇa adj.

MBH. 4, 2295. -veṣa adj. 5, 237. — 2) m. a) “Putz, Staat, schmucke

Kleider” Spr. (II) 1649. vasantaḥ saṁtatojjṛmbhitānaṅgaśṛṅgāra eva

DHŪRTAS. 69, 5. śṛṅgāraṁ vidhāya PAÑCAT. ed. orn. 32, 20. VET. in LA.

(III) 8, 18. ŚUK. ebend. 36, 4. kṛta- adj. (f. ā) PAÑCAT. ed. orn. 32, 24.

51, 15. mukta- 32, 23. sa- “geputzt” 49, 21. KATHĀS. 64, 131. MED. n.

214. “Schmucksachen eines Elephanten” TRIK. 3, 3, 375. H. an. 3, 614

(gajamaṇḍana st. rājamaṇḍana zu lesen). MED. 3, 231. HĀR. 204.

ŚĀŚVATA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3, 136. -dhārin R. 7, 35, 37. — b)

“Geschlechtsliebe; der erotische Grundton” (rasa) “in einem Kunstwerke”

AK. 1, 1, 7, 17. TRIK. 1, 1, 126. H. 229. 294. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 92.

5, 75. puṁsaḥ striyāṁ striyaḥ puṁsi saṁbhogaṁ prati yā spṛhā. sa

śṛṅgāra iti khyātaḥ krīḍāratyādikārakaḥ.. SUVARṆAREKHA bei UJJVAL. a.

a. O. śṛṅgaṁ hi manmathodbhedastadāgamanahetukaḥ.

uttamaprakṛtiprāyo rasaḥ śṛṅgāra iṣyate.. SĀH. D. 210. DAŚAR. 2, 13. 45.

R. 1, 4,7 (3, 46 GORR.). śṛṅgāraikaraso madanaḥ VIKR. 9. -lajjā ŚĀK. 14,

3. Spr. 3018. (II) 1911. RĀJA-TAR. 2, 121. 3, 484. 5, 230. 233. -śūra

PAÑCAR. 1, 10, 26. 11, 30. 14, 69. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 130, “a”, No. 236. 208,

“b”, 27. 213, “b”, 1. dharmārthakāmaistrividhaḥ śṛṅgāraḥ SĀH. D. 516.

dharma-, artha-, kāma- 193, 8. fgg. BHAR. NĀṬYAŚ. 18, 67. fgg.

saṁbhoga- SĀH. D. 226. 7, 7. -ceṣṭita 95. -ceṣṭā RAGH. 6, 12. HALĀY. 1,

89. — c) N. pr. verschiedener Männer Verz. d. Oxf. H. 210,a, No. 495.

RĀJA-TAR.8,329. 509. 2121. 2354. 2370. 2434. 2471. -bhaṭṭa 2427. — 3)

n. a) “Mennig” H. 1061, Schol. H. an. MED. — b) “Gewürznelke.” — c)

“Mehl, Pulver” H. an. MED. — d) “frischer Ingwer” (vgl. śṛṅgavera)

ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — e) “schwarzes Agallochum” (kālāguru) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śṛṅgāra śṛṅgāra (from śṛṅga, cf. the next),

I. m.

1. Copulation, coition, Pañc. i. d. 191.

2. Love, Vikr. d. 9; as an object of poetical description.

3. (m. or n.?), Elegant dress (properly, a dress for amorous

purposes), Pañc. 36, 18 (cf. my transl. n. 173).

4. Marks made with red lead on an elephant’s head and trunk.

5. Mark in general, Lass. 69, 5 (at the end of a comp. adj.).

II. n.

1. Red lead.

2. Cloves.

3. Fragrant powder for the dress or person.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śṛṅgāra a. fair, beautiful; m. ornament, fine dress, love, sexual passion, a

man’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śṛṅgāra śṛṅg-āra, a. handsome, fine (rare); fine garments, finery (also of

the ornamental trappings of an elephants); sexual love; erotic sentiment

in a poem (it is of two kinds, sambhoga- and vipralambha-śṛṅgāra); N.: –

ceṣ-ṭā, f. amatory gesture;

-mañjarī, f. N.;

-vat, a. erotic: -ī, f. N.;

-śata: -ka, n. hundred verses treating of love, T. of the first century of

Bhartṛhari;

-śekhara, m. N. of a king;

-siṁha, m. N..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śṛṅgāra pu° śṛṅga kāmodrekamṛcchatyanena ṛ–aṇ . 1 rasabhede amaraḥ

. 2 lavaṅge 3 sindūre 4 cūrṇe ca medi° . śṛṅgaṁ kāraṇatvena ṛcchati aṇ .

5 kālāguruṇi rājani° 6 ārdrake śabdaca° . śṛṅgaṁ

prādhānyamṛcchatyanena aṇ . 7 bhūṣaṇe 8 gajabhūṣaṇe ca . svārthe ka .

sindūre puṁsaḥ striyāṁ striyaḥ puṁsi saṁyogaṁ prati yā spṛhā . sā

śṛṅgāra iti khyātā ratikrīḍādikāraṇam ityukte 9

strīpuṁsayoranyonyasaṁyogaṁ pratīcchābhede ca

rasabhedalakṣaṇādikaṁ sā° da° uktaṁ yathā śṛṅgaṁ hi

manmathodbhedastadāgamanahetukaḥ . uttasaprakṛtiprāyo rasaḥ

śṛṅgāra iṣyate . paroḍhāṁ varjayitvātra veśyāñcānanurāgiṇīm .

ālambanaṁ nāyikāḥ syurdakṣiṇādyāśca nāyakāḥ .

candracandanarolambarutādyuddīpanaṁ matam .

bhūvikṣepakaṭākṣādiranubhāvaḥ prakīrtitaḥ .

tthaktvogryamaraṇālasyajugupsā vyabhicāriṇaḥ . sthāyī bhāvo ratiḥ

śyāmavarṇo’yaṁ viṣṇudaivataḥ . śūnyaṁ vāsagṛhamityādi . atra

uktasvarūpaḥ patiruktasvarūpā ca bālā ālambanavibhāvau . śūnyaṁ

vāsagṛhamuddīpanavibhāvaḥ . cumbanamanubhāvaḥ . lajjāhāsau

vyabhicāriṇau . etai° rabhivyaktaḥ sahṛdayaratibhāvaḥ śṛṅgārarūpatāṁ

bhajate . tadbhedāvāha . vipralambho’tha sambhoga ityeṣa dvividho

mataḥ . tatra vipralambho vipralambhaśabde uktaḥ sambhogastu

darśanasparśanādīni niṣevete vilāsinau . yatrānuraktāvanyonyaṁ

sambhogo’yamudāhṛtaḥ . ādiśabdādanyonyādharapānacumbanādayaḥ .

yathā śūnyaṁ vāsagṛhamityādi . saṁkhyātumaśakyatayā

cumbāparirambhaṇādibahubhedāt . ayameka eva dhīraiḥ kathitaḥ

sambhogaśṛṅgāraḥ . tatra syādṛtuṣaṭkaṁ candrādityau tathāstamayaḥ .

jalakelivanavihāraprāyamadhupānayāminīprabhṛtiḥ . anulepanabhūṣādyā

vācyaṁ śuci medhyamanyacca . tathā ca bharataḥ yatkiñcilloke śuci

medhyamujjvalaṁ darśanīyaṁ vā tatsarvaṁ śṛṅgāreṇopanīyate

upayujyate . kiñca kathitaścaturvidho’sā° vānantaryāttu pūrbarānādeḥ .

yaduktam na vinā vi pralambheṇa sambhogaḥ puṣṭimaśnute . kaṣāyite hi

vastrādau bhūyānrāgo vivardhate .

śoṇa m. redness

śoṇa m. fire

śoṇa m. Bignonia Indica or a variety of it

śoṇa m. red sugar cane

śoṇa m. a chestnut or bay horse

śoṇa m. the river śona or Sone (also “ā”, f.; it rises in Gondwana in the

district of Nagpore, on the table-land of Amara-kaṇṭaka, four or five miles

east of the source of the Narmadā [Nerbudda], and running first northerly

and then easterly for 500 miles falls into the Ganges above Pāṭali-putra or

Patnā) &c.

śoṇa m. N. of a partic. ocean

śoṇa m. of a man g. “naḍādi”

śoṇa m. of a prince of the Paṇcālas

śoṇa mf (“ā” or “ī”) n. (“ā”) f. see above

śoṇa n. blood

śoṇa n. red-lead

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śoṇa a. (ṇā or ṇī f.) [śoṇ-ac]

(1) Red, crimson, tinged red;

styānāvanaddhaghataśoṇitaśoṇapāṇiruttaṁsayiṣyati kacāṁstava devi

bhīmaḥ Ve 1. 21; āsvāditadvi daśoṇi taśoṇaśobhāṁ Mu. 1. 8; Ku. 1. 7.

(2) Bay, reddish-brown.

(3) Yellow. –ṇaḥ

(1) Crimson, the red colour.

(2) Fire

(3) A kind of red sugar-cane.

(4) A bay horse.

(5) N. of a male river, rising in Gondavana and falling into the Ganges

near Pātaliputra q. v.; pratyagrahītpārthivavāhinīṁ tāṁ bhāgīrathīṁ śoṇa

ivottaraṁgaḥ R. 7. 36.

(6) The planet Mars; cf. lohita. –ṇaṁ

(1) Blood.

(2) Red lead.

— Comp.

–aṁbuḥ N. of a cloud which is said to rise at the destruction of the

world.

–aśman m.,

–upalaḥ 1. a red stone. –2. a ruby.

–padmaṁ a red lotus.

–puṣpakaḥ the Kovidāra tree.

–ratnaṁ a ruby.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śoṇa 1) adj. (f. ā und ī P. 4, 1, 43. VOP. 4, 17) “roth, hochroth” AK. 1, 1,

4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 140. H. 1395. an. 2, 156. MED. ṇ. 31. fg. HALĀY. 4, 48.

ROSS H. 1242. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 282. ṚV. 1, 6, 2. 126, 4. 3, 35, 3. 5,

33, 9. 10, 20, 9. MBH. 3, 15597. 4, 1677. 1826. 6, 751. R. 5, 12, 35.

KATHĀS. 37, 162. 167. śoṇo dhāvati VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 105. vṛṣan

ṚV. 9, 97, 13. yadidaṁ ghṛte hute śoṇamivārcirujjvalati KĀṬH. 8, 9. TS. 7,

3, 18, 1. KUMĀRAS. 1, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 30, 22. -rāga KATHĀS. 23, 78.

109, 120. -śiras adj. (Vogel) HARIV. 1121. tālu 1145. mukha SĀH. D. 34,

4. oṣṭha KATHĀS. 35, 11. kara 105, 2. roṣasuśoṇadṛṣṭi BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 24.

maṇimālā CHANDOM. 53. śoṇita- Spr. (II) 1073. KĀVYAPR. (1866) 70,

13. SĀH. D. 146, 5. sindūra- KATHĀS. 19, 68. kuṅkuma- BHĀG. P. 10, 60,

8. amlāna AK. 2, 4, 2, 54. -padma GĪT. 3, 5. -padmaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

-saroja Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,b, No. 289, Z. 5. aśoṇa AV. 19, 60, 1 wohl

fehlerhaft für aśīrṇa. — 2) m. a) “Röthe” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1395. BHĀG.

P. 1, 11, 2. — b) “Feuer” H. an. MED. — c) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: =

śyonāka diess. = śyonākaprabheda und raktekṣu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d)

N. pr. eines in Amarakaṇṭaka entspringenden und bei Pāṭaliputra in die

Gañgā sich ergiessenden Flusses AK. 1, 2, 3, 33. TRIK. H. 1090. H. an.

MED. HALĀY. 3, 52. LIA. 1, 82. MBH. 2, 373. 796. 3, 8150. 12910. 14233.

HARIV. 9512. 12827. R. 1, 33, 20 (34, 18 GORR.). R. GORR. 1, 37, 4. 4,

40, 20. RAGH. 7, 33. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 65. 16, 1. 9. PRĀYAŚCITTEND.

11, “b”, 8. MĀRK. P. 57, 21. BHĀG. P. 5, 19, 18. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 255, “a”,

15. 339, “a”, 30. fg. 40. -saṁgama 39,b,25. gaṅgāśoṇam P. 2, 4, 7, Schol.

śoṇā f. MBH. 6, 337 (śoṇa VP. 183). — e) N. pr. eines Meeres DHAR. im

ŚKDR. — f) N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa naḍādi zu P. 4, 1, 99. ŚAT. BR. 13,

5, 4, 16. — 3) f. ā s. u. 2) d) am Ende. — 4) n. a) “Blut.” — b) “Mennig”

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. dadhi- und śauṇāyana.

śoṇa 2) d) am Ende, śoṇā f. auch R. ed. Bomb. 1, 31, 20. 35, 1.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śoṇa śoṇa, i. e. probably (although already in the Vedas). sa-varṇa,

I. adj.

1. Crimson, of a crimson colour, of chesnut colour, Vedāntas. in Chr.

214, 11.

2. Red in the face, from passion, etc.

II. m.

1. Crimson, the colour of the red lotus.

2. A horse of a reddish or bright chesnut colour, Vedāntas. in Chr. 214,

10.

3. Fire.

4. A red sort of sugar-cane.

5. The name of a river.

6. A flower, Bignonia indica.

III. n.

1. Blood.

2. Red lead.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śoṇa a. red, deep-red; m. redness, N. of a river.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śoṇa śoṇa, a. red, crimson; m. redness (C., rare); N. of a river, the Sone

or Red River which flows into the Ganges at Pāṭaliputra (C.): -tā, f.

redness;

-aśva, a. having red horses, ep. of Droṇa.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śoṇa ṛ gatau . varṇe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka°-varṇe

aka°-seṭ .) varṇaśceha raktībhāvaḥ . śoṇati sūryaḥ sandhyāyām . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śoṇa gato saka° varṇe aka° bhvā° para° seṭ . śoṇati aśīṇīt ṛdit caṅi na

hrasvaḥ .

śoṇa na° śoṇa–ac . 1 sindūre 2 rudhire ca rājani° . 3 raktekṣau 4

śoṇākabhede rājani° . 5 maṅgale grahe 6 agnau 7 citrake 8 nadabhede sa

ca amarakaṇṭakadeśagataḥ pāṭaliputrasannikṛṣṭe gaṅkāyāṁ militaḥ . 9

raktavarṇe pu° 10 tadvati tri° medi° . 11 samudrabhede dharaṇiḥ .

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śoṇīkṛ śoṇī-kṛ, colour blood-red.

“parvata” m. “snow-mountain” ; with “kaṭākṣa” m. “a bright side-glance”

&c. &c.

śveta m. white (the colour)

śveta m. a white horse

śveta m. a small white shell, cowry

śveta m. a silver coin

śveta m. a white cloud

śveta m. the planet Venus or its regent śukra

śveta m. a partic. comet (cf. “-ketu”)

śveta m. a partic. plant (= “jīvaka”)

śveta m. cumin seed

śveta m. N. of a serpent-demon (with “vaidārva” or “vaidārvya” or

“vaidarvya”; others give “śvaita-vaidārava” as signifying “a partic. deity

connected with the sun”)

śveta m. N. of one of Skanda’s attendants

śveta m. of a Daitya (son of Vipra-citti)

śveta m. of a Muni

śveta m. of a partic. Avatāra of śiva

śveta m. of a pupil of śiva 122 n. 3

śveta m. of a manifestation of Viṣṇu in his Varāha incarnation

(worshipped in a partic. part of India)

śveta m. of a Rājarṣi

śveta m. of a son of the king Sudeva

śveta m. of a general

śveta m. of a son of Vapushmat

śveta m. of a preceptor

śveta m. of a mythical elephant

śveta m. of the sixth range of mountains dividing the known continent

(the white or “snowy” mountains separating the Varshas of Hiraṇmaya

and Ramyaka) ( 420 n. 1)

śveta m. of one of the minor Dvīpas or divisions of the world (cf. “-

dvīpa”)

śveta mf (“ā” or “śvenī”) n. (“ā”) f. one of the seven tongues of Fire

śveta m. a small white shell, cowry

śveta m. N. of various plants (accord. to the birch tree, a white

bignonia, Boerhavia Procumbens, Achyranthes Atropurpurea &c.)

śveta m. crystal

śveta m. alum

śveta m. white or candied sugar

śveta m. bamboo-manna

śveta m. a mystical term for the letter “s”

śveta m. N. of one of the Mātṛis attendant on Skanda

śveta m. of the mother of the elephant śveta (or śaṅkha)

śveta m. of a princess

śveta mf (“ā” or “śvenī”) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a river

śveta n. the white of the eye

śveta n. the growing white (of the hair)

śveta n. silver

śveta n. butter-milk and water mixed half and half

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śveta a. (śvetā or śvenī f.) [śvitac ghañ vā] White; tataḥ

śvetairhayairyukte mahati syaṁdane sthitau Bg. 1. 14. –taḥ

(1) The white colour.

(2) A conchshell.

(3) A cowrie.

(4) The planet Venus.

(5) Śukra, the regent of the planet.

(6) A white cloud.

(7) Cumin seed.

(8) N. of a range of mountains; see kulācala or kulaparvata.

(9) N. of a division of the world. –taṁ Silver.

— Comp.

–aṁbaraḥ, –vāsas m. a class of Jaina ascetics.

–ikṣuḥ a kind of sugar-cane.

–udaraḥ an epithet of Kubera.

–kamalaṁ, –padmaṁ a white lotus.

–kuṁjaraḥ an epithet of Airāvata, the elephant of Indra.

–kuṣṭhaṁ white leprosy.

–ketuḥ 1. a Bauddha or Jaina saint. –2. the descending node.

–kolaḥ a kind of fish (śaphara). –gajaḥ, –dvipaḥ 1. a white

elephant. –2. the elephant of Indra.

–garut m.,

–garutaḥ a goose.

–chadaḥ 1. a goose. –2. a kind of basil.

–dvīpaḥ N. of one of the eighteen minor divisions of the known

continent.

–dhātuḥ 1. a white mineral. –2. chalk. –3. the milkstone.

–dhāman m. 1. the moon. –2. camphor. –3. the foam of the sea.

–4. cuttle-fish bone.

–nīlaḥ a cloud.

–patraḥ a goose. -rathaḥ an epithet of Brahman.

–parṇāśaḥ white basil.

–pāṭalā the white trumpetflower.

–piṁgaḥ a lion.

–piṁgalaḥ 1. a lion. –2. an epithet of Śiva.

–bhikṣuḥ a kind of white-robed mendicant; Pt. 3. 76.

–maricaṁ white pepper.

–mālaḥ 1. a cloud. –2. smoke.

–rakta a. pale-red, rosy. (

–ktaḥ) the pink or rosy colour.

–raṁjanaṁ lead.

–rathaḥ the planet Venus.

–rocis m. the moon.

–rohitaḥ an epithet of Garuḍa.

–valkalaḥ the glomerous fig-tree.

–vājin m. 1. the moon. –2. an epithet of Arjuna. –3. camphor.

–vāsas m. an ascetic wearing white garments.

–vāh m. an epithet of Indra.

–vāhaḥ 1. an epithet of Arjuna. –2. of Indra.

–vāhanaḥ 1. an epithet of Arjuna. –2. the moon. –3. a marine

monster (makara). –vāhin m. an epithet of Arjuna.

–śuṁgaḥ, –śṛṁgaḥ barley.

–hayaḥ 1. a horse of Indra. –2. an epithet of Arjuna. –3. N. of

Indra.

–hastin m. Airāvata, Indra’s elephant.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śveta (von 1. śvit) 1) adj. f. ā P. 4, 1, 39; nach VOP. 4, 27 fälschlich auch

śvenī, eine Verwechselung mit śyeta). “weiss, licht” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H.

1392. an. 2, 204. MED. t. 67. fg. HALĀY. 4, 47. Ross ṚV. 1, 116, 6. 119,

10. 7, 77, 3. 8, 41, 9. 10. AIT. BR. 6, 35. ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 3, 9. BHAG. 1, 14.

R. GORR. 2, 12, 11. HALĀY. 2, 282. ukṣaṇaḥ VĀLAKH. 7, 2. AV. 5, 17, 15.

20, 128, 6. Kuh TS. 2, 1, 8, 1. 4. śvetāyai śvetavatsāyai dugdhe TBR. 1, 7,

3, 7. KAUŚ. 120. govṛṣa R. GORR. 2, 12, 11. vṛṣabha MBH. 2, 415.

aśvatarī (vgl. śvetā aśvatarāḥ Ind. St. 3, 258) 1, 8008. R. 4, 16, 41. –

daśana 3, 36, 7. drapsa ṚV. 7, 87, 6. (agniḥ) citro yadabhrāṭ chveto na

vikṣu 1, 66, 6. 3, 1, 4. 5, 1, 4. 8, 40, 8. kalaśa des Soma 4, 27, 5. 9, 74, 7.

7, 90, 3. 91, 3. 8, 26, 19. 10, 20, 9. lakṣman AV. 1, 23, 4. parvatāḥ

“Schneeberge” ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 8, 9. carman KĀṬH. 34, 5. -pipīlikā KAUŚ.

116. — ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 8. mālyāni R. 2, 25, 26. śilāḥ 4, 9, 44. śvetaṁ

padaṁ śiroruhāṇām Spr. (II) 6599. 2104. RAGH. 1, 83. SUŚR. 1, 23, 3.

surā 189, 6. 2, 440, 5. śatapadī 290, 3. 297, 7. sarṣapa RATNAM. 113.

śvetotpala BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 10. yūkā PAÑCAT. 60, 24. -taṇḍulapiṣṭa

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 272. śoṇita HARIV. 8445. kamaṇḍalu MBH. 1, 1149.

kuṇḍalabhūṣaṇa HARIV. 2437. 13065. fg. 13070. śvetātapatra Spr. (II)

6495. BHĀG. P. 4, 4, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 25. 5, 53. 34, 23. 38, 3.

anatiśveta, anatikṛṣṇa LĀṬY. 1, 1, 7. Ind. St. 1, 51. triḥśvetā śalalī GOBH.

2, 7, 8. — 2) m. a) “Schimmel (Ross”) ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 22. — b)

“Otterköpfchen” H. ś. 172. H. an. “Muschel” überh. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

= jīvaka JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. “Kümmel” (dies wäre jīraka) WILSON nach

derselben Aut. — d) “eine weisse Wolke” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — e) “der

Planet Venus” ebend. — f) “ein best. Komet” (vgl. -ketu) VARĀH. BṚH. S.

11, 39. fg. 97, 3. — g) N. pr. a) eines Schlangendämons PĀR. GṚHY. 2,

14. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 18. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 3, 3. VP. 149. BHĀG. P. 5, 24, 31.

eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2566. eines Daitja, eines

Sohnes des Vipracitti, HARIV. 2437. 2651. eines Muni MBH. 1, 962.

KATHĀS. 72, 334. fgg. einer Incarnation Śiva’s Verz. d. Oxf. H. 52,a,14.

53,b,4. eines Schülers dieses Śveta 52,a,15. eines Rājarṣi MBH. 1, 226

(eig. 231). 12, 5743. 13, 5668. 7130. 7681. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 59, “a”, 20.

eines Sohnes des Fürsten Sudeva R. 7, 78, 4. eines Heerführers MBH. 6,

1868. 1870. śvetopākhyāna MBH. 1, 333 (viśvopākhyāna ed. Bomb.). R.

GORR. 1, 4, 140. eines Sohnes des Vapushmant MĀRK. P. 53, 27. eines

Lehrers Ind. St. 8, 222. fg. 364. — b) pl. eines Volkes VARĀH. BṚH. S. 16,

38. — g) eines Weltelephanten MBH. 1, 2630. — d) eines Berges (vgl. –

parvata, -śaila, śvetādri) H. an. MED. MBH.3,10820. 11527.

14429.6,198.9,3349. 13,7657. 14,1174. R.5,11,7. MĀRK. P. 54,9. VP. 167.

BHĀG. P.5,16,8. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 48,a,40. — e) eines Dvīpa (vgl. -dvīpa) H.

an. MED. MBH. 12, 12703. R. 7, 37, 5, 22. = śvetadvīpa bei Kāśī Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 57, “a”, N. 4. — 3) f. ā a) “Otterköpfchen” MED. — b) Bez.

verschiedener Pflanzen: = kāṣṭhapāṭalī (-pāṭalā) und śaṅkhinī H. an.

MED. “Boerhavia procumbens Roxb.” RATNAM. 25. “Birke” 94.

“Achyranthes atropurpurea Lam.” 160. = aparājitā, śvetabṛhatī,

śvetakaṇṭakārī, pāṣāṇabhedī, śilāvalkalā, śvetadūrvā, chūrikāpattrī

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. – SUŚR. 1, 144, 13. 2, 114, 8. 130, 21. 285, 7. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 44, 10 (= girikarṇikā Comm.). — c) Bez. verschiedener “weisser”

Stoffe: “Zucker”, = vaṁśarocanā und sphaṭī (von WILSON hier durch

“Krystall” wiedergegeben) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) mystische Bez. “des

Buchstabens” sa WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 317. 319. — e) N. pr. einer der

Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 6240. der Mutter des Weltelephanten

Śveta (Śañkha R.) MBH. 1, 2625. 2630. R. 3, 20, 22. einer Fürstin RĀJA-

TAR. 8, 375. — 4) n. a) “das Weisse im Auge” SUŚR. 2, 303, 13. — b)

“das Weisswerden der Haare” CHĀND. UP. 8, 14. — c) “Silber” AK. 2, 9,

97. 3, 4, 14, 82. TRIK. 2, 9, 32. H. 1043. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 5. — d)

“Buttermilch und Wasser zu gleichen Theilen gemischt” H. 409. — Vgl.

mahā-, śvaitya.

śveta 2) g) b) śvetahūṇāḥ besser als ein Name aufzufassen.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śveta 1 I A King in ancient India. By his moral and spiritual power he was

able to restore his dead son to life. He did not eat meat. Mahābhārata,

Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 150 mentions that he was one of the few

Kings who deserve to be remembered with reverence at dawn and dusk.

(M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 1, Verse 233; Śānti Parva, Chapter 153, Verse

68; Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 115, Verse 66).

śveta 2 II A King. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Dākṣiṇātya Pāṭha, Chapter

14 mentions that he was one of the prominent Kings in India.

śveta 3 III A son of the Virāṭa King. Śveta was the son of King Virāṭa by

his chief wife Surathā, who was a princess of Kosala. Śveta had attended

Yudhiṣṭhira’s Rājasūya. This distinguished warrior was killed by Bhīṣma in

Bhārata Yuddha. (M.B. Dākṣiṇātya Pāṭha, Virāṭa Parva, Chapter 16;

Sabhā Parva, Chapter 44, Verse 20; Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 48).

śveta 4 IV A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Mahābhārata, Śalya Parva,

Chapter 45, Verse 64).

śveta 5 V Son of the elder brother of King Sudeva. There is a story of

how Śveta, who was a sinner, attained mokṣa (salvation) by a vision of

sage Agastya. Towards the end of his life, Śveta attained Mokṣa by

performing austere tapas. But since he failed to earn God’s grace by

giving food to the hungry, even in Heaven, he was tormented by hunger

and thirst. His hunger was so severe that he began eating his own flesh.

At last as suggested by Brahmā he was born again on earth and after a

visit to Agastya re-entered Heaven.

śveta 7 VII A mountain in Uttarā Khaṇḍa. In Mahābhārata, Vana Parva,

Chapter 139, Verse 1, we find that the Pāṇḍavas crossed the Śveta

mountain during their life in the forest.

śveta 7i VIII A country situated on the northern side of the Nīla

mountain. The region known as “Hiraṇyakam” is situated to the north of

this country. (M.B. Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 6, Verse 37).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śveta śveta (i. e. śvit + a, or from śvi in śvit, śvind),

I. adj., f. tā and nī, White, Pañc. 60, 24; wearing a white dress, Pañc. iii.

d. 73.

II. m., and f. tā, A small white shell used as a coin.

III. m.

1. White (the colour).

2. A white cloud.

3. The planet venus.

4. A fabulous range of mountains.

5. One of the dvīpas, or divisions of the world.

6. A conch.

7. Cumin seed.

IV. f. tā.

1. Crystal.

2. Candied sugar.

3. The name of several plants.

V. n. Silver.

— Comp. mahā-, f. tā, 1. Sarasvatī. 2. candied sugar. 3. the name of two

plants.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śveta a. white, bright. m. white horse, N. of a serpent-demon etc.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śveta śvet-a, a. [śvit] white, bright; m. white horse (Br.); N.; n. (C.)

white (of the eye).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śveta pu° śvita–aca ghañ vā . 1 dvīpabhede 2 parvatabhede 3 kapardake

hemaca° . 4 śukragrahe 5 pubhrābhre śabdaca° . 6 śaṅkhe rājani° . 7

jīvake jaṭā° . 8 śuklavarṇe 9 tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca

śvenī . 10 kaliyugīyaśivāvatāraviśeṣe yathā vedadhyāsāvatārāṇi dvāpare

kathitāni tu . mahādevāvatārāṇi kalau śṛṇuta suvrata! . ādau kaliyuge

śveto devadevo mahādyutiḥ . nāmrā hitāya

viprāṇāmabhūdvaipakhate’nmare . himavacchisvare ramye chagale

parvatottame . tasya śiṣyāḥ śikhāyuktā bubhūvaramitaprabhāḥ . śvetaḥ

śvataśikhaścaiva śvetāsyaḥ śvetalohitaḥ . catvāraste mahātmāno

brāhmaṇā vedapāragāḥ . subhāvo damanaścātha suhotraḥ kaṅkaṇastathā

. lokākṣiratha yogāndro jaigīṣavyastu saptame . aṣṭame dadhibāhuḥ

syānnavame vṛṣabha prabhuḥ . bhṛgustu daśame proktastasmādugraḥ

paraḥ smṛtaḥ . dvādaśe’triḥ samākhyāto vālī cātha trayodaśe . caturdaśe

gautamastu vedaśīrṣā tataḥ param . gākaṇaścāmavattasmāt guhāvāsaḥ

śikhaṇḍyatha . jaṭāmālyaṭṭahāsaśca dāruko lāṅgalī kramāt . śvotastathā

paraḥ śūlī tiṇḍo muṇḍī ca vai kramāt . sahiṣṇuḥ somaśarmā ca

naṣkulīśo’ntime prabhuḥ . vaivasvate’ntare śambhoravatārāstriśūlanaḥ .

aṣṭāviṁśatirākhyātāhyante kaliyage prabhoḥ kaurma 50 a° .

śvetaparvatasya parimāṇādi yathā uttarottareṇelāvṛtaṁ nīlaḥ śvetaḥ

śṛṅavān iti trayo ramyakahiraṇamaya kurūṇāṁ maryādāgirayaḥ

prāgāyatāḥ ubhayataḥ kṣārodāvadhayo dvisahasnayojanapṛthava

ekaikaśaḥ pūrvasyāt pūrvasyāduttarodaśāṁśādhikāṁśena dairghya eva

hrasanti bhāga° . 5 . 16 . 11 rājabhede vahnipu° . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . rūpye

na° rājani° . kapardake pu° .

saṁdhyārāga “saṁ-dhyā-rāga” mfn. having the colour of twilight

saṁdhyārāga “saṁ-dhyā-rāga” n. red-lead

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

saṁdhyārāga m. “das rothe Glühen der Dämmerung” (eine best.

Naturerscheinung) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 19.

saṁdhyārāga 1) adj. “die Farbe der Dämmerung habend.” — 2) n.

“Mennig” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

saṁdhyārāga ZdmG.27, 62.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

saṁdhyārāga saṁdhyā-rāga, m. twilight glow;

-vandana, n. morning or evening prayers;

-vāsa, m. N. of a village;

-vidhi, m. morning or evening prayers;

-śaṅkha-dhvani, m. sound of a shell blow at the beginning of twilight;

-samaya, m. period of twilight, evening-tide;

-upasthāna, n. worship of twilight.

Sandhyārāga. Rāgiṇī the daughter of Himavān did penance to obtain

Paramaśiva as husband. The Devas took her before Brahmā, who said

that she was not able to bear the radiance of Śiva. Hearing this opinion

Rāgiṇī got angry and Brahmā cursed her and changed her into

Sandhyārāga. (See under Pārvatī).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sandhyārāga pu° sandhāyā iva rāgo’sya . 1 sindūre rājani° . 6 ta° .

sandhyākālīne 2 raktavarṇe ca .

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

saraktagaura adj. “hellroth” VARĀH. LAGHUJ. 2, 15 in Ind. St. 2, 286.

richtiger wohl sa ra- zu trennen; vgl. raktaśyāma.

sitalohita “sita-lohita” m. white and red colour

m. a proper N.

sindūra m. = “rocanī”

sindūra n. red lead, minium, vermilion &c.

sindūra n. (= “rakta-śāsana, rāja-lekha”, and “rāja-lekhitadakṣiṇa”

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sindūra UṆĀDIS. 1, 69. 1) m. a) “ein best. Baum” H. an. 3, 618. fg. MED.

r. 237. VIŚVAPR. bei UJJVAL. — b) N. pr. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 79,a,14. 19. — 2)

f. ī = raktacelikā, rocanī (rocanā) und dhātakī H. an. MED. VIŚVAPR. a. a.

O. = sindūrapuṣpī RĀJAN. 10, 73. — 3) n. AK. 3, 6, 3, 31. a) “Mennig” AK.

2, 9, 105. TRIK. 2, 9, 33. H. 1061. H. an. MED. (raktacū- st. raratnacū- zu

lesen). HĀR. 44. VIŚVAPR. a. a. O. RĀJAN. 13,52. ṚT.1,24. ZdmG.27,34.

GĪT.4,23. 11,34. KATHĀS. 12,169. 18,122. 19,68. 23,78. 24,1. 35,112.

44,1. 149. 54,77. 57,1. 72,7. NAIṢ 22,45. RĀJA-TAR.1,453. CAURAP.16.

PRAB. 81,9. 85,6. PAÑCAR.1,4,58. 11,13. 35. 14,61.2,4,40. fg. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 103,a,24. 121,b, No. 214. WILSON, Sel. Works 2,300. — b) =

rājalekha VIŚVAPR. a. a. O. = rājalekhitadakṣiṇa DHARANI (nach

AUFRECHT). = raktaśāsana (schwerlich “Mennig”, wie unter dem Worte

angegeben worden ist; vielleicht fehlerhaft für rājaśāsana) HĀR. 175.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

sindūra sindūra (vb. syand ?),

I. m. A sort of tree.

II. f. rī.

1. Red clothes.

2. The name of two plants.

III. n. Red lead, minium, Ṛt. 1, 24; Kathās. 23, 78 (red colour).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sindūra n. red lead, minium.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sindūra sindūra, n. red lead: -tilaka, m. forehead mark made with red

lead;

i-ta, pp. made to resemble red lead.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sindūra na° syanda–ūran saṁprasāraṇam . svanāmakhyāte raktavarṇe 1

cūrṇabhede amaraḥ 2 vṛkṣabhede pu° medi° . sīsopadhātuḥ sindūraṁ

guṇaistat sīsavanmatam . saṁyogajapabhāvena tasyāpyanye guṇāḥ

smṛtāḥ . sindūramuṣṇaṁ vīsarpakuṣṭhakaṇḍūviṣāpaham .

bhagnasandhānajananaṁ vraṇaśodhanaropaṇam dugdhāmlayogatastasya

viśuddhirgadito budhaiḥ bhāvapra° . bharturāyurvṛddhaye sadhaṣayā

taddhāraṇasyāvaśyakatā yaṣoktaṁ kāśīkha° 4 a° haridrāṁ kuṅkumaṁ

caiva sindūraṁ kajjalaṁ tathā . kurpāsakañca tāmbūlaṁ

māṅgalyābharaṇaṁ śubham . kaśasaskārakavarīkarakarṇavibhūṣaṇam .

bharturāyuṣyamicchantī dīrayecca pativratā .

sulohita “su-lohita” mfn. very red

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sulohita adj. “ganz roth” RĀJAN. 6, 81. f. ā Bez. “einer der sieben

Zungen” Agni’s (vgl. lohitā) ŚABDAM. im ŚKDR. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 4.

MĀRK. P. 99, 55.

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” mf (“ā”) n. of a good or beautiful colour, brilliant in

hue, bright, golden, yellow &c. &c.

mf (“ā”) n. gold, made of gold

mf (“ā”) n. of a good tribe or caste

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a good colour

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a good tribe or class

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of bdellium

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. the thorn-apple

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of metre

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. N. of a Deva-gandharva

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of an ascetic

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a minister of Daśa-ratha

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a son of Antarīkṣa, Vp.

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a king of Kāśmīra

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a poet

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. (rarely n.) a partic. weight of gold (= 1 Karsha, =

16 Māṣas, = 80 Raktikās, = about 175 grains troy) &c.

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a gold coin

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of bulbous plant (= “suvarṇālu”)

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of aloe

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of sacrifice

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. turmeric

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. Sida Rhomboidea or Cordifolia

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. another plant (= “svarṇakṣīrī”)

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a bitter gourd, colocynth

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. N. of one of the seven tongues of fire

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a daughter of Ikṣvāku (the wife of Su-hotra)

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. the plant Salvinia Cucullata

(perhaps w.r. for “sukarṇī”).

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. gold (of which 57 synonyms are given) &c. &c.

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. money, wealth, property, riches

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. a sort of yellow sandal-wood

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. the flower of Mesua Roxburghii

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. a kind of vegetable (= “gaura-suvarṇa”)

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. red ochre (= “suvarṇagairika”)

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. the right pronunciation of sounds

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. N. of a Tīrtha

suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. of a partic. world

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

suvarṇa a. [śobhano varṇo’sya]

(1) Of good or beautiful colour, brilliant in hue, bright, yellow, golden.

(2) Of a good tribe or caste.

(3) Of good fame, glorious, celebrated. –rṇaḥ

(1) A good colour.

(2) A good tribe or caste.

(3) A sort of sacrifice.

(4) An epithet of Śiva.

(5) The thorn-apple. –rṇā

(1) One of the seven tongues of fire.

(2) Black aloe-wood.

(3) Turmeric.

(4) Colocynth. –rṇaṁ

(1) Gold.

(2) A golden coin (–m. also); nanvahaṁ daśasuvarṇān prayacchāmi

Mk. 2.

(3) A weight of gold equal to 16 Māṣas or about 175 grains Troy (m.

also).

(4) Money, wealth, riches.

(5) A sort of yellow sandal-wood.

(6) A kind of red chalk.

(7) N. of a tree (nāgakeśara).

— Comp.

–akṣaḥ N. of Śiva.

–ākhyaḥ 1. N. of a tree (nāgakeśara). –2. the thorn-apple.

–abhiṣekaḥ sprinkling the bride and bridegroom with water into

which a piece of gold has been dropped.

–kadalī a variety of plantain.

–kartṛ, –kāra, –kṛt m. a goldsmith.

–gaṇinaṁ a particular method of calculation in arithmetic.

–gairikaṁ a kind of red-halk.

–jīṁvikaḥ N. of a tribe; (gāṁcikaḥ śāṁkhikaścaiva kāṁsyako

maṇikārakaḥ . suvarṇajīvikaścaiva paṁcaitevaṇijaḥ smṛtāḥ .. –puṣpaḥ the

globe-amaranth.

–puṣpita a. a bounding in gold; e. g. suvarṇapuṣpitāṁ pṛthvīṁ

vicinvaṁti trayo janāḥ . śūraśca kṛtavidyaśca yaśca jānāti sevituṁ Pt. 1.

45.

–pṛṣṭha a. coated with gold, gilded.

–biṁduḥ 1. N. of Viṣṇu. –2. a form of Śiva.

–mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance.

–yūyī yellow jasmine.

–rūṣyaka a. abounding in gold and silver.

–retas m. an epithet of Śiva.

–vaṇij m. N. of a mixed caste

–varṇaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

–varṇā turmeric.

–siddhaḥ an adept who has acquired gold by magical means.

–steyaṁ stealing of gold (one of the five Mahāpātakas q. v.).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

suvarṇa 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “schönfarbig, schön aussehend”, insbes. “von

schimmernder Farbe, goldig” (Gegens. durvarṇa) ṚV. 10, 68, 3. Wasser

AV. 1, 33, 1. stokāḥ 12, 3, 28. 13, 1, 22. 3, 16. TBR. 3, 7, 6, 1. darbha

KĀṬH. 31, 14. ṢAḌV. BR. 4, 7. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. Ind. St. 8, 273. dāsī MBH.

3, 14695. 13, 3427. ŚRUT. 22. mārjāra MBH. 5, 5437. Besonders von der

Farbe des Goldes: suvarṇaṁ hiraṇyam TBR. 1, 4, 7, 4. 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 4, 5.

3, 3, 4, 5. 8, 2, 4. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 1, 7. 13, 1, 1, 3. 2, 3, 2. MBH. 3, 2262.

R. 1, 74, 5. hiraṇyaṁ ca suvarṇaṁ ca 2, 76, 15. nach dem Comm. zu R.

soll suvarṇa “Gold” und hiraṇya “Silber” bedeuten. — b) “golden”:

suvarṇarajatābhyāṁ kuśībhyām TBR. 1, 5, 10, 1. 7. ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 5, 2.

12, 8, 3, 11. CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 6. 3, 19, 1. bhūṣaṇāni R. GORR. 2, 99, 34.

— c) “zu einer guten Kaste gehörig” MBH. 13, 2607. — 2) n. “Gold” AK. 2,

9, 94. H. 1043. an. 3, 231. MED. ṇ. 84. fg. HALĀY. 2, 18. RATNAM. 87.

RĀJAN. 13, 8. AV. 15, 1, 2. sarvaṁ suvarṇaṁ (?) haritam TBR. 3, 12, 6,

6. ŚAT. BR. 11, 4, 1, 8. PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 7, 2. M. 8, 131.

321. 11, 250. -caura 49. -steya 98. fg. 101. MBH. 13, 3936. fgg. -rajataiḥ

R. 2, 32, 14. SUŚR. 1, 142, 17. 227, 19. -cūrṇa 369, 4.

durjanahutāśataptaṁ kāvyasuvarṇaṁ viśuddhimāyāti Spr. (II) 2858.

4074. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 41, 7. 42, 6. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 356. BHĀG. P.

5, 16, 21. PAÑCAT. 191, 25. -maṇikulyā RĀJA-TAR. 1, 97. -muṣṭi LALIT.

ed. Calc. 202, 4. -bhasmana Verz. d. B. H. No. 994. -dāna Verz. d. Oxf. H.

87,a,36. fg. suvarṇāṅkuśa “aus Gold” R. 1, 53, 17. 2, 81, 2. RAGH. 3, 64.

HIT. 10, 9. 11, 5 -rūpakaśata RĀJA-TAR. 6, 45. zu den werthvollen Gaben

gehören: -dhenu Verz. d. Oxf. H. 35,a,33. -medinī 45,a,24. -vṛṣabha 26.

fg. — 3) m. (seltener n.) “als Gewicht ein” Karsha “Gold” AK.2,9,87.

TR.3,3,141. H. 884. H. an. MED. M.8,134. fg. YĀJÑ.1,362. COLEBR. Alg.

2. SUŚR.2,175,13. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH.1,1,17. WEBER, JYOT. 83. Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 307,b,4. PRĀYAŚCITTEND.7,a,8. M.8,213. 220. 361. śataṁ

śatasahasrāṇi suvarṇasya MBH. 3, 483. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 102. sāṣṭe śate

suvarṇānām AK.3,4,1,13. MṚCCH. 34,13. 18. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 151,a,10.

PAÑCAT. 134,3. fgg. HIT. 98,11, v. l. dvisuvarṇadhanam P. 6, 2, 55, Schol.

adhyardha-, dvi- adj. 5, 1, 29, Vārtt., Schol. VET. in LA. (III) 23, 18. 28, 4.

ṭaṅkasahasrasuvarṇa 24, 4 schwerlich richtig (suvarṇa wohl zu

streichen). BURNOUF, Intr. 238. HIOUEN-THSANG 2, 29. — 4) n. “Geld,

Reichthum” H. an. — 5) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = suvarṇālu

(suvarṇānu MED.) und kṛṣṇāguru, n. H. an. m. MED. n. = haricandana

MED. = nāgakesara RĀJAN. 6, 179. = gaurasuvarṇa 7, 152. m. =

kaṇaguggulu (vgl. suvarṇakaṇa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. “Stechapfel” ŚKDR.

nach AK. (vgl. 2, 4, 2, 58). — 6) n. “eine Art Röthel” (svarṇagairika)

RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — 7) n. “richtige Aussprache der Laute” ŚAT. BR. 14,

4, 1, 28. -vid 11, 4, 1, 8. — 8) “eine Art Opfer”, n. H. an. m. MED. — 9) m.

“ein best.” Daṇḍaka-“Metrum” Ind. St. 8, 408. — 10) f. ā Bez.

verschiedener Pflanzen: = haridrā RĀJAN. 6, 198. = vāṭyālaka ŚABDAC.

im ŚKDR. = svarṇakṣīrī RĀJAN. 5, 53. — 11) f. ī “eine best. Pflanze”, =

ākhukarṇī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. richtig sukarṇī unsere Hdschrr. — 12) N. pr.

a) m. a) eines Devagandharva MBH. 1, 4814. — b) pl. einer Klasse von

Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu MĀRK. P. 94, 23. — g) eines Büssers MBH.

13, 4678. fgg. — d) eines Rathgebers des Fürsten Daśaratha R. GORR. 2,

82, 11. — e) eines Sohnes des Antarīkṣa VP. 463. — z) eines Fürsten der

Kāśmīra RĀJA-TAR. 1, 97. — b) f. ā einer Tochter Ikṣvāku’s und Gattin

Suhotra’s MBH. 1, 3787. — c) n. a) eines Tīrtha MBH. 3, 7096. — b) einer

Erde: savurṇākhyaṁ jagat MBH. 5, 3551. — Nach gaṇa ardharcādi zu

P.2,4,31. TRIK.3,5,10 und SIDDH. K. 249,a,5 ist suvarṇa m. n. Vgl.

sauvarṇa u. s. w. und svarṇa.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

suvarṇa 1 I A Devagandharva. A famous celibate, he attended the

birthday celebrations of Arjuna. (Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 122, Verse

58).

suvarṇa 2 II A Brahmin sage with his body golden in colour. He once held

a talk with Manu about meritorious acts and sins. (Anuśāsana Parva,

Chapter 98).

suvarṇa (m) (M) A unit of measurement in ancient India

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

suvarṇa a. of a beautiful colour or appearance, glittering golden;

belonging to a good caste. n. gold, riches; m. (n.) a cert. weight of gold.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

suvarṇa su-varṇa, a. V. E.: having a beautiful colour, brilliant, glittering,

golden; made of gold (rare); belonging to a good caste (E., rare); n. (V.,

C.) gold; wealth; m. (rarely n.) a weight = one Karṣa of gold; m. N.: –

kaṅkaṇa, n. glod bracelet;

-kartṛ, m. goldsmith;

-kāra, m. id.;

-cūla, m. a bird;

-dāna, n. gift of gold;

-dvīpa, m. n. gold island, perhaps Sumatra;

-pārśva, N. of a locality;

-puṣpa, a. having gold as flowers (earth);

-bindu, N. of a temple;

-maya, a. (ī) consisting of gold;

-roman, m. (golden-fleeced), ram;

-lekhā, f. streak of gold (on a touchstone);

-vat, 1. ad. like gold; 2. a. containing or possessing gold, opulent: -ī, f.

N. of a town in Dakṣiṇā-patha;

-vas-tra+ādhi, n. money, clothes, etc.;

-sānūra, N. of a locality;

-siddha, m. adept in the magical obtainment of gold.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

suvarṇa na° suṣṭhu varṇo’sya . 1 svanāmakhyate dhātubhede amaraḥ 2

haricandane medi° . 3 svarṇagairike ratnamā° 4 dhane hemaca° . 5

nāgakesare rājani° . karṣaṁ suvarṇasya suvarṇasaṁjñam ityukte

karṣamite 6 kāñcane pu° līlā° . 7 yajñabhede 8 dhustūre 9 kaṇaguggulau

ca pu° rājani° . suṣṭhu varṇo rūpasakṣaraṁ vāsya . 10 surūpe 11

sundarākṣarayukte ca tri° . na suvarṇamayī tanuḥ paraṁ nanu vāgapi

tāvakī tathā naiṣa° . 12 karṣaparimāṇe vaidyaka° . agniretasśabde 59 pṛ°

kanakaśabde ca 1644 pṛ° suvarṇadhātūvapattiguṇādikaṁ dṛśyaṁm .

tavya śodhanasāraṇaprakārādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā tatra

pāraṇāya yogya suvarṇamāha dāhe raktaṁ sitaṁchede niṣake

kuṅkumaprabham . tāraśulvotthitaṁ snigdhaṁ komalaṁ guru hema sat

(sat uttamam) chede tu kaṭhinaṁ rūkṣaṁ vivarṇaṁ samalaṁ dalam .

dāhe chede’sitaṁ śvetaṁ kaṣe tyājyaṁ sphuṭaṁ laghu . dalaṁ (doyata)

iti loke sphuṭaṁ yad ghanāhataṁ sphuṭati . śodhanavidhiḥ

pattalīkṛtapatrāṇi hemno vahnau pratāpayet . niṣiñcet taptataptāni taile

takre ca kāñjike . gomūtre ca kulatthānāṁ kaṣāye tu tridhā tridhā . evaṁ

hemnaḥ pareṣaḥñca dhātanāṁ śodhanaṁ bhavet . athāśuddhasya

dodhaḥ valaṁ savīryaṁ harate narāṇāṁ rogavraja poṣayatīha kāye .

asaukhyakāryeva sadā suvarṇamaśuddhametanmaraṇañca kuryāt .

svarṇasya māraṇavidhiḥ svarṇamya dviguṇaṁ sūtamamlena saha

mardayet . tadgolakasamaṁ gandhaṁ nidadhyādadharottaram .

svarṇasya atitanūkṛtapatrasya . gandham gandhakacūrṇam . golakañca

tato ruddhvā śarāvadṛḍhasapuṭe . triṁśadvanopalairdadyāt puṭānyeva

caturdaṁśa . nirutthaṁ jāyate bhasma gandho deyaḥ punaḥ punaḥ .

ruddhvā savastrakuṭṭitacikvaṇamṛttikayā vanopalaḥ (goghaṭhāḥ iti loke)

nirutthaṁ yat punarna jīvati . athānyaprakāraḥ kāñcane galite gandhaṁ

ṣoḍaśāṁśena niḥkṣipet . cūrṇayitvā tathāmleta ghṛṣṭvākṛtvā tu golakam .

golakena samaṁ gandhaṁ dattvā caivādharottaram . śarāvasaṁpuṭe

dhṛtvā puṭettriṁśad vanopalaiḥ . evaṁ saptapuṭairhema nirutthaṁ

bhasma jāyate . atrāpi pūrvavadgandhaḥ . anyacca kāñcanārarasairghṛṣṭā

samasūtakagandhayoḥ . kajjalīṁ hemapatrāṇi lepayet samayā tayā .

samayā hemapatra samayā kāñcanāratvacaḥ kalkairmūṣāyugnaṁ

prakalpayet . dhṛtvā tatsampuṭe golaṁ mṛnmūṣāsampuṭe ca tat . nidhāya

sandhirodhañca kṛtvā saṁśovya golakam . vahniṁ kharataraṁ

kuryādevaṁ dattvā puṭatrayam . nirutthaṁ jāyate bhasmasarvakarmasu

yojayet . kāñcanāraprakāreṇa lāṅgalī hanti kāñcanam . lāṅgalī (karihārī)

jvālāmukhī tathā hanyāt tathā hanti manaḥśilā . śilāsindūrayoścūrṇaṁ

samayorarkadugdhakaiḥ . saptaghā bhāvanān dadyācchoṣayecca punaḥ

punaḥ . tatastu galite hemni kalko’yaṁ dīyate samaḥ .

punardhamedatitarāṁ yathā kalko vilīyate . evaṁ velātrayaṁ dadyāt

kalakaṁ hemamṛtirbhavet . evaṁ māritasya suvarṇasya guṇāḥ suvarṇaṁ

śītalaṁ vṛṣyaṁ valyaṁ guru rasāyanam . svādu tiktaṁ ca tuvaraṁ pāke

ca svādu picchilam . pavitraṁ vṛṁhaṇaṁ netryaṁ

medhāsmṛtimatipradam . hṛdyamāyuṣkara kāntivāgviśuddhisthiratvakṛt .

viṣadvayakṣayonmādatridoṣajvaraśoṣajit . vṛṣyaṁ vṛṣāya kāmukāya hitam

. asamyaṅmāritaṁ svarṇaṁ valaṁ vīryañca nāśavet . karoti

rogānmṛtyuñca taddhanyād yatnatastataḥ tadbhedādikaṁ rājani° uktaṁ

yathā dāhe’tiraktamatha yacca sitaṁ chidāyāṁ kāśmīrakānti ca vibhāti

nikāṣapaṭṭe . snigdhañca gauravamupaiti ca yattulāyāṁ jānīta

devakanakaṁ mṛdu raktapītam . tatraikaṁ rasavedhajaṁ tadaparaṁ

jātaṁ svayaṁbhūmijaṁ kiñcānyadbahulohasaṅkarabhavaṁ ceti tridhā

kāñcanam . tatrādyaṁ kila pītaraktamapara raktaṁ tato’nyat yathā

gaurābhaṁ taditi krameṇa gaditaṁ syāt pūrvapūrvottamam . tatra

rasavedhajasya karaṇaprakāraḥ ānīya pāradaṁ devi! sthāpayet

prastaropari . tasyopari japenmantraṁ sarvabandhamayātmakam .

sāṣṭasahasraṁ deveśi! prajapet sādhakāgraṇīḥ .

svayambhūpuṣpasaṁyukte vastre cāruṇasannibhe . saṁsthāpya pāradaṁ

devi! mṛtpātra yugale śive! . puṣpayuktena sūtreṇa badhnīyāt

bahuyatnataḥ . mṛttikayā rajenaiva dhānyasya parameśvari! .

lepayedbahuyatnena raudre śuṣkāṇi kārayet . punaśca lepayeddhīmān

tato vahnau viniḥkṣipet . aṣṭamīnavamīrātrau kṣipennaiva sureśvari! .

atha vā parameśāni! mṛtpātre sthāpayedrasam . vallīrasena taddravyaṁ

śodhayed bahuyatnataḥ . ghṛtanārīrasenaiva tathaiva śodhanaṁ caret .

evaṁ kṛte tu guṭikā yadi syāt dṛḍhabandhanā . dhustūrañca samānīya

madhye śūnyañca kārayet . kṛṣṇākhyatulasīyoge tathā ghṛtakumārikā .

evaṁ kṛte vahniyoge bhasmasāt jāyate dhruvam . bhasmayāge bhavet

svarṇaṁ dhanadāyāḥ prasādataḥ . vivarṇaṁ jāyate dravyaṁ yadi pūjāṁ

na cācaret mātṛkā bhedatattre 5 pa° . bahulohasaṅkarabhavasya

karacavidhiḥ gāruḍe 188 a° . suvarṇakaraṇaṁ śṛṇu ityupakrame pītaṁ

dhustūrapuṣpañca sīsakañca palonmitam . pāṭhālāṅgalaśākhā ca

mūlamāvartanāṅbhavet . suvarṇaṁ cāmbau dahyamānaṁ na kṣoyate

yathoktaṁ yājña° agnau suvarṇamakṣīṇam .

karṣamitabrāhmaṇasvāmikakāñcanarūpasuvarṇaharaṇaṁ mahāpāta t .

mahāpātalanirūpaṇe pāyaścittavivekaḥ .

(also, “pale with fright”), greenish, green (also; “verdant” as opp. to

“śuṣka” “dry”) &c. &c.

harita m. yellowish (the colour)

harita m. Phaseolus Mungo qr Lobatus

harita m. a lion

harita m. N. of a son of Kaiśyapa

harita m. of a son of Yadu

harita m. of a son of Rohita

harita m. of a son of Rohitāśva

harita m. of a son of Yuvanāśva

harita m. of a son of Parāvṛit

harita m. of a son of Vapushmat

harita m. of an ichneumon (v.l. “hariṇa”)

harita m. pl. the descendants of Harita (also called “harītāḥ”), āśvśr. (cf.

mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. N. of partic. verses of the (also “haretā

mantrāḥ”)

mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. of a class of gods in the 12th Manvantara

harita mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. (“ā”) f. Dūrvā grass (= “nīla-dūrva”

mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. turmeric

mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. a brown-coloured grape

mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. Sesbana Aegyptiaca

mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. a kind of Svara-bhakti

harita n. a yellowish or greenish substance

harita n. gold

harita n. greens, vegetables (“unripe grain”

harita n. a kind of fragrant plant (= “sthauṇcyaka”)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

harita a. (tā or hariṇī f.) [hṛ-itac] Green, of a green colour, verdant;

ramyāṁtaraḥ kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ S. 4. 10; Ku. 4. 14; Me. 21; Ki. 5.

38.

(2) Tawny.

(3) Dark-blue. –taḥ

(1) The green colour.

(2) A lion.

(3) A kind of grass.

— Comp.

–aśman m. 1. an emerald. –2. blue vitriol.

–chada a. green-leaved.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harita UṆĀDIS. 3, 93. 1) adj. (f. ā und hariṇī ŚĀNT. 2, 20. P. 4, 1, 39.

VOP. 4, 27. AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. an. 3, 233. MED. ṇ. 87. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL.

zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 46. hariṇī in der älteren, haritā in der späteren Sprache)

“falb, gelblich; grünlich, grün” (daher auch im Gegensatz zu śuṣka dem

“verdorrten Kraut”) AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1395. MED. t. 175.

HALĀY. 4, 49. mṛga ṚV. 10, 86, 3. Rosse MBH. 13, 4923. Bart des Indra

ṚV. 10, 23, 4. Wagen u. s. w. 3, 44, 1. 4. 10, 96, 3. 9. Soma und was

dazu gehört: śṛṅge śiśāno hariṇī 9, 70, 7. ruc 111, 1. 10, 94, 2. AV. 6, 49,

2. dhānāḥ 18, 4, 34. Frosch ṚV. 7, 103, 4. 6. 10. takman AV. 1, 23, 2. 5,

22, 2. 6, 20, 3. śocañchuṣkāsu hariṇīṣu jarbhurat ṚV. 10, 92, 1. vanaspati

9, 5, 10. AV. 10, 8, 31. kuśa ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 10, 6. Gras LĀṬY. 2, 11, 15.

KĀṬH. 32, 1. KAUṢ. UP. 2, 8. HARIV. 3574. R. GORR. 2, 65, 16. 3, 73, 39.

KIR. 5, 38. AK. 2, 1, 10. 9, 16. TRIK. 3, 3, 297. H. 955. HALĀY. 2, 4.

BHĀG. P. 3, 22, 30. Bohne SUŚR. 1, 197, 18. kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ

ŚĀK. 86. – ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 1, 20. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 4. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5,

54. 8, 17. 9, 44. 30, 12. fg. 54, 30. 34. 67, 5. 68, 91. BṚH. 2, 5. LAGHUJ.

1, 6. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 270. -puṣpa KAUŚ.10. 26. 116.

vaiḍūryamaṇiratnābhaḥ prāsādo haritaprabhaḥ HARIV. 8985. -pāṇḍu

SUŚR. 1, 159, 19. -kapiśa MEGH. 21. haritāruṇa KUMĀRAS. 4, 14. –

gomaya wohl “frischer Kuhmist” KAUŚ. 19. GOBH. 4, 8, 12. “gelb” als

Farbe des Goldes AV. 4, 37, 4. 7, 99, 1. 10, 2, 33. 3, 3. 11, 2, 12. 15, 2, 1.

ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 6. rukma KĀṬH. 10, 14. VS. 23, 37. AIT. BR. 1, 23. TS.

6, 2, 3, 1. TBR. 1, 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 9, 8. 3, 9, 6, 5. “gelb” (vor Schrecken),

“bleich” (vgl. hariṇa) TS. 6, 5, 5, 2. hariṇī śyāvā “gelbbraun” (ohne Röthe)

als Farbe der Schwangeren TBR. 2, 3, 8, 1. — 2) m. a) “Phaseolus Mungo”

(mudga) H. 1172. “ein best. Gras”, = manthānaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b)

“Löwe” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) pl. Bez. eines Abschnittes des

AV. 19, 22, 5. hierher vielleicht haritā mantrāḥ (so trennen wir) Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 93,a,1 v. u. — d) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern im 12ten

Manvantara MĀRK. P. 94, 23. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 29. — b) verschiedener

Männer P. 4, 1, 100. PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 56, 7 (haritakutsa-

zu lesen; vgl. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3). Kaśyapa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33. ein

Sohn Jadu’s HARIV. 4206. Rohita’s 758. BHĀG. P. 9, 8, 1. Rohitāśva’s VP.

373. Yuvanāśva’s 369. Parāvṛt’s (vgl. hari) 420. 421, N. 13. Vapushmant’s

MĀRK. P. 53, 27. pl. Harita’s Nachkommen (vgl. hārita) P. 2, 4, 67, Vārtt.

ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3 (im comp.). — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12,

4942. hariṇa ed. Bomb. — 3) f. haritā a) Dūrvā-“Gras” TRIK. 3, 3, 194.

MED. = haridrā “Gelbwurz” DHANV. 1, 17. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = jayantī,

kapiladrākṣā, pācī und nīladūrvā RĀJAN. ebend. — b) “eine best.”

Svarabhakti (v. l. haritā und hā-) Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. — 4) f.

hariṇī s. u. hariṇa — 5) n. a) “Gold” AV. 5, 28, 5. 9. 11, 3, 8. KĀṬH. 8, 5. —

b) “Grünes” so v. a. “Gemüse” CARAKA 1, 27. — c) “eine best.

wohlriechende Pflanze”, = sthauṇeyaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pīta-

und hārita.

harita 1) Adj. (f. haritā) in der älteren Sprache hariṇī “falb, gelblich” (von

der Gesichtsfarbe eines Erschrockenen) ; “grünlich, grün” 304,23. 2) m.

a) “Phaseolus Mungo.” b) “eine best. Grasart”, = manthānaka

RĀJAN.8,135. c) “Löwe.” d) Pl. Bez. “bestimmter Sprüche.” Auch haritā

mantrāḥ. e) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Gruppe von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu.

b) verschiedener Männer. g) eines Ichneumons. 3) f. haritā a) “Dūrvā-

Gras” ŚIŚ.4,21 (am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā) = nīladūrvā RĀJAN.8,108.

b) “Gelbwurz.” c) “grüne Traube” RĀJAN.11,104. d) “Sesbania

aegyptiaca” RĀJAN.4,133. e) “eine best. Svarabhakti.” 4) n. a) “gelblicher

oder grünlicher Stoff” ŚAT.BR.14,7,1,20.2,12. b) “Gold.” c) “Grünes”, so

v.a. “Gemüse” VIṢṆUS.5,85 (nach dem Comm. “unreifes Getraide).” d)

eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze, = sthauṇeyaka.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

harita 1 I A King who was the grandson of Hariścandra and son of

Rohita. (Bhāgavata, 10th Skandha).

harita 2 II A King, who was the son of Vapuṣmān and grandson of

Svāyambhuvamanu. He was King of Haritavarṣa in the island of Śālmali.

(Mārkaṇḍeya Purāṇa 50, 28; Brahmāṇḍa Purāṇa, 2, 3).

harita 3 III A son born to Yadu of the nāga woman called Dhūmravaṇā.

He founded an independent kingdom in the Nāga island and became a

prominent leader of the Madgura tribe. (Hari Vaṁśa, 2, 38; 29, 34).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

harita harita,

I. adj., f. tā, or iṇī (cf. hariṇa),

1. Green, Megh. 21; Hit. i. d. 178, M. M. (in haritī-kṛta, adj. Made

green)

2. Dark blue, Kir. 5, 38.

3. Grassy.

II. m.

1. Green, the colour.

2. A lion.

III. f. tā.

1. Bent grass.

2. Turmeric.

3. A brown grape.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

harita (f. ā, older hariṇī fallow, pale, yellow, green. m. N. of sev. men

etc.; f. haritā Dūrvā grass; n. gold, greens, any yellowish or greenish

substance.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

harita har-ita, a. (ā, C.: hariṇī, V.) yellowish, tawny; pale (with fright);

greenish, green (C.); n. gold (V.); vegetable (C.): -ka, a. green; n. grass;

vegetable;

-kapiśa, a. yellowish brown;

-cchada, a. having green leaves;

-dhānya, n. green = unripe corn;

-pattra-maya, a. (ī) formed of green leaves; (harita) -sraj, a. bearing

yellow (or green) festoons (trees; AV.); adorned with a golden chain

(steed; Br.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harita pu° hṛ–itac . 1 siṁhe 2 manthānatṛṇe rājani° 3 haridvarṇe 4

tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca . 5 dūrvāyāṁ medi° 6

jayantyāṁ 7 haridrāyāṁ 8 kapiladrākṣāyāṁ 9 pācyāṁ 10 nīladūrvāyāñca

strī rājani° ṭāp . 11 sthauṇeyake na° rājani° .

has the colour (red) of the sky at sunset. (Vana Parva, Chapter 158,

Verse 94).